Home

LXE MX7 Scanner User Manual

1. Settings Odyssey Client x Factory Default Settings Settings Commands Tools Help Settings Configure Configure Detailed Status m Networks Blank Security Settings Detailed Status Refresh EAP FAST Settings Security Settings Sens Session Resumption 12 hours Enabled Disable Odyssey z AE z Exit Automatic Reauthentication Disabled Temporary Trust 12 hours Enabled K E EAP FAST Settings 00 A0 E8 45 42 C9 Acquire credentials from new server Enabled Packets in out Replace credentials upon failure Enabled 28124 Trusted Servers Blank Details Disable Odyssey Immediate disabling Exit L Figure 5 17 Odyssey Client Screens Settings Configure Use this option to edit add and delete networks Detailed Status Configure advanced security options related to authentication Security This option allows the user to enable session resumption automatic Settings reauthentication and server temporary trust EAP FAST Configure Odyssey to prompt for permission before acquiring new EAP Settings FAST credentials E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 192 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Trusted Servers Use this option to edit add and delete trusted servers and server certificates Disable Tapping this menu option disables Odyssey immediately Odyssey should be Odyssey disabled before setting Wireless Zero Config optio
2. 172 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Unhook taskbar wndproc failure AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar LOG ERROR This error does not affect AppLock processing Unhook wndproc failure AppLock could not remove the hook that allows LOG ERROR monitoring of the application Unhooking taskbar In administration mode the taskbar should return to LOG EX normal operation so AppLock s control of the taskbar should be removed Unhooking wndproc When the administrator leaves user mode the device is LOG EX fully operational therefore AppLock must stop monitoring the locked application WM SIZE adjusted This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the LOG EX window size X after Ctrl L Processing the backdoor entry LOG EX Ret from password lt gt Return value from password dialog LOG EX Decrypt data len lt gt Length of decrypted password LOG EX Window handle to The window handle that is passed to the enumeration LOG EX enumwindows x function This message can be used by engineering with other development tools to trouble shoot application lock failures WM_WINDOWPOSCHG Output the window size after it has been adjusted by LOG_EX adjusted x AppLock MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B AppLock Registry Settings 173 AppLock Registry Settings This system application runs at startup via the launch feature of LXE Windows CE devic
3. 109 Registry and save settings sse 31 Registry content back up location et 126 Registry settings ADP LOCk eroe erre et rr eds 173 REGLOAD EXE 2 2 iecit eee 139 REMOVE propr rni iesestt neris 109 Request the user certificate 229 Reset warm and reset cold sss 41 Review System and mobile device data and revision level s ce ecco a 122 higioone RE 24 Roaming WARY iiiianeednoci ets seedscesceeens 239 Root CA Certificates Download tete ptt esa 225 Installing on mobile device 227 RS 232 and Power port esee 38 RSSI Reading Interval sssssss 238 RSSI Threshold 2 ner 238 S Save settings 3 ici eee dei ees 31 Save amp Exit buttons sss 239 Scan Good and Bad Scan sounds 125 Scan Aperture red or clear ssssss 6 Scan Status LED eet terret 51 SCANBAD WAV eseeeeeeerteeee eene 125 SCANGOOD WAV cecccseseesceseteeseseeaeerenteaeers 125 Scanner M in tabs e ERES 111 Scanner Control Characters Tab 115 Scanner engine type uice rino 280 Scanner LED functioning eee 30 Scanner factory defaults ssssuss 110 Scanning and data entry eee ete peces 30 MX7 Reference Guide Schemes tabs iae e D pes 108 Screwdri
4. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnennrnnn 19 Keypad SHOMGCUUS eH 19 Sofware SOUP 20 Touchscreen Calba MOD oportere REO vinta tua ains Mace eatev tieu ptr 20 Set Time Zone OPONA oi sctesccadsves cas ab Sape cer bur Sere ride erasers cats Feed aae ues ree ERE IR A 20 Enter Owner Information Optional tee eter tei err SEE Ru el Tete bo bt tope E Pale ege 20 Setthe Display Backlist TIMEN su RE teu neatis M qM ME t ei ND ER i eres 21 Set the MX7 Power Schemes TITiets s oie pim be ERE ENTRAR V yang AES uU YE TOM ee deter seandieniaides 21 Set The Audio Speaker V ol fe ue ete teet eo eR bep edente gu a E d MA pa OAG 22 Usma the Keypad ooaeeqnne pieni dinde ie e Un eben der TE EES 22 NJ sims the Touchscreen soto ito DEO a Dea dox pese anes ate Ph I Dau tants pet DN ONCE TR A NR UINT USE 22 Applying the Protectrye Film to the Display tiseeet iios oeb oes etis pes i a EE 23 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide ii Table of Contents oo Copy the MX7 LXEbook to the MX7 Optional sssrinin 23 Radio and Network SERUBL incsnnissnssaeassninintnaniannsoanssaniaansaantannbasnibindianiaanananbinboandbanaon 24 Terminal Emulation Setup R 24 Installing User Certificates and Private Keys e 25 User Certificate m 26 PEIN AUG NOUS DULL ULIS 2T Entenng DB Peace ERR RR REREHRRR cree sree MM PRENNE MM nectar cn nce eer 28 Usine
5. 7 Trigger Handle spinien eer ee Eo re ERE NE Ker NENEVE E E OE A R EEEIEE NEE 8 Hands tapenaina PE 8 Quek o cats ater eda 9 Troubleshooting meia ee E A A vaN a e a T S 10 Entenng the Multi AppLock Activation Kay ete riter nnn A A EA 10 MONE Yini EE 10 TOC EE 10 Lr 10000 1 Se eraa Romer Ee 11 Installing Trigger Handle Optional siete itecto reto Dee beso teneo som Regan ho et REA Raa 11 Insertng the Main Battery vc oceseesee ter rekna terr pad p el EUH Ete noua tandems 12 About Lithiumi loin Batteries x2 cen iecit tor pete t etu a ET E O 12 Instalhng the Hands trap i scsssssccassssesedesgearzacsseesaadsbiagueed E iet eee basique paese IO oko UE eese RE e RARE Ree e QUE 13 Connecting an External Power Supply Optional ecrit teen aa 14 Puting 1 all dasetberaco ie shure skews ca tete tater ien e ribs miae ect eur RN 14 Assembling tiec AC Power AOADUSEL er n e e Ger ee ed SH UH UE E ase 14 Connecting the Multipurpose USB Power Cable tit ene utri terea ruit ee Porn 15 Connecting the Multipurpose RS 232 Power Cable sse 15 Connecting taa Printer Interface Cable ciere Fer rere Eb Roe Ea eger EU m RH ER ri 16 Connecuns the Audio Cable anda Headset eii nete Ye et XE a TEE 16 Adjust Microphone and Secure the Cable ee e rettet psc te ep bee peo bb ER 17 EBteritio Data dessca tie sione cere testae ce oes tUe idis pan oaSen eae dt edu E 17 ax dioc Ee 18 Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus
6. wy Seam Qf 9 39 AM d f e ty Sean B or 9 02 AM A we Scann LI 9 29 aa AS Figure 3 28 Barcode Advanced Prefix Suffix Prefix Suffix and pre existing data is ignored when Use Advanced Barcode Processing 1s enabled Strip Leading Strip Trailing Characters This feature when enabled strips the specified number of characters from a barcode either from the beginning leading or at the end trailing or both When this feature and the Add Prefix and or Add Suffix features are both enabled the leading and trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is appended The configuration for stripping leading and trailing characters is specified independently To enable either or both of the checkboxes labeled Strip Leading and Strip Trailing must be checked Then the number of characters to be stripped can be typed into the edit control or set using the spin control on the right of the edit control The maximum number of characters that can be stripped is 99 characters for each leading and trailing number of characters When the Strip Leading and Strip Trailing checkboxes are blank or disabled the edit controls are disabled however the last specified number of characters to strip is retained and dimmed When the number of characters to be stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode a good read beep is sounded but all barcode data is discarded Prefix Suffix If
7. 159 Password screensaver sess 106 RE Sits itene ui dere RU IE 10 CALCU P ex ses ses eves sober sencsys 10 turbo mode SWITCHING 2 n iret ires 35 U Writs tall PLO STAM a septo rrt terns 109 USB Client and Power port sss 38 User access power up password ssssseeeene 106 user certificate and a separate private key file 229 User Certificate on the MX7 i eie 234 User Certificates Genetatinp viae oie 229 User certificates and private keys 25 User specific application version information 89 Utilities Coldb00t ii oi HEP HERES DS ERASIERIS 141 Lauticli cni HR A E 135 Regedit issued eure rede 139 RG OA oes aco tette bee 139 W arm bO0ts nore iih 139 Wav Play i coder rh De A eR 139 V Vehicle Mounting Bracket Installation Procedure sesssss 61 Version CODO i o cte eiie 73 Version window information sssss 89 Video SUDSYStEM cs o ete nr t ERU een 36 View DiSPl e 55 Virtual keyboard Input panel eig 28 Virtual Keyboard sissie ute 97 VK Code Est eenia epe neat 283 Voice ACCESSOTIES i ores DECIR PE eus 32 Voice Cala osten teme needs 30 Voice data entry and the microphone 17 MX7 Reference Guide 294 Volume adjust audio volume sssseesss 22 using the keypad eae nett 22 Volume and Sounds
8. OF 1 56 PM A 4 tall Odys Funk Odyssey Client Settings Menu Tap Add to Configure a Profile Figure 5 21 Funk Odyssey Client Settings Menu Start the Funk Odyssey client configuration by tapping the Odyssey Client icon Tap Settings Configure Tap the Add button to configure a profile The Add Network Wizard screen is displayed MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 195 Enter an optional description Is this an infrastructure network use access points or an ad hoc network peer to peer infrastructure e Figure 5 22 Add Network Wizard Screen EI AES rm A On the Add Network Wizard screen enter the SSID of the wireless network If the SSID is being broadcast by the AP tap Scan and choose the correct SSID Choose Infrastructure for the network type Tap the Next button to continue or the Cancel button to ignore changes made on this screen No Encryption Edit Network Wizard Association Mode Encryption Method Idi Authenticate using 802 1X go Keys will be generated automatically for data privacy Pre shared key WPA or WPA2 Passphrase C unmask Previous Next oayss B o 9 40 a A Figure 5 23 Set Encryption Mode to None Set the Association Mode to Open Set the Encryption Method to None Disable the Authenticate using 802 1X checkbox Disable the Key
9. 101 Audible verification signals 39 Audio Cable Tin SCAM zia eset ettet uei 16 audio Codecs eror dE 39 Audio headset interface sss 38 AUGIG SUppOrt iie oto ree RR bue PR e Dee 39 Audio Volume settings sese 22 Audio Microphone Connector 280 Auto hide e tetro or ERU RERR 85 Autorun files at startup ssssseeeene 78 B Background and Window colors 95 96 Backlight display timer ee 21 Backlight properties ee c etes 96 Backlight timets iie entere etedcc pns 96 Backup Battery Nickell Cadmium eter 37 Turne Init oot toten EER 57 Backup Data Files cepe 130 Backup software vc sies sscvccuenthen sien iere 73 Batteries cetero ete tap uai rts 280 battery trickle chargement etras 12 Battery Backup details detecte 57 charge before Using coros n cicer e 12 Charge or Discharge buttons for backup battery Mantenan E essesi re pe nte bee 91 MX7 Reference Guide 288 Charger ucc cerne Dee ce etes rrr 59 Charging ici eed 3T Check status and power reading 12 Coimpartmet oce ere reserve eet 12 Critical Suspend State es ceret 57 Hots Wap pie ecrire eene ence Dope crie 57 Importante icri cr eor E SESE 3 Life Approximate eet mme 56 Lithium Ion Li ion eee 56 Lathium Ion Li Ion eite 37 Low or Ve
10. Enable disable volume and sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events Note Change the font displayed on the screen by choosing Dd Settings Control Panel Keyboard and then the Key map dropdown list MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 89 About Access A Settings Control Panel About Displays hardware and software details Tab Title Contents Software GUID Windows CE Version OAL Version Bootloader Version Compile Version FPGA Version and Language Language indicates any pre installed Asian fonts Hardware CPU Type Codec Type FPGA Version Scanner type Display Flash memory and DRAM memory Versions LXE Utilities LXE Drivers LXE Image LXE API Internet Explorer and NET Framework Version Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address User application version information can be shown in the Version window Version window information is retrieved from the registry Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor see section titled Utilities LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Version in the registry Create a new string value under this key The string name should be the Application name to ap
11. MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 257 MAP NORMALS55 MX only no modifiers 55 key map MAP ORANGES55 MX only orange modifier 55 key map MAP BLUES5 MAP SHIFT55 MX only shift modifier 55 key map MAP ORANGESHFT MX7 only blue modifier 55 key map MX only orange and shift modifiers In addition certain keymaps are used for special adjustment functions within the keyboard driver via the CHANGE mapname specification MAP VOLUM o MAP VOLUME special keymap for volume adjustment not on MX7 MAP CONTR o MAP CONTRAST special keymap for contrast adjustment not on MX7 MAP BRITE o MAP BRIGHT special keymap for brightness adjustment not on MX7 When these maps are selected the keyboard driver handles the up arrow and down arrow as adjusting the particular parameter up and down and any other key exits the adjustment state Keys in these modes are handled completely inside the keyboard driver and are not propagated to the operating system Key codes are defined by COLxROWx scancode Scancode has a number of options as follows VK code any valid Windows VK code see below for valid codes x a single ASCII character A b 1 etc SHIFT VK_code for a shifted VK code see below for valid codes SHIFT x for a shifted ASCII character should not be nee
12. Files A flash card is used for permanent storage of the LXE drivers and utilities It is also used for registry content back up The flash card is located in the socket under the main battery pack CAB files when executed are not deleted LXECRI CAB Driver for LXE 802 11 radio LXECRIA CAB Additional file for radio operation ODYSSEY CAB Odyssey Client files needed for radio operation SUMMIT CAB Summit Client files needed for radio operation The following CAB files are optional and may or may not be present RFTERM CAB RFTerm terminal emulation application JAVA CAB Java application APPLOCK CAB AppLock program See Chapter 4 AppLock LXELOGIN LXE Persistent user login utility installed by customer with Odyssey Client and becomes LXELOGIN CAB Note Always perform a warm reset Start Run Warmboot when exchanging one flash card for another MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B ActiveSync Get Connected Process 127 ActiveSync Get Connected Process Introduction Requirement ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher must be on the host desktop laptop PC computer A partnership between a PC and the MX7 must be established using serial RS 232 or USB connection When more than one PC will be synchronizing with the MX7 each PC will need its own partnership with the MX7 established See section titled Initial Install for the procedure After the partnership has been established with the MX7 a
13. o 5 o o o 5 3 x 7 o o ojo o o E EQ MX7RG B Press These Keys and Then Caps Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Lock nm A Press This Key F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 N x 3 i iciad io izx o vi ojzi iz ir xici i r ioimi mi io o o MX7 Reference Guide 246 55 Key Alphanumeric Keymaps E Press These Keys and Then To Get This MX7 Key Press This Key Function Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft pee B Lo x E C Lo x E D Lo x P E Lo x E E a a E a G E dro Lo ae B 4 a a a E S LT qq xx J L T x J K L T x a L Lo x T Ee oe l a A a a a E a OO e o T e T 3 DL LLCLC S9 a a a E S S a a E a E T L x T U OT x E d V L x w OS T C d E W X Lo a Y L x i Z OT x 1 puc 2 L1 1 l 2 3 Lo Lo ee T 3 4 L1 l i LLL 6 Oo S ee S T E 6 7 L dq qo nou 7 8 9 5 0 period x DEL or or period X K Px P j G X Y MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B 55 Key Alphanumeric Keymaps To Get This MX7 Key Function gt T asterisk colon semicolon period accent _ underscore comma apostrophe tilde E EQ MX7RG B Press These Keys and Then Caps Lock Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft o Press This Key
14. 49 electrostatic discharge esses 9 End user switching Hotkey ni catene ct ier peces 158 TOUGlis ccce tea EO EPOR 158 Entering D ta 5 cicer 28 Environmental Specifications 281 Error Messages AppLock is iecit erpiseeste neste 164 Expand Control Panel ens 86 External Auto Turn Off sess 96 External Connector Interface 279 External modem fiot SUDpOFPed eter P d 72 External PS ceri teen eerte gens 14 F Factory Default reset registry to 147 Features MOL aa A at aee 1 Field Exit key function eese 53 IgE 279 Flash and Retl asbh 2 noni 148 Folders copied at startup sss 75 Ponts and keymaps oett 100 Footprint passive vehicle cradle RAM assembly 64 passive vehicle cradle U bracket 62 Forms entry ie tepore te ctoride tueur 28 Function PI Co PCT 53 E EQ MX7RG B 289 Alt KEYone ieies aeii e 52 CapsLock Mode o tnter 54 CUDRey oiseau EROR 52 Eield Exil K6y Lerner e eher 53 Shift KEY oases oe e RES 52 G General system parameter sessees 122 Getting Help 2 2 eei ceases 32 Getting Started eet 9 Getting the Most from Your Batteries 58 Global D lay t etr err RE enden 154 Global Key irse rib 154 Gl
15. Clear q gt bri Figure 4 3 Application Panel Multi Application Note If your Application Panel does not look like the figure shown above you may have the Single Application version Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in End User Mode Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the application from the Browse dialog tap OK E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 154 Multi Application Configuration Enter the Title to be associated with the application s icon The assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique text for the icon in order to differentiate them in the application switcher panel Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Arguments text box Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented to the end user Applications are launched in lowest to highest number order Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End User Internet Explorer EUIE EXE When the checkbox is enabled the Internet Menu and Internet Status are available See the section titled End User Internet Explorer for more details Select the Global Key key sequence the end user is to press when switching between applications The Global Key default key sequence is Ctrl Spe The Globa
16. letter i or O eo ioj o ric z zirizximi o o MX7 Reference Guide 248 55 Key Alphanumeric Keymaps Press These Keys and Then To Get This MX7 Key Function Press This Key 0 zero 5250 Key Map for the 55 Key Keypad Legend Explanation Key Sequence Petri Dee Attention siiin Ctl A Ei nce Cleat vi iesuenotenone Ctl C Del ascent nates Delete ssssssssse Ctl D D rer Duplicate sss Ctl U E Inp eessen Erase Input Ctl Q Field Exit Entei iet nus eene tiec Diamond 1 Fld 4 cues Field Minus Ctl M Fld coinn Field Plus Ctl L IOa EE ate eee pire InSett nete Ctl I1 NU E New Line Ctl N SySReq icai SYSTEM ioo ie ieget Ct S Please refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide for further information about 5250 key functions on the mobile device MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad 249 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad When using a sequence of keys that require an alpha key first press the Alph key Use the Shft sticky key or the Caps key sequence Blue Tab for upper case alphabetic characters Pressing the Alph key forces Alpha mode for the 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 keys The 1 and 0 keys continue to place a 1 and 0 into the text field To create a combination of numbers and letters before pressin
17. 1 al a A A A M E 2 COL3ROWO VK SHIFT COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 SHIFT VK EQUAL COL3ROW3 SHIFT 6 COL3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open 1 aad A Ad A A I 2 COL4ROWO VK SLASH COL4ROW1 open COL4ROW2 open COL4ROW3 SHIFT VK_COMMA COL4ROW4 SHIFT VK_ PERIOD COL4ROW5 open B COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 VK_LEFT LP PE E I I EE COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 SHIFT 9 COLSROW2 VK_CAPITAL COL5ROW3 SHIFT VK RBRACKET COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COLSROW7 VK_RIGHT LP E E M P E E COL6ROW1 SHIFT VK_APOSTROPHE COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 VK SEMICOLON COL6ROW4 open COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 VK ESCAPE LP NN P E E COL7ROWO VK BACKQUOTE COL7ROW1 SHIFT 0 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 270 Creating Custom Key Maps COL7ROW2 VK F13 COL7ROW3 VK_F14 COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 KY ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY BLUE COL7ROW7 open 7 the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys on the MX7 32 key keypad modified with SHIFT Map MAP MAP SHIFT32 LP I E E COLOROWO KY PROGI1S COLOROW1 VK F16 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F17 COLOROW4 VK_F20 COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 SHIFT 2 COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN1 LP E E M P E E COL1ROWO open COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 VK_SPACE COL1ROW4 open COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open LP E P M P E E COL2ROWO SHIFT 4 COL2RO
18. Use the following password Tap the OK button then Finish On the main configuration screen check the Connect to checkbox and choose the profile you just configured When prompted for the password enter it into the password field Odyssey Client Please enter your password pee pes _ unmask Authentication information Login name rsauseri Network wpaGTC 9 cancel 4 L3 Figure 5 47 Enter the Profile Password Use the Unmask checkbox to see the password in clear text as you type E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 210 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Odyssey Client Settings Commands Tools Fk lt wpaGTC gt v Status Status open and authenticated Network SSID wpaGTC Access point 00 0F 34 D7 0C 90 Packets in out 2 4 Ea Lu 4 Figure 5 48 Authentication is Successful When authentication is successful the Status on the main screen displays open and authenticated MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 211 Server Authentication To validate the server certificate the root CA certificate must be installed For instructions for installing see section titled Root Certificates The RADIUS server certificate is not required only the root CA which issued the server certificate Next configure the Root CA Certificate as a Trusted Root CA as described in the section titled Trusted Server Configuration Navi
19. Vibration response on a good scan bad scan or both event is desired Scan sounds are accompanied by a tactile response when the internal scanner Sound parameter is enabled Enable short medium or long duration for each selection good scan bad scan COM1 Tab Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner COM1 tab Factory Default Settings COMI Port external serial port Baud Rate 9600 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Data Bits 8 Data Bits s E Lud m Sem B Lor 9 01 am d a Figure 3 27 Scanner Panel COM1 Integrated laser scanner default values are 9600 Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and No parity EV 15 scanner default values are 19200 Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and No parity If these values are changed the default values are restored after a cold boot or reflashing Note COMI does not support 5V switchable power on Pin 9 for tethered scanners MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 113 Barcode Advanced Prefix Suffix Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner Barcode tab Prefix Suffix is only available when Use Advanced Barcode Processing is disabled default Scanner Control m Ok Fa Main COMI Barcode Scanner Control Main COM1 Prefix Suffix Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Advanced Processing Prefix Suffix Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Advanced Processing
20. covers all aspects of the LXE AppLock program Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration details 2 4GHz radio setup Configuration for WEP and WPA is included Appendix A Key Maps describes the keypress sequences for the keypad Custom Keymapping instruction is included Appendix B Technical Specifications lists MX7 technical specifications E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 4 Overview Document Conventions ALL CAPS All caps are used to represent disk directories file names and application names Rather than use the phrase choose the Save command from the File menu this manual Menu Choice i ek uses the convention choose File Save Indicates the title of a book chapter or a section within a chapter for example Document Conventions a uem Attention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow Also when marked on product means to refer to the manual or user s guide C International fuse replacement symbol When marked on the product the label includes fuse ratings in volts v and amperes a for the product Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information CAUTION Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result A in minor or moderate injury WARNING Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result A in death or serious injury DANGER Keyword that indicates a imminent h
21. intel Corp ARM X Memory 33932 KB RAM Expansion cards Registered to PO syste QL 202 A Figure 3 36 System General System This screen is presented for information only The System parameters cannot be changed by the user Computer The processor type is listed The type cannot be changed by the user Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system Hence a system with 128 MB may only report 99 MB memory since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE operating system This is actual DRAM memory and does not include internal flash used for storage MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 123 Memory System Properties fa OK s Tn Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move it to the right for more storage space Only unused RAM black portion of the slider bar can be adjusted Program memory 11196KB total 22736kKB total 504KB in use 9100KB in use PO sys B 2 3 01 ru AB Figure 3 37 System Memory Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If there isn t enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If the MX7 is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immedia
22. 7E 00 00 00 00 00 00 BB 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 BC BF 00 00 00 BD 00 DD 00 00 00 00 14 00 00 BB 00 BE 00 00 25 00 DD 1B 00 00 00 00 27 00 DB 00 00 DB 2D 00 BB 00 10 7C 7D 00 F2 F3 00 Flagl0 hex N 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 8F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 8D 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 10 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Map11 hex EA 7F DF 80 83 00 38 87 51 39 00 54 55 34 4F 00 N 41 00 44 47 4A 31 4C 33 00 00 58 56 4E 30 00 00 00 53 00 46 48 4B 32 24 36 5A 00 43 42 4D 00 23 00 57 00 52 59 49 35 50 45 10 81 82 37 F2 F3 11 Flagll hex N 00 00 A0 00 00 00 10 A0 10 10 00 10 10 10 10 00 10 00 10 10 10 10 10 10 00 00 10 10 10 10 00 00 00 10 00 10 10 10 10 00 10 10 00 10 10 10 00 00 00 10 00 10 10 10 10 10 10 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 Map12 hex 00 84 DF 85 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 86 87 00 00 00 00 Flagl2 hex N MX7 Reference Guide 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Creating Custom Key Maps E EQ MX7RG B Appendix B Technical Specifications Physical Specifications CU
23. Backlight icon The display controller supports Microsoft CE 5 0 graphics modes A touchscreen allows mouse functions tapping on the display or signature capture using an LXE approved stylus The touchscreen has an actuation force with finger less than 100 grams The color display has an LED backlight and is optimized for indoor use The display appears black when the mobile device is in suspend mode MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Hardware Configuration 37 Power Supply The LXE MX7 uses two batteries for operation Main Battery Pack A replaceable 2200 mAh Lithium Ion Li Ion battery pack The battery pack recharges while in the MX7 when the mobile device is connected to the MX7 optional external AC DC power source The main battery pack can be removed from the MX7 and inserted in the MX7 Multi Charger which simultaneously charges up to five battery packs in four hours The status indicator is illuminated when the backup battery is being charged by the main battery pack A new main battery pack can be fully charged in 6 hours when it is in an MX7 connected to AC power and 3 5 hours when it is in the MX7 multicharger Backup Battery An internal 50mAh Nickel Cadmium NiCad backup battery The backup battery is recharged directly by the MX7 main battery pack Recharging maintains the battery near full charge at all times When the backup battery is fully drained it may take up to 5 hours to recharge The capability to discharge
24. COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open LP E E M P E E COLA4ROWO 1 COL4ROW1 open COL4ROW2 open COL4ROW3 7 COL4ROW4 8 COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 VK_DOWN LP E E M E P E E COL5ROWO open COLSROW1 KY PROG2 COLS5ROW2 VK TAB COL5ROW3 2 5 COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 VK_UP LP A A I EE COL6ROWO0 3 COL6ROW1 ACTION KY ALPHA COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 2 0 COL6ROW4 open COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 VK MENU LP NN E COL7ROWO 6 COL7ROW1 KY PROG3 COL7TROW2 VK F3 COL7ROW3 VK F4 COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 KY ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY_BLUE COL7ROW7 open the name of this key doesn t matter 77 the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys modified with ORANGE E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 268 Creating Custom Key Maps on the MX7 32 key keypad Map MAP MAP ORANGE32 LP E E M E E E COLOROWO SHIFT 8 COLOROW1 VK F6 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F7 COLOROW4 VK_F10 COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 VK_LBRACKET COLOROW7 CHANGE MAP VOLUME 1 al 2 Al A M E COL1ROWO open COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 VK_BACK COL1ROW4 open COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open LP A A A UR I E EE COL2ROWO SHIFT 3 COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 open COL2ROW3 open COL2ROW4 SHIFT 4 COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open 1 al a A A I I E COL3ROWO VK SHIFT COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 VK_PERIOD COL3ROW3 VK_INSERT COL
25. Figure 3 21 Password Enter the password in the Password textbox then type it again to confirm it Enable the power on checkbox and if desired the screensaver checkbox Tap the OK button to save the changes The password is in effect immediately The screensaver password is the same as the power on password They are not set independently A screensaver password cannot be created without first enabling the Enable password protection at power on checkbox The screensaver password is not automatically enabled when the power on checkbox is enabled Troubleshooting The password must be entered before performing a coldboot or cold reset If entering a power on or screensaver password will not allow you to disable password protection or run COLDBOOT contact LXE Technical Support MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 107 PC Connection Access AY Settings Control Panel PC Connection Control the connection between the MX7 and a nearby desktop laptop computer Factory Default Settings Enable direct connection Enabled Connect Using USB Client Tap the Change Connection button to adjust the settings Then tap the OK button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Unchecking the Enable direct connections disables ActiveSync Change Connection Selecting Change Connection displays a list of configured ActiveSync connectio
26. If you were in blue mode before you pressed the Orange key blue mode is cancelled and you enter Orange mode Blue Key Tap the Blue key to enter blue mode Tap it again to cancel blue mode If you were in orange mode before you pressed the Blue key orange mode is cancelled and you enter Blue mode IBM 5250 specific keypad only The Diamond 1 key can be programmed as a SRG Field Exit key The Field Exit key is used to exit an input field If the field is an Auto Enter field the auto transmit function is activated Refer to the Mappable Diamond Keys section for instruction IBM 5250 specific keypad only A Control sticky keypress stays active until the Control key is pressed again The Control key enables the control functions of the keypad This function is similar to a regular keyboard s Control key Each time you need to use a Control function you need to press the Ctl key before pressing the desired key Note the green highlight on the Control key and the 5250 commands highlighted in green on the 5250 keypad overlay E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 54 The Keypads Mode Key Functions CapsLock Mode This function is similar to a regular keyboard s CapsLock key Note that the CapsLock mode stays active until the CapsLock key sequence is pressed again Each time you need to use a Caps function you need to press the Caps key sequence first To cancel CapsLock mode press the C
27. Li Ion battery life inire 12 List of configured ActiveSync connections 107 Logging PNdlbuU quM 157 Login Utility x erotici tee te tee 142 Loss of Host Re connection sess 132 Low Battery Warning eee 57 LXE Logimn Utlity 2n cec eere 142 EXE Manuals CD itr eet 32 LXE Security Primet sosise envias an 175 LXE SErviCeP ass eet eic rhe 32 LXEbook MX7 Users Guide 23 M MAC address siente e HODIE 89 Mali RM REER 110 Main Battery Pack i ether 37 Main tab S tiitit essere oeras etnan ane Eee eet 177 Mappable Diamond Keys sessen 49 Mass SIOTRBE cuc s ri eee 279 Media Player ione nnda 81 hs Sot ME DN 279 allocate for programs or storage 123 Memory installed 31 drei 122 Memory system parameter esee 122 Menu Options Iri PE ENTE T 78 Microphone adjustment sees 17 Microsoft File Viewers and password protected il M N 78 Mixet record galt aee ette 102 mode BOCK 113 114 Key M SS8BQ eni sesto eres are EE die 113 114 Mode OT TREE EE 45 um 44 SUSDED aserton E EE D oE eee 45 Mode Key Functions seen 54 Modes ADpLOo6k o aeneo 151 Multi Application AppLock 150 MX7 Multi charger described iuit cede eec es 59 My Certif
28. None however to reduce registry use the administrator may want to select None after verifying the configuration Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry None Error Processing Extended All Save As When the Save As button is selected a standard Save As dialog screen is displayed Specify the path and filename If the filename exists the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten If the file does not exist it is created See Also Error Messages E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 158 Multi Application Configuration End User Switching Technique E RFTerm W Doct Ex Figure 4 6 End User Multi Application Touch Panel Using a Stylus Tap When the mobile device enters end user mode a taskbar icon is available to the user so they can switch between the locked applications The touch screen must be enabled on the mobile device before the taskbar icon can be used The taskbar is always visible on top of the application in focus When the taskbar icon is tapped a menu is displayed showing the applications available to the user The user then taps the application name in the popup menu and the selected application 1s brought to the foreground The previous application continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application in focus only The appearance of the taskbar is different on various mobile device platforms and may differ from the example show
29. Open Save Cancel More Info F Always ask beroe Gpening this type of file Figure 5 85 Certificate Download Security Warning Tap Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC Keep track of the name and location of the certificate as the file name and location is required in later steps The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this process Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key file For example it the private key was saved as MX7USER PVK then the certificate file created must be given the same name for example MX7USER CER E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 234 User Certificates Installing a User Certificate on the Mobile Device WPA TLS Only Copy the certificate and private key files to the mobile device Import the certificate by navigating to Start Settings Control Panel Certificates P Dr Certificates Select My Certificates from the pull down list Certificates f Lists your personal digital certificates view Remove iti Jem 2 18 ma A Figure 5 86 Certificates Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key OK Ix Ld From a Smart Card Reader Y Card Absent Figure 5 87 Import Certificate Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B User Certificates 235 Sele 3Fj NM OK X OJ System a
30. RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Installing User Certificates and Private Keys 25 Installing User Certificates and Private Keys 2 It 1s important that all dates are correct on CE and desktop laptop computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not Date Time correct authentication will fail Access Dd Settings Control Panel Certificates Prerequisites e The MX7 has the correct Date and Time See Chapter 3 section titled Date Time e A User Certificate file is available e A Private Key file is available First using ActiveSync copy the User Certificate file and the Private Key file to the mobile device s persistent file location A persistent file location does not get erased when the mobile device performs a warm or cold reset For example the internal flash folder Next place a copy of the User Certificate file and the Private Key file in the My Device System folder The certificate and key files should display in the Certificates and Authentication applet windows Note After the MX7 is reflashed with a new operating system the User Certificate and Private Key files must be re installed and re authenticated E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 26 Installing User Certificates and Private Keys User Certificate To check if a user certificate is installed navigate to Start Settin
31. Re connect option The data dump includes radio state profile settings global settings and a list of access points by SSID broadcasting in the radio s immediate area Not available in this release Update Driver Tap this button to begin the process to update the radio driver via a dialog box and a power cycle The radio driver file needs to be accessible to the user Not available in this release Site Survey Not available in this release E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 182 Global Settings The parameters on the Global Settings panel can only be changed when an Administrator is logged in with a password The current values for the parameters can be viewed by the general user without requiring a password Note button changes are not saved Summit Client Util Summit Client Configuration Tap the Commit button to save changes If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit Status Diags Global Settings lw DTC Thrarh EFFECT Factory Default Settings RX Diversity On Start on Main TX Diversity On r i Preamble Auto Global Configuration Settings spc G Shorslot Auto Roam Trigger 65 dBm Roam Delta 10 dBm Roam Period 10 sec Frag Threshold 2346 RTS Threshold 2347 Ping Payload 32 bytes Ping Timeout 5000 ETEESI PeDe ms 100 LED Off Hide Passwords On Lud Summa Qf e 10 21 am A Admin Pas
32. Summit Client Certs Access a Programs Summit Summit automatically installs and runs after every cold and warm boot Disable Summit Start Programs Summit SCU Tap the Disable Radio button The radio is enabled by default after every cold reset Enable Summit Start Programs Summit SCU Enable Radio When the radio is disabled tap the Enable Radio button The radio is enabled by default after every cold reset See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for Summit Client Utility setup information and instruction Access AY Programs Summit Certs Contents of README TXT file located in Start Programs Summit Certs menu option CA Certificate files user certificate files and PAC files are accessed only from this location When entering the certificate filenames in the Summit Client Utility SCU only the filename and extension are entered Only PEM DER and PFX extensions are allowed for certificate files See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for directions for acquiring CA and user certificate files Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client This utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating the application is enabled and the MX7 is not connected to a network If you will be using the Wireless Zero Config Utility to configure the radio or connect to a network perform the following s
33. d amp osys BH Lo 10 31 am DA E7 oays gt 10 33 am DA E Figure 5 36 Select Method Use the delete and add buttons to choose EAP PEAP authentication Uncheck the Validate server certificate for now Tap Next to continue Previous to return to the previous screen or Cancel to ignore changes made to this screen Add Network Wizard OK You can enter an anonymous name tc a keep your login name private with most EAP protocols Enter an anonymous name that will be used for the outer visible authentication It may contain realm names that route your request e g anonymous or anonymoust amp myisp com user Previous Next Cancel v xj ec Ul lee MB odys 2r 10 34 a A m Figure 5 37 User Name for Phase 1 Authentication A screen appears asking for an anonymous sign on name This is for the outer or Phase 1 authentication Enter the correct outer authentication this could be the Phase 2 authentication as well Tap Next to continue Previous to return to the previous screen or Cancel to ignore changes made to this screen E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 204 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration The next screen displayed is a configuration screen that allows you to choose the correct version of PEAP Odyssey Client Select the method s that you would like to add Add Network Wizard Since you have chosen EAP PEAP as your EAP met
34. efully making changes to the registry REGLOAD EXE Double tapping a registry settings file e g REG causes RegLoad to open the file and make the indicated settings in the registry This is similar to how RegEdit works on a desktop PC The REG file format is the same as on the desktop PC WARMBOOT EXE Double tap this file to warm boot the computer 1 e all RAM is preserved It automatically saves the registry before rebooting which means configuration changes are not lost WAVPLAY EXE Double tapping a sound file e g WAV causes WavPlay to open the file and run it in the background E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 140 Utilities Enabling GrabTime The MX7 has a GrabTime utility which can automatically synchronize the MX7 with a time server via an Internet connection at boot up By default using GrabTime for time synchronization at boot up is Off To enable GrabTime to run automatically at boot up run Windows grabtime reg and perform a warmboot For more detail see LAUNCH EXE earlier in this chapter Note This utility affects the behavior of GrabTime at warmboot After a coldboot GrabTime is disabled Configuring CapsLock Behavior To set CapsLock status to On after a warmboot run Windows WXCapsLockOn reg and perform a warmboot To set CapsLock status to Off after a warmboot run Windows XCapsLockOff reg and perform a warmboot Note Setting CapsLock to On using this method does not display t
35. tap the X button to ignore changes Tap the box for Help E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 104 Settings Control Panel Options Network and Dialup Connections Access A Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Connections Set network driver properties and network access properties Select a connection to use or create a new connection on the MX7 E gt s Serial 1 Serial 1 Eaeeeeme Seria 1 Serial 1 Connection 57600 115200 Connection 57600 115200 lt A x 1 l 9x ye ae USB Client PRISMAO2 1 BTPAN1 USB Client SDCCF10G1 o 2 43 mA 8 BY com QF x 11 28 A jl 0 Odyssey Client Connection Panel Summit Client Connection Panel Figure 3 19 Network and Dialup Connections Tap OK to save the settings or tap the X button to ignore changes Tap the box for Help Create a Connection Option 1 On the mobile device select 4 Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Connections A window is displayed showing the existing connections 2 Assuming the one you want does not exist double tap Make New Connection 3 Give the new connection an appropriate name My Connection 9600 etc Tap the Direct Connection radio button Tap the Next button 4 From the popup menu choose the port you want to connect to Only the available ports are shown 5 Tap the Configure button 6 Under the Port Settings tab choose the appropriate baud rate Data bi
36. 158 Usinge a Stylus Wap EN 158 sina Hotkey Sequences cease ni isa Ea ped nemini itu edu tmd ate eMe IPS 158 Troubleshooting Multi Application AppLock rtr rte eret esee bdo go 159 Single Application Configuration eeeeeeen nnn 160 Control Patel PEU 160 swim 161 sangue M 162 AppLock Error 1 0 A 164 AppLock Registry Settings bikie einen 173 CHAPTER 5 WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION 175 Li inis eee er nn 175 Summit Client Configuration sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 176 Suini C ient UY usate er n Ee AEON a O OR ANa TaESA 176 WAI cat A EE AE EE E A E amnion A HM 177 Administrator Mode eterne tente a N A ea e UV eda 178 UD ER 178 BOONS aaner isnt cesciast eina FERE Lab Pre e d Ed NER UR QV basta pasiva Tem aiU laciuaiconenmusianealen ER ES UR EUUE 179 Conte Pardmelterscsceomesener eU eerte ba he hte ott p rbi imtelutes iu Deka te E rro fa desit Ua 179 MICI MT T 180 Rr LE 181 luni TEE 181 Global Set tigs io creer te f pO ge ree E Eee vv vo ae talent eu nee d bn ea 182 Global Parameters eee teo tooth t ER Ie UTR INE Eo EE E cu due PN Rz THU ROeT alas 182 bU JRCE e MEE 185 No SECY mL 185 WEP KOY NIE E E NE O 186 LEAP wio WPA Authentic atiota T EE Aaa 187 PEAP MSCHAP Authentica Hon iesene a E A dibus 188 WPA LEAP AuthenticatloTi
37. 51 Standard Kee ys casei ces specu ts wavencdsaasiese tavaveadedaaiidaads N E a a baa caeusa taney eles antec N N S 52 UCONN L ES eis dede MATIN eMe d 52 SUCE Xa EE 52 TN oC te Cat ey se e E nE E E A NE 32 Alt Alternate Key E E E a E E EA 52 ShA SB KEY MN RUMP ME AS 52 Orange and IMG KEY S censore E A CT OIRO 32 Field BXIU S eogeasredint ipie ETe dev bi eb E A dose hon FECE Pen ta Re FEX Rte river 23 Mode Koy PUNCH OLS cione etu e E et Mae ts ter ate toot anc a Sce UI ERROR Ier NER NEU tax 54 enEdguu m 54 So Key Keypad asenada e pee Rao es uen pa qtii se EP MPO Rd a aa Rind 54 32 Key Key padesane etes is t RR ese i O Roeri spon a N 54 jii 2 e Ne 55 Display Backlight Det iicet aaar a boost roches ssec iau td e usen aii 55 Cleaning the Display Scanner ADett Ee oe epe se ete ERO ERES REB ax eh vo Fakt n Re ERE ed 55 Power QUELLO NADIE MERI a 56 Checking Battery Stats uode EE det eet vade UL e be ree rd e be de RETE 56 MX7 Status LED and the Batteries s toe on iret ecrire Diet oec Pee EE te De v pedes SNE 56 Maiti Battery Pack oes psu e be basque A boe deui esu oiv Posso Eb pasce oos ERR e vba EE 56 Battery HotSwapplilm zsusisceuas cec eee eee N C ieee Ee XEM ee n MEUSE a iE Ends sd Low Battery Warming eet teen toto Htehietetb c i iste utes teh tutute t ela Erden dehet ep elet tos 57 jp d Up Bale M EE 57 pdt 57 Handy Batteries S3Ielysueseicecesse n senex bes ep reden tto oiu isons atrii sete bises
38. 59 49 35 50 45 00 72 73 75 37 71 00 Flag0 hex N 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 A0 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 A0 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Map1 hex 00 14 DF 13 00 00 BD 87 31 BB 89 35 37 BB 39 88 N DC 00 BA DE BC DB BF BE 00 00 00 00 C0 BC 24 09 N 00 DC 23 BA DE BE DD 21 DD 00 2D 00 C0 BD 2E 22 N 8A 32 00 34 36 38 DB 30 33 00 00 00 00 BF 00 00 Flagl hex 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 A0 10 10 A0 10 10 00 10 A0 10 00 10 10 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 AO 10 00 10 10 10 10 10 10 00 00 00 8E 00 8D 00 Map2 hex 00 7A DF 7B 00 00 38 87 00 39 89 00 00 34 00 88 00 00 00 00 00 31 00 33 00 00 00 00 00 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 32 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 35 00 00 00 13 91 2C 37 00 00 Flag2 hex 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 A0 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 A0 N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 Map3 hex B 70 DF 71 74 76 38 87 51 39 89 54 55 34 4F 88 N 41 00 44 47 4A 31 4C 33 20 00 58 56 4E 30 25 09 78 53 27 46 48 4B 32 26 36 5A 08 43 42 4D BE 28 79 57 0D 52 59 49 35 50 45 00 72 73 75 37 77 00 Flag3 hex 0 10 A0 10 10 10 10 A0 10 10 A0 10 10 10 10 A0 0 00 1
39. As button is selected a standard Save As dialog screen is displayed Specify the path and filename If the filename exists the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten If the file does not exist it is created See Also Error Messages E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 164 AppLock Error Messages AppLock Error Messages Any messages whose first word is an ing word is output prior to the action described in the message For example Switching to admin hotkey press is logged after the administrator has pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process For all operations that can result in an error an Error level message is displayed when a failure occurs These messages contain the word failure These messages have a partner Extended level message that is logged which contains the word OK if the action completed successfully rather than with an error For processing level messages Enter is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the message and Exit is logged at the end just before the return of the function specified in the message Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Error reading hotkey The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock LOG EX Error reading hotkey using default A hotkey is required If there is a failure reading the LOG ERROR hotkey the internal factory default is used App Command Lin
40. Authentication for LEAP 199 WEP EhcryptiOh iiiter hee 196 WPA PSK configuration sss 221 Odyssey Cheni c re pr re tette 82 Odyssey Client Configuration 191 240 Off Mode irent teen te etg tens 45 ON Mode characteristics seeeeese 44 Operating Temperature ub EE E E E EA 281 US AC to DG meinen 281 Optional SO bwale eec a nin ditare in 74 Orange and Blue keys eeee mere 53 Owner Identifications io oe oma iens 105 Network ID and password 105 ho m 105 E EQ MX7RG B 29 Owner information essere 20 P Parity ict cicer coc ede P tete negate nee 110 Passive vehicle cradle enn eeetems 61 PASS WOLG 3 3522035502 ee nnt 106 PPP LOCK a oneee eee ae e tera sede sasteale 152 AppLock Save AS ettet 157 163 At Power On rre reete erben 106 Single User AppLock eee 162 Summit Admin mode sees 178 Passwords lost at cold boot 141 PC Card DlOLA LS ess Sessa ite Sactee evince asian ede 43 PEAP MSCHAP for WPA eccececseceesereeeeeerees 188 Pen Stylus tome eges 19 and data entry idee d nen eos 29 Pen Stylus Pressure liit e 55 Permanent storage of drivers and utilities 126 Phase 2 a thentication acie 203 Physical Specifications ssssss 279
41. COL4ROWO SHIFT VK_F9 COL4ROW1 SHIFT S COL4ROW2 SH FT VK RIGHT COLA4ROW3 SHIFT F COL4ROW4 SHIFT H COL4ROW5 SHIFT K COL4ROW6 SHIFT 2 COL4ROW7 SH FI VK_UP COL5ROWO SHIFT 6 COL5ROW1 SHIFT Z COL5ROW2 SHIFT VK BACK COL5ROW3 SHIFT C COL5ROW4 SHIFT B COLS5ROW5 SHIFT M COL5ROW6 SH FT VK PERIOD COL5ROW7 SH FT VK DOWN COL6ROWO SHIFT VK F10 COL6ROW1 SHIFT W COL6ROW2 SHIFT V RETURN COL6ROW3 SHIFT R COL6ROW4 SHIFT Y COL6ROW5 SHIFT I COL6ROW6 SHIFT 5 COL6ROW7 SHIFT P COL7ROWO SHIFT E COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 SH FT VK_F3 COL7ROW3 SHIFT VK F4 COL7ROW4 SHIFT VK_F6 COL7ROW5 SHIFT 7 COL7ROW6 SHIFT VK F8 COL7ROW7 open the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value 77 codes are defined in docs this is the map for unmodified keys on the MX7 7 32 key keypad Map MAP MAP NORMAL32 LP E M P E E COLOROWO KY PROGI MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 267 COLOROW1 VK F1 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F2 COLOROW4 VK_F5 COLOROW5 VK RETURN COLOROW6 2 COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN1 COLIROWO open COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 VK_SPACE COL1ROW4 open COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open 1 al 2 A A 2 E EE COL2ROW0 4 COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 open COL2ROW3 open COL2ROW4 9 COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open LP E P M E M E E COL3ROWO VK SHIFT COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 VK DELETE COL3ROW3 VK_CONTROL COL3ROW4 open
42. Control Panel Power Schemes tab Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes Battery Power Scheme Use this option when the MX7 will be running on battery power only Switch state to User Idle Default is After 3 seconds Switch state to System Idle Default is After 15 seconds Switch state to Suspend Default is After 5 minutes AC Power Scheme Use this option when the MX7 will be running on external power Switch state to User Idle Default is After 2 minute Switch state to System Idle Default is After 2 minutes Switch state to Suspend Default is After 5 minutes These mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired When the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes even when the device is idle Because of the cumulative effect and using the Battery Power Scheme defaults listed above e The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity e The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity 15sec 3sec e And the device enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 22 Software Setup Set The Audio Speaker Volume Note An application may override the control of the speaker volume Turning off sounds saves power and prolong
43. Data entry keypad rrt rre eee 28 laser SCANNET ionene Ho eret a i 30 SA A Ai R tesa dake 29 virtual keyboard ensis etie 28 Data GY estereo stains s ra naea mta vete 28 Data Loss Cold R SElsn eisenii niscai eene ctt 9 Date and Time default settings 93 Daylight Savings eerte 93 DEFAULT KEY essere 255 Desktop iiie ite tero rt tee ees 76 Device Name and description s 124 Diags tab UIDI 53 5 Itin cise ii 181 Dialing properties oen ere utere 94 E EQ MX7RG B Index Diamond keys iere n wavelet 49 Digital certificates oi rette etes 92 DIMENSIONS 2 3 nando DER RE 280 Disable Odyssey Client te 82 Disable Summit Chet ettet 83 Discharged recharged and conditioned 57 Display iuit irt RR ne ESEE nee EiS 279 Pealutes s tet entere OP HR e Med 55 C m M 55 Specifications creo reete eee tn 280 Display Backlight Timer esses 55 display owner notes sss 20 Display properties cc erret tes 95 Display WMS xi conentur 55 display tuner EX PIES as ertt he 21 Dome Switeli iius eret ete tt iseeste eee ne E 59 Double click sensitivity for stylus taps 103 Download a root certificate ssss 225 Dynamic Save Mode sess 239 E Edit Diamond key parameters
44. E EQ MX7RG B 2T MX7 Reference Guide 278 Map7 hex EA 7F DF 80 83 00 32 87 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 34 00 00 00 39 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 31 00 00 37 38 00 00 24 00 EE 00 35 00 00 00 23 33 00 00 30 00 00 00 00 36 F0 81 82 00 F2 F3 00 Flag7 hex Map8 00 00 A0 00 00 00 10 A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 hex E9 70 DF 71 74 00 38 87 51 39 00 54 55 34 4F 00 41 00 44 47 4A 31 4C 33 20 00 58 56 4E 30 00 09 00 53 2E 46 48 4B 32 28 36 5A 12 43 42 4D 00 26 00 57 0D 52 59 49 35 50 45 10 72 73 37 F2 F3 11 Flag8 hex 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Map9 hex EB 75 DF 76 79 00 00 00 31 00 00 35 37 00 39 00 N DC 00 BA DE BC 00 BF 00 08 00 00 00 C0 00 00 09 00 DC BE BA DE BE 00 22 00 00 00 00 C0 BD 00 21 00 32 00 34 36 38 00 30 33 10 77 78 00 F2 F3 2D Flag9 hex 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 8D 10 00 00 10 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 10 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 10 00 10 10 10 00 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Map10 hex EC 7A DF 7B
45. ERE SEG HR D ar PRA HANS Haee rie A qrer erent ern arent rer ert 7 Eioure 1 5 Handle 6 plonal uss us aeos ba baeap c D HEN OUT TON MU Ne HISP ERE CEPR DAUERN ERE PERI EREA AREE Eu 8 Figure 1 0 Handsirap Optional ctis aset rea pto timen re oerte oae n ee a recti E 8 Finis l 7 NEX7 DeSsElopus iue aite ipte alert ves eps gun vta Reo Er lease dss sees char Ep EI ENEE VENEER 9 Figute 1 8 Trigger Handle Attach Ponts ots ereptus uotis Eye reo EN PeE E a E rE Co Sues Ur LE EL UNE EENE O ENEE 11 Figure 1 9 Main Battery Pack siise tae n E ERU RE ORE aan Ramee 12 Figure 1 10 MX7 With Handstrap Installed 5o iier rere br tee ee E ERR Rb Co RE voe Re POR PIRE eria 13 Figure 1 11 USB MX7 Power Assembly uon ccs eran Ond EE nei eh Ha DOE EMEN ES 14 Figure 1 12 AC DC 12V External Power Supply eesosa Ue Eee oie Eie bh ua eve aa e ab Vas sodden ERR dE EROR iE 14 Figure 1 13 Connect the USB Power Cable to the MX Port ice t et estela sae tope FUE PRU te dpe e ROC e RENE v 15 Figure 1 14 Connect the RS 232 Power Cable to the MX7 POIL onn daro ei eH ERE RS 15 Eipured 15 Connect ta Printer nterface Cabl6a sco ts assesses ndciscssieeWasdabeshte acc E e ehe cree ees Ex FREE EERE 16 Figure l 16 Audio Cable and Headset unit or REPERI ER PEEHHORUR ate 16 Eionie l 17 Power Key Location signori riu p EGRE BRUIT RE Op ORI OE I Ote n pM 18 Figure l 18 Enter Suspend Mode Press Emer sses ea anea aea ea eara Che EUR a Neap EE epe S 18 Figure 1 19 Speake
46. Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Config tab Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to Summit Client Util OK E this profile Main Config status Diags Glob_ lt e Conio A Soc Set EAP Type to LEAP Rename Delete New Commit i fen Set Encryption to WPA TKIP You must click on E Ganka Tap the Credentials button C onfig s settings Encryption LEAP wpa TKIP v Credentials WEP PSK Keys Summit CI qp f gt 9 06 mA E Set Auth Type to Open Figure 5 13 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP w WPA TKIP Credentials Username or Domain Username Password Figure 5 14 LEAP Credentials Enter the Username or Domain Username in the Credentials popup text entry box Enter the Password Tap OK Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration Perform a Warm Reset function to connect using the new profile configuration E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 190 Summit Client Configuration WPA PSK Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Config tab Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to Summit Client Util OK E this profile Main Config status Diags Glob_ lt Set Auth Type to Open TS Set EAP Type to None Rename Delete New Commit yP woapsk Set Encryptio
47. Guide 146 Utilities After correcting the username and starting the connection enter the password that matches the selected username and press Enter or tap the OK button The connections are opened Sometimes the Odyssey Client is redisplayed with the Status updated If this happens press Enter to close the Odyssey Client to return to the desktop or last active application Uninstall the LXE Login Utility After the LXE Login Utility has been installed using the instructions in the Installation section it automatically loads anytime a cold or warm reset is performed on the mobile device To stop the LXE Login Utility from loading follow the instructions below to uninstall the CAB Note File extensions must be enabled for viewing for the following procedure to work To insure extensions are enabled for viewing double tap My Device on the Desktop Select the View menu and the select Options Uncheck Hide file extensions Double tap My Device on the Desktop Double tap System Use the scroll bar to locate LXELogin CAB Tap and hold on LXELogin CAB until the right mouse click menu appears mode odd Select the Rename menu item The stylus cursor changes to the input cursor I and LXELogin CAB is highlighted Press the right arrow key to position the input cursor at the end of the input field Use the BkSp key to erase CAB from the filename Type LXE and press the Enter key eC wo ND Warm reset the mobile de
48. MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist RFID FileName System RFID CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS RFID_WDG DLL Order dword 0C c Avalanche support HKEY LOCAL MACHINESSOFTWAREWLXEVPersistAvalanche FileCheck System avalanche model dat Installed dword 0 Order dword 4 FileName System LXEA VA CAB HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AvaLaunch Order dword 5 FileName System A valanche A vainit exe FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Installed dword 0 5j Applock support HKEY_ LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AppLockInstall FileName System A ppLock CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS APPLOCK EXE Order dword 0 HKEY LOCAL MACHINESSOFTWAREWLXEVersistAppLockPrep FileName windows AppLockPrep exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 1 Delay dword 2 HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist A ppLock FileName windows AppLock exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 63 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Utilities 139 HKEY LOCAL MACHINESSOFTWAREW XEVersistKbdLocks FileName windows K bdLocks exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 62 When you are installing your custom CAB file to the mobile device s operating system refer to the default image segments that are commented with RFTERM to see the expected Registry format One special key is i
49. Medium Long Enable Bad Scan Vibration Short Medium Long Fl Scann LJ 9 38 AM a k Figure 3 26 Scanner Panel Main Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Bluetooth is not supported by LXE Parameter Function Port Port 1 Internal Radio button allows scanner input output on Port 1 scan key or trigger Port 2 Output is enabled when COMI is enabled on this port Port 3 Output is enabled when COMI is enabled on this port Send Key Messages The default setting is Enabled This feature coexists with the WEDGE Prefix Suffix feature and the Advanced Control Character Mapping feature Enable for Key Message mode disable for Block Mode Enable to use Advanced Control Character Mapping Enable Internal Scanner The default is Enabled Functionality of the internal scanner driver Sound engine includes audible tones on good scan at the maximum db supported by the speaker failed scan and LED indication of a scan in progress If enabled Good Scan Bad Scan Vibration provides a tactile response on a scan event Disable this parameter when good scan bad scan sounds are to be handled by alternate means e g application controlled sound files E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 112 Settings Control Panel Options Parameter Function Good Scan Bad Scan The default setting is Disabled Enable this parameter when a tactile
50. Opt options or parameters for executable file HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Launch Cmd1 Cmd2 Cmd3 Cmd4 File name of file Parm parameters for file exe execution See Also Appendix A Key Maps Creating Custom Key Maps for more information Command line Utility Command line utilities can be executed by Start Run program name COLDBOOT EXE Command line utility which performs a cold boot all data in RAM is erased The command is not case sensitive Passwords are lost upon cold boot If a password is set that password must be entered to begin the cold boot power cycle process PrtScrn EXE Command line utility which performs a screen print and saves the file in BMP format in the System folder Tap Start Run then type prtscrn and tap OK or press Enter There is a 10 second delay before the screen print is made The device beeps and the captured screen file scrnnnnn bmp is placed in the System folder The numeric filename is incremented by 1 each time the PrtScrn function is activated The command is not case sensitive E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 142 Utilities LXE Login Utility Odyssey Client only The LXE Login Utility is installed on the mobile device by LXE however the MX7 is not configured to load the LXE Login Utility automatically The LXE Login Utility is designed to let you specify an Odyssey Client login name for the currently selected profile
51. Panel Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode The default hotkey sequence is Shiftt Ctri A A 2 key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the application being locked does not use The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 162 Single Application Configuration Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with Shift Alt and Ctrl text strings representing the shift state keys The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence The hotkey must be entered via the keypad Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel Also hotkeys entered via the SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes For example if the Ctrl key is pressed followed by A Ctrl A is entered in the text box If another key is pressed after a normal key press the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started A normal key is req
52. Pe E EE PETERE ENE ARRA 91 Figure 3 9 System Stored GerttBiedtesi cours tre ria sr Pen D E lere omens 92 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Table of Contents DateTime Propettiess s oet detener datu iati enin ud Qnis RS eae 93 Diale 2s rath abor R EORR UERSUM BRE DIN 94 Display Back around Sissies ia ne aeaaeae EDE Eea AEE NE vancesalicdaveags EA aE AE toes E EE EERE cutee iat ences 95 Display A ppearallGe cnr rr eerta mE bmi Ur TED OS 96 Display BACKS unen amr ise mn ERE ESRE 96 iioi e E ENIE Eia 97 Intech Options astu e qu OU REO DIE POOR OE OU RE DRESS 98 EGA Ua soot diae bb Rute ueni e eU MILI E LE D de TUAE 100 Mappable Key icuL olx o err pS rode tdi aes cei lievito a o Lope e eats nup dS 101 IN bce a sitos cora
53. Power button to wake the MX7 from Suspend mode The Wireless Zero Config utility begins E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 242 Wireless Zero Config Utility E MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Appendix A Key Maps Introduction Remember Sticky keys are also known as second function keys Ctl Ctrl Alt Shft Blue and Orange keys are sticky keys Sticky keys do not need to be held down before pressing the next or desired key It is valid to use combined modifiers on specific keys Note The key mapping in this appendix relates to the physical keypad See section titled Input Panel for the Virtual or Soft Keypad used with the stylus 55 Key Alphanumeric Keymaps ANSI CE Keypad When using a sequence of keys that includes a sticky key press the sticky key first release it then press the rest of the key sequence When using a sequence of keys that includes the Orange or Blue keys press the color key first then the rest of the key sequence Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters Press the Shft key then the alphabetic key for an uppercase letter When the computer boots the default condition of Caps or CapsLock is Off The Caps or CapsLock condition can be toggled with Blue plus Tab key sequence Press These Keys and Then To Get This MX7 Key Function Power Suspend Field Exit default VK PAUSE MAP Mappable Scan Key or V Volume Adjust Mode Tappin
54. Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Summit Client Configuration 177 Main Summit Client Util Factory Default Settings aa Main Main config Status Diags Glob Admin Login SUMMIT Admin Login Radio Enabled P Active Config Default SUMMIT DATA COMMUNICATIONS Active Config Default Ly Is Not Associated WorldWide Driver v1 01 10 SCU v1 01 10 Powered by DeviceScape This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL aa IMeminct for rico in tia OnoanCcl nit Dia ation it OF Ac 10 18 A4 AS Figure 5 1 Summit Client Utility Main tab The Main tab displays information about the radio including e SCU Summit Client Utility version e Driver version e Regulatory Domain e Copyright Info e Active Config profile e Status of the radio Down Associated etc The Active Config profile can be switched without logging in to Administrator mode When the profile named ThirdPartyConfig is chosen as the active profile the Summit Client Utility passes control to Windows Zero Config for configuration of all radio and security settings for the radio module See Wireless Zero Config Utility later in this chapter for Wireless Zero Config instruction The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the radio card Once disabled the button label changes to Enable Radio The Admin Login button provides access to editing radio parameters Config and Global Set
55. Then Press This Key Function Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha w purse 9 Z O x x e9 1 poppe 2 L 2 3 Lo Lo LL T 3 A T o T T i 5 EE Ds 5 6 Lo Lo LL T 6 7 L Jg gj a 7 8 Oo Lp 8 9 ju I 9 0 Lo 0 NEU wa _ Oe LLL x 2 or X 2 X X 4 per do Ld px j j 5 px j j x w 9 o l I Vv x 1 X px j j d e E GEN EC NEN NN Del x 8 asterisk or x Diamond 1 ep O _ NC semicolon X L L1 E Mee _ s Ey mw E 3 oo accent X 6 tunderscosy x 7 mm I apostrophe X Alph MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad To Get This MX7 Key Function tilde E EQ MX7RG B Press These Keys and Then Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha Press This Key 9 1 Alt Alph Diamond 3 or Ctrl 7 Diamond 2 or 9 Diamond 3 or 0 zero MX7 Reference Guide 254 Creating Custom Key Maps Creating Custom Key Maps Prerequisite LXE MX7 SDK CD MX7A504CES0SDK Introduction A command line compiler called KEYCOMP EXE is provided on the MX7 SDK CD Using this compiler the System Administrator can convert a sample default key map text file into a custom key map text file which when loaded onto the mobile device can be chosen by the user to replace the default mobile
56. and sidetone for microphone input Factory Default Settings Output Master Volume 6dB Sidetone 12dB Input Input None Input Boost Disabled Record Gain 22 5dB Output Input Output Input Master Yolume 6 0 dB i i None O mict sluetooth 1 Input Boost Record Gain 22 5 dB J El Sidetone 12 0 dB e Mixer l s 4 16 PM A amp BY wy Mixer GB Je 4 16 PM ya E Figure 3 17 Mixer Tap and hold the Output sliders move them left and right to adjust the decibel level or tap the left and right arrows to adjust the sliders Enable Microphone Enable the Micl radio button and the Input Boost checkbox Disable Microphone Enable the None radio button Tap OK to save the settings or tap the X button to ignore changes Tap the box for Help MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 103 Mouse Access AY Settings Control Panel Mouse Mouse Properties 32 OK sd Double click this grid to set the double click sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between Double click this icon to test your double click settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above fi Deer E Figure 3 18 Mouse Set the double click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen Tap OK to save the settings or
57. are date sensitive and if the date is not Date Time correct authentication will fail Generating a User Certificate for the Mobile Device LA Please refer to the LXE Security Primer for more information on obtaining and installing user certificates The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA To request the user certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name z Bl Password Remember my password OK Cancel Figure 5 77 Logon to Certificate Authority Important This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file CE devices such as the MX7 require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the user certificate Microsoft Certific ces johndoe Welome S Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to
58. attempting to connect to the local network Please refer to Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration to continue setting up the radio and network Terminal Emulation Setup Prerequisites e the mobile client network settings are configured and functional e the alias name or IP address Host Address and e the port number Telnet Port of the host system Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional If you are connecting over wireless LAN 802 11B make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point 1 From the 4 Programs run LXE RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop 2 Select Session Configure from the application menu and select the host type that you require This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to i e 3270 mainframe AS 400 5250 server or VT host 3 Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system 4 Update the telnet port number if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port If not just use the default telnet port 5 Select OK 6 Select Session Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Command Bar Upon a successful connection you should see the host application screen displayed To change options such as Display Colors Cursor Barcode etc please refer to the
59. change to open and authenticated as shown in the figure below Odyssey Client OK Odyssey Client settings Commands Took Settings Commands Tools K M Connect to lt peapTest gt Status Status searching for access point open and authenticated Network SSID Network SSID tlsTest Access point Access point 00 14 1B 58 04 90 Packets in out Packets in out 62 32 4 RY odys B gt 10 38 A DA By 9 oays 9f amp 2 33 Pm A a Figure 5 40 Connect to New Profile Now that the connection works change the configuration to authenticate the server See Server Authentication E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 206 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Server Authentication To validate the server certificate the root CA certificate must be installed For instructions for installing see section titled Root Certificates The RADIUS server certificate is not required only the root CA which issued the server certificate Next configure the Root CA Certificate as a Trusted Root CA as described in the section titled Trusted Server Configuration Edit Network Wizard 0 Select and order the EAP methods that you would like to use EAP PEAP Previous Next Cancel Figure 5 41 Validate Server Certificate Navigate back to the authentication type screen and check the Validate server certificate box Tap Next to the end then the Finish but
60. characters are typed into the edit control following the checkbox e Selecting the Add button then adds the key to the associated list of keys in the read only edit control to the right of the Add Clear buttons The keys are shown as comma delimited strings e To erase the Prefix or Suffix select the read only edit control that contains the currently configured Prefix or Suffix and select the Clear button e The Add and Clear buttons function on the control that is selected when the button is pressed e Hex values can be entered by preceding the two digit hex value with 0x Control characters can also be entered using the hat delimited notation i e M for Carriage Return e All keypad keys can be entered by typing the key Some keypad keys are only valid if in Key Message mode For example the Function Keys F1 PF1 are only valid in Key Message mode Interaction between Strip Leading Trailing and Prefix Suffix Settings 1 Replacements are not done on the Prefix and Suffix only the barcode data for both Block and Key Message mode Control characters in the Prefix and Suffix are translated when Translate All is enabled 2 Replacements are done on the barcode data and then characters are stripped for both Strip Leading and Strip Trailing features As an example suppose we have the following data and configuration The barcode scanned begins with Group Separator GS followed by the character A Grou
61. commercially available CE user s guides or the CE on line Help application installed with the MX7 Note Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX7 to conserve the main battery and to ensure the backup battery is charged The MX7 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a laptop desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP At a minimum it has the My Device Internet Explorer and the Recycle Bin icons that can be tapped with the stylus to access the contents At the bottom of the screen is the Start button Tapping the Start button causes the Start Menu to pop up It contains the standard Windows menu options Programs Favorites Documents Settings Help and Run The Start Menu Shutdown option found on most desktop PC s has been replaced with a single command Suspend because the MX7 is always powered On when a fully charged main battery and backup battery are present Tap the Suspend button to turn the screen off or tap the red Power button to turn the screen off and place the MX7 into Suspend mode Tap the Power button to wake the unit up Desktop Icon Function My Device Access files and programs Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted Internet Explorer Connect to the Internet intranet requires radio card and Internet Service Provider ISP enrollment is not available from LXE Radio Config Used when setting radio power management antenna diversity and Utility roami
62. configuration by the Administrator are available to the end user LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to start up in Administration mode with no default password and when the device is started for the first time the user has full access to the mobile device and no password prompt is displayed After the Administrator specifies an application or applications to lock assigns a password and the device is rebooted or the hotkey 1s pressed the mobile device 1s then in end user mode AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the Administrator See Chapter 4 AppLock for further information and instruction MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 9 Battery Access A Settings Control Panel Battery View the status of the Main and Backup batteries 8 091 V raw 3518 in 8 105 V raw 3524 Main Power remaining 94 Main Power remaining 95 Backup 1 435 V raw 593 Backup 1 418 V raw 586 Charge i J Main CHARGING Main CHARGING Backup CHARGING ay Battery BOF 8 13 ma A 5 Pd m Battery f 8 15 a A E Figure 3 6 System Battery The Battery tab shows the status and the percentage of power left in the main battery It also shows the status of the backup battery The listed values cannot be changed by the user Tap the Charge or Discharge buttons to charge and discharge the backup battery If the battery
63. essei e oan aaa A OORA ai aaae 189 WPA PSR Authentication uio a ena N Fr ee evo Fea gl e EER E 190 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration ccce 191 Odyssey Client Men a 2 itooce eade ote tasers peer ta evo pde Dee co Ree edis ee cape palam E EE e tdi bdE 191 Se TTE coron tates ietebirceteiuterie betes vests bout A E A EA EE E v vba tote A tuat itu 191 ront HIS TTE ET 192 TOOLS nea e E owen seceded ysataueb veda iugsan E R 193 jor E E E E E EE NE E E E A E ET 193 Wireless SECUPIDY peisir ar seee EEE EER e e OE EN ened rr Fee EE NE 194 Set drm 194 N Encryption E A E E O A EE 195 WER ENGYDOON 25 o estates ose e a a aa Ta eds 196 SEC LEAP peier E E E ties E E O N aurea tals 198 WEP Authentication for LEAD soiree eser e E EAE 199 Set WPA sass stuscevesvaegdeyatatauersoavaiey saatguessedageotisuaeuey Setuauesstwaeuth a a a a a a 201 PEAP MS CHAP Authentication Configuration sssini a aoia iiaiai 203 Seryer AUN SNICANOM eorr non earner r aba apri eU eam seo RENSE EE R ean 206 PEAP GTC Authentication CoOnBpurdlioE erae ete a a a i Ee dut de sad 207 Server Authentedlioti oper beesc ib pecitels b eei eese hse ct eei pet sets vest ras baee deb poss equ Rpes soa ti E 211 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide vili Table of Contents E EAP LEAP Autbefiticallol eode prete ero a ttes dea EE i be ada e ER i es Re 212 EAP TIES Authentication COonfrgurdttQE o eco ocius beet dod eoe RU Socata tien SUYA IUE
64. ete OAN Hose set eodd 58 Battery Maintenance Publication sucer nrbe ge od eh RO e i nr ele Y RAO ENEN 58 MX7 Multi Charger Optional eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenennn nennen 59 Multi Charger IndiCatots adio sphere erri ek eri ER YE iat Re rc Et n sh rd o Gan Stee 60 LED FuUnetonS d E sate tantvanr ede E F wNaiediaeeeiads es 60 GRATI 60 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle ssssssssssircssscnicnnnnnininininiiiniiis 61 Cradle AssemblyC omg ONenitsiasiessiscciasfcossedvatiaasathonniacheneaadennsaiacobsnniaconscndcabhoueaaddetsasdystenataersgasteoraaegrone 62 ier qa e PE 62 IJ Bracket FOOPDEIDU s iieri pte a IR ERE IRAM S AEMERRHIAMU NI ERAI MEHREREN se RR Ioan 62 RAM Ball arid Cylinder sien rino pai Rb site er Foe E nce tise RU EE eae 63 RANIUASSEIBBISCPODIEL edo etta SU DEED SR UN rae e ee Res colto as 64 How to Install the Cradle U Bracket iieee it erret tret mis boten bete te Spr e es Eve ERE Pa FOVERE 65 How To Install tbe RAM Bracket occaeca e pepe a ed e bete Fita E Uns opeep trop E Da Edda 67 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide iv Table of Contents E CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 71 j 71 bili 000 MR ene eae PITE 71 dp c cb riii i Peace M 72 SII NUT 72 Soltware AUDI AO orien rete sttes iet EG ROS S ERROR el Epe REPE DI FS EFE reto reS Pedo terd 73 SLEW ale Backi Pesica e e e e di NES
65. failure When the administrator changes the hotkey LOG ERROR configuration the hotkey controller must be notified This notification failed Hotkey press message received The user just pressed the configured hotkey LOG PROCESSING In app hook WM SIZE In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window size and corrects it LOG EX MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B AppLock Error Messages Message In app hook WM WINDOWPOSCHANG ED Explanation and or corrective action In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window position and corrects it 169 Level LOG EX Initializing keyboard hook AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization LOG PROCESSING the keyboard hook processing This message is logged prior to the load attempt procedure Keyboard hook initialization failure The keyboard filter initialization failed LOG_ERROR Keyboard hook loaded OK The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully LOG_EX L after Ctrl Processing the backdoor entry LOG_EX Loading keyboard hook When AppLock first loads it loads a dll that contains L
66. for hot key changes LOG ERROR The watch process could not be initiated Ctrl after L or X Processing the backdoor entry LOG EX Ctrl pressed The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the LOG EX HotKey processing Ctrl Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Decrypt acquire context failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt acquired context OK Decryption process ok LOG EX Decrypt create hash failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt created hash OK Decryption process ok LOG EX Decrypt failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt import key failure Unable to decrypt password LOG ERROR Decrypt imported key OK Decryption process ok LOG EX E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 166 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Encrypt acquire context failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt acquire encrypt context Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR failure Encrypt acquired encrypt context Encrypt password process successful LOG EX OK Encrypt create hash failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt create key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt created encrypt hash OK Encrypt password process successful LOG EX Encrypt export key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt export key length failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt exporte
67. from a PC using ActiveSync The CAB files are loaded into the folder System which is the internal Flash drive Then information is added to the registry if desired to make the CAB file auto launch at startup The CAB file can update the registry as desired and cause the unpacked file s to be placed in the appropriate location The registry information needed is under the key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist as follows The main subkey is any text and is a description of the file Then 3 values are added FileName is the name of the CAB file with the path usually System Installed is a DWORD value of 0 which changes to 1 once auto launch installs the file FileCheck is the name of a file to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed The value in FileCheck is the name of one of the files with path installed by the CAB file Since the CAB file installs into DRAM when memory is lost this file is lost and the CAB file must be reinstalled Three optional fields are also added Order Delay and PCMCIA These are all DWORD fields described below The auto launch process goes as follows The launch utility opens the registry database and reads the list of CAB files to auto launch First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present If not the registry entry is ignored If it is present and the Installed flag is not set auto launch makes a copy of the CAB file since it gets deleted by installation and
68. install fails or the file to be installed is not found the delay does not occur The PCMCIA field is used to indicate that the file usually a CAB file being loaded is a radio driver and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded By default the PCMCIA slots are off on powerup to prevent the Unidentified PCMCIA Slot dialog from appearing E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 136 Utilities Once the drivers are loaded the slot can be turned on The value in the PCMCIA field is a DWORD representing the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file but before activating the slot a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation The default value of 0 means the slot is not powered on The default values for the default radio drivers listed below is 1 meaning one second elapses between the CAB file loading and the slot powering up Note that the auto launch process can also launch batch files BAT executable files EXE registry setting files REG or sound files WAV The mechanism is the same as listed above but the appropriate CE application is called depending on file type Registry information is already in the default image for the following S autoexec batch file for users convenience HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AUTOEXEC FileName System Autoexec bat Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 50 sp
69. listed above e The backlight turns off after 3 seconds of no activity e The display turns off after 18 seconds of no activity 15sec 3sec e And the device enters Suspend after 5 minutes and 18 seconds of no activity Power Properties OK x Power Properties OK 0 Battery Schemes Device Status Power Properties m OK x Battery schemes Device status Power Battery Schemes Device Status a ae Device Name Power Level External Backup battery COMS High D0 DSK1 High DO NDSO High DO PRISMADO2 1 High DO Switch state to User Idle WDGD High DO After 2 minutes Switch state to System Idle After 2 minutes Switch state to Suspend after 5 minutes pf 8 19 a p E Pd dy Power GB Lo 4 20 ru A a BY ts Power 2 I 4 20 mm A a Figure 3 23 Power Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes Changes are saved across tabs Tap the X box to discard any changes Tap the for Help The changes take effect immediately MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 109 Regional Settings Access AY Settings Control Panel Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers currency time and date based on regional and language settings Set the user interface language and the default input language Factory Default Settings Region Locale Engli
70. minutes begins the Analyze Discharge Charge cycle on the battery pack in the Charge Analyze well The external AC power supply cable connection for the Multi charger is shipped with the multi charger The main battery pack can be charged in either 1 a powered MX7 Multi Charger or 2 by a powered AC Adapter connected by multipurpose cables to the mobile device Insert the main battery into any charging well in the Multi Charger The retaining clip on the battery pack snaps the battery into place in the battery well Remove the battery pack by depressing the retaining clip and pulling the battery straight up and out Do not slam or drop the battery into the charging well Do not allow foreign material to fall or spill into the charging well Failure to follow these instructions can result in damage to the main battery pack or the Multi Charger Please refer to the MX7 Multi Charger User s Guide for instruction E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 60 MX7 Multi Charger Optional Multi Charger Indicators LED Functions No e Battery pack not plugged in or no power Lm a 3 Charged Gen Battery Battery pack fully charged fully charged Charging Battery pack charging Standby Battery pack temperature out of range Fault Flashing Red on any Battery pack fault or failure station Timeout Flashing Red on any Battery analyzer s four hour timeout period station expired Charger Analy
71. mode it is not re enabled upon a return from suspend Enable Odyssey Start Programs Odyssey Client Settings Enable Odyssey When Odyssey is disabled selecting Enable Odyssey from the Settings menu may not re enable Odyssey Odyssey is enabled by default after every cold and warm reset See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for Odyssey client setup information and instruction Radio Config Utility Access a Programs Radio Config Utility IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN U EY Associated 00 60 1D 04 D5 C4 Current Tx Rate E Mbits sec Current Channel E RSSI dBm Fair 46 G i d IEEE 80 QD s 10 31 a A E Figure 3 2 Radio Config Utility Main Menu WiFi icon in Toolbar Tapping the WiFi icon in the toolbar presents the Radio Config Kr Utility Main Menu to the user See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration section titled IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN Configuration Utility for WiFi information and instruction Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Odyssey Client This utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating the application is inactive at this time Note LXE recommends using the Funk Odyssey client to configure the Odyssey Client Wireless Zero Config is not recommended for configuring the radio MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Start Menu Program Options 83
72. onc iiec eese bct ge aea levee st eue epe usce Doe dE ee ERE o Nep Vues 230 Advaticed Certificate Details erronee rpne pa epa ee E O EE EPEE E EEO R EEE 231 Script Warming Seceani ene C P I EA EE E ENEE name abate ENES E EERE 232 SOBIDE WWII MING Sei irc dieci e aE a Ee Ro Equo RE E Ee E E 232 COB esq Blogs Coal 58u6d ic e E E E E 232 Certificate Download Security Watrp c on e erp ce pe Oo d ba pde HER 233 oup PRA 234 Import Certificate etin d tpa dle e nave e e nece e ied dre ide qus i Led Nei jets 234 Browsing to Certificate DOGAUOfk i i ad bien Le SPEM ERREUR a aE ATHE SERE Er ERR FER EAR epa ii 233 Certificate Lisine sce ab PH rA AR elektr bs E CER TAL as drei oa be E OR ER L EORR 235 Private key Not PIesetta erem ep cs secur lente te EEE Pa SED ASEE ES 236 Browsing to Private Key LO Cat Onis seed ee ne peser opcre F ge OR REL RUR E couaqaenadlecencdestqueteaeqaeiuansa 236 PuyateEey Present iiu e GR DOE USER EUH REOS REESE ER POSER ELS 29 802 11g WiFi Configuration Utility Menus Status CCX RSSI sse 238 802 11g WiFi Configuration Utility Menus Conf About Save amp Exit sess 239 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Chapter 1 Introduction Overview The LXE MX7 is a rugged portable hand held Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 equipped mobile computer capable of wireless data communications The mobile device can transmit information using an 802 11 radio and it can store information for l
73. only recognized names are GENERAL SPECIAL or MAP Invalid SHIFT code s The key scan code is specified as SHIFT code but the SHIFT code parsed is not recognized The following values are valid e VK code from the VK code table below e x where x is an ASCII code e g A 3 or Invalid value s in GENERAL section The value name parsed is invalid for the GENERAL section The recognized names are MAPNAME MAPCNT MAPCOLS MAPROWS or ALGOR Invalid value s in MAP section The value name parsed is not expected in the SPECIAL section The only recognized names are MAP and COLxxx Invalid value s in SPECIAL section The value name parsed is not expected in the SPECIAL section The only recognized names are KEYSHIFT KEYALT KEY2ND and KEYCONTROL Invalid VK_ code s The VK code parsed is not recognized See the VK Code Table below for valid values Map ended without MAP value The MAP section must contain a MAP value so the data fields can be parsed E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 260 Creating Custom Key Maps MAPNAME must be all numerics Because of limitations in Microsoft Layout Manager the map name must be all numeric 4 5 or 6 digits The name parsed did not fit this limitation No definition for map MAP 2ND There is no 2nd keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition f
74. pere rI d uns C RU tents vase e vb CU DUREE Mene ROS epe 25 Ligure 2 10 LCD Panel and Dotoe Switch sic debo EO DEI ED e aids IER 59 Figure 2 11 Passive Vetucle Mount Cradle anid USB racket sg evs csciscssicedasdssesecescescvvcsadessebaiwesbtedustataneintsbapesesesioes 62 Figure 2 12 W Bracket Mounino FOGD Mi ise cien epo RE REOR is GE E r ehe Pap o Masc eode p RE ERCE Ple DEEP ETUR ER AREAS 62 Figure 2 13 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle RAM Ball Assembly seen 63 Figure 2 14 RAM Bracket Components s oi eee pere epeepsee pL ees ea aE op sE penses Up eu us s ERE EER UE EE 63 Figure 2 15 RAM Assembly Footprint c tr ar e PERIERE EREE USER EUREN MERE RES ERA V AREE ERE E Perak A 64 Figure 2 16 Install Cradle U Brac Ketrinne bore oec REX UP ERES ale PUT SE XE Acer ee 65 Figure 2 17 Install RAM Bracket Asser ly use iere ptr ronie PEE rte HERD FER XH OF ERR ERES ERE EE Rp ee Naa aa EAE RE HER nas 67 Eigre 3 1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screens cono o og OTt P ORO DP OUT En TORRES 80 Figure 3 2 Radio Confie Utility Main Menu e oicun openi tone ceste vet ceci esp ea bct estates sues PORE eanSeLaRE 82 Figure 3 3 Taskbar General Tab aire eade pene din HR VIR arenae Vea eru nian Ue i ea Tee EET aa ESEE 85 Figure 34 Advanced Tabs oii oie eod EH RI HE o b ea bobo DEREN 86 Fiore 3 5 5 80e A COSA SID UNITY 5 d T ABRE REIR TREE EP ex OF E osu DR PREX OD Enc eu e TA 90 Figure 3 5 581500 Bate by uis code OUR SE E ERE EEAKT A ETE SE APUD Paca
75. replace the main battery pack before that point MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Hardware Setup 13 Installing the Handstrap Note The handstrap cannot be used installed when the MX7 has the trigger handle installed at the same time An elastic hand strap is available for the MX7 Once installed the hand strap provides a means for the user to secure the computer to their hand It is adjustable to fit practically any size hand and is easily moved to allow installation or removal of the battery pack Note Slide the bottom bracket out and away from the MX7 when replacing the main battery pack Figure 1 10 MX7 With Handstrap Installed Tool Required 1 Phillips Screwdriver not supplied by LXE Installation 1 Place the MX7 with the screen facing down on a flat stable surface 2 Attach the handstrap retainer bracket to the MX7 with the screws provided 3 Slip the Handstrap Clip into the bracket at the base of the MX7 4 Making sure the closed loop fastener surfaces on the handstrap are facing up slide the strap through the pin in the retainer bracket and the clip 5 Fold each end of the strap over so that the closed loop fastener surfaces mate evenly 6 Test the strap s connection making sure the MX7 is securely connected to each end of the strap connectors Check the closed loop fastener retainer bracket and clip connections frequently If they have loosened they must be tightened before the MX7 is placed into
76. ri e Pp Puts c mare oc seem enry rrr mere cree 121 SCC MEE 122 General ant i I ERROR VERRE UU T TENOR ENTE GuR ESEE Ua ER UB E 122 hun 123 haste MT EE 124 odii de EN 124 Volume ANG SOUNGS em 125 Good Scan and Bad Scan SOUNGS sec csisscesccossee ascsaczadsnandenvavaonidcsaseacesa ssa E ET EEEa 125 SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs eee 126 Access Files om the Flash Card inito t trs HE e ve SEIX ENS bees EIER Ce pe abb ed Men oU S tuse Usu nde 126 ActiveSync Get Connected Process eene 127 Jrncenptii EE 127 HOPINIICI P 128 Install amp ctivaSync on Desktop LaptoP csar roire enre narraire kv ptt d gt e eere or ie pr tase eis 128 Serial Connectoren ies ente pete ren Pet nece ter patei d RIA Te dUs dain tss Apa GU Re Ns 128 USB Connection sio toesese oeste bei ee pest ee baeestebicesbes pissed i nea Se e paese A EE 128 Connect Initial Install PIOGSSs icai titre tae tae reti e ct pote bd uop a ete e pate ERE rtu EE ied let edd 129 Change Connection Paranmielefs scettr eie Era eto tO E Ta suite S i e teret du ad Hester eure 129 Backap MX Ol cR V 130 licet 130 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide vi Table of Contents E MX 7 and PO Partners hi Drine br re oti PRIN UE M Ape toiur ast UM e Up M 130 Serial Port Transfer deme ER o sei ce fucwi Uk ooa SU bae O ERA 130 USB Tralster ecc aiite ie c RUMOR HOUSE m o a EM A Eaa 130 R
77. runs the Microsoft utility WCELOAD to install it If the Installed flag is set auto launch looks for the FileCheck file If it is present the CAB file is installed and that registry entry is complete If the FileCheck file is not present memory has been lost and the utility calls WCELOAD to reinstall the CAB file Then the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry until all registry entries are analyzed To force execution every time for example for AUTOEXEC BAT use a FileCheck of dummy which will never be found forcing the item to execute For persist keys specifying EXE or BAT files the executing process will be started and then Launch will continue leaving the loading process to run independently For other persist keys including CAB files Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing This is important for example to ensure that a CAB file is installed before the EXE files from the CAB file are run The Order field is used to force a sequence of events Order 0 is first and Order 99 is last Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass but not in a predictable sequence Note If the order of loading is not critical it may be easier to use the System Startup folder instead see below The Delay field is used to add a delay after the item is loaded before the next is loaded The delay is given in seconds and defaults to 0 if not specified If the
78. s DE UTR UTER IE RU rarer rrr rier rrr rarer ror rise cry ee 102 Network and Dialup Connections ete n hd et Gain e teet eds 104 Owner Properties one son aae He EH LER tier A I DEDE R 105 PASS WOU 2 2455 sin onibus hb PH E EI Ue er UE EO iot Ea nile LuP fpe RD Lares s RI ERG 106 R piotial SEUIIBS raresepeun oera ea Eo a Ea aS Eo o EI E ve bv keen R E NEEESE aE 109 Scanner Control Panels as ORE Ox EE ass Wie OES 110 Scanner Panel Maior ri mre ra n Cri Re Dec ad erg C du Co e Dude ra a P Ru Re Eee Hed 111 Scammer Panel COM La see sheep Doha nea PHONE TOES 112 Bareode Adyanced Pre tic SWR osse cect ses POWER OO TREO 113 Barcode Advanced C rl Translatio cocti ie eee ciue cv a rop serar inet io ceret t ee ete intus 115 Barcode Advanced Scancode Enable Disable ccccccccecssccesscescecesceesseceneeeeeeceseesessecesees 117 Barcode Advanced Processing No Code ID essere 118 Barcode Advanced Processing Strip Code ID 119 Barcode Advanced Processing EAN128 Barcodes ccccsessseeseesseeeseeeeeeeceseceseensecseeeaeeenes 119 Stylus EDU ico er EE 121 Stylus Calibrate sapi c REI EEHEU RR ERE FEE YONG EXER RREE EE EAE 121 Systema General esi renens e EO UR ERE EAR DENISE VOR EEUU eH VES ERREUR REDE 122 Sye EAT DOO E T 123 System Device Namesti ne o p WE p ORT RU et b enm HF Ra eR ER 124 System Copy e Iis coser HISP Pr o ERE UR ARCU EDU REOR FM uiu T 124 Volume
79. service again Periodically check the handstrap for wear and the connection for tightness If the handstrap gets worn or damaged it must be replaced E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 14 Hardware Setup Connecting an External Power Supply Optional The MX7 receives AC DC power from the AC DC 12V Power Supply The MX7 external power connection is part of the RS 232 cable assembly and the USB cable assembly Putting it all together 7 HE Figure 1 11 USB MX7 Power Assembly 1 Squeeze the sides of the power connector and push the power cable connector into the MX7 port until it clicks The click means the connector is seated firmly 2 TheSystem LED above the Scan key illuminates when the MX7 is charging the main battery pack using external power through the power cable The backup battery is always being trickle charged by the main battery pack Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX7 to conserve the main battery power and maintain a charge in the backup battery Assembling the AC Power Adapter The LXE approved AC Power Adapter is only intended for use in a 25 C 77 F maximum ambient temperature environment If the AC power cable is not included with the AC Adapter please contact your LXE representative for assistance p Figure 1 12 AC DC 12V External Power Supply e Firmly press the female end of the power cable into the male connector on the power adapter e Plug the 3 pro
80. sss 55 Clear Contents of Document Folder 86 Clear Internet cache ee 98 Clear registry settings sssssseeeeee 147 MX7 Reference Guide Code Enable te itii 117 ColdbOot i a eoe enteros 31 COLDBOOT EXE seseeereeene 41 141 COM POFS eren tti rr retos 110 Configurati tis 5 2 ctetitee d uoce pn 38 Command Prompt 5 ih cese cecinit 80 Components niei esee in RE pee ee aede 5 Config tab jb p E S E 178 Configuration Applock rient eot en tee tendis 153 Single User AppLock ssssssss 160 Connect ANC Veo erase tacite eed ti t rer 79 Connect External PS estet 14 Connect USING orrien iore ee core teet eee ceu 107 Contact LXE c iori Pe orbes 32 Control characters c ccccceeccesceeeeeeteeeeeseeeeeees 115 Control Panel Single User AppLock e nece eee 160 Control Panel options eese 87 Controls Physical eine 41 Copyrights ith reete ees 124 Cote LO GICs isti tutes amie ERREUR UERG E 35 925 279 CPU Xscale eerta met pr ToU 35 Cradle Assembly uaevn ee n ere eris 61 Create a dialup direct or VPN connection 104 Create Connection Option sss 104 Ctrl Key function ent ene nne 52 53 Cumulative mode timers esses 108 Current Time iet oum 93 Custom Key Mapping 254 Customize dates times currency 109 D Data Bits 54er brotes 110
81. tap Scan and choose the correct SSID Choose Infrastructure for the network type Tap the Next button to continue or the Cancel button to ignore changes made on this screen Add Network Wizard p Association Mode Encryption Method TKIP M Authenticate using 802 1X Keys will be generated automatically for data privacy Pre shared key WPA or WPA2 Passphrase C unmask s de oys GEZ 1 59 ru A Figure 5 35 Set Association Mode to WPA Set the Association Mode to WPA Set the Encryption Method to TKIP For all WPA authentications except WPA PSK check the Authenticate using 802 1X box The Keys will box will be grayed out when the Encryption Method is set to TKIP In the following sections each authentication method configuration is described Tap Next to continue Previous to return to the previous screen or Cancel to ignore changes made to this screen MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 203 PEAP MS CHAP Authentication Configuration The Funk Odyssey supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP MS CHAP protocol Odyssey Client Add Netwo ard OK Select the method s that you would Select and order the EAP methods 4 like to add that you would like to use EAP TTLS EAP TLS EAP MD5 Challenge EAP GenericTokenCard EAP PEAP Remove Validate server certificate Previous Next Cancel Y mu gt
82. tlie Keypad eiecti tete aste s tree n eege en eet R MA RS RN M Re am MD SA UD USE aA 28 Usine the Input Panel or Virtual Keyboard eed rrr e P en e so PEE YE 28 Using the AD sors sats sacesnts Aateaces r e enced nete rede sos Gated E N i E S 29 Using the GOAHer ocio ose bos roe peso Edo eoo esed E E 30 Voice PD tL 30 Tethered Scanio TS senigis aen onsen east ene Feast E Tta enn pon t dete Peters 30 Saving Changes to the Registry eeeeee nnn 31 Genting hy QW PRAEMIA MM A HMM MEM HMM HMM ME HIE HMM HMM EM 32 Manna ER 42 AXGGGSSOTIBS cea iae DR RM ERAS MRNA BRUM ARR NIEMAND EM 32 CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT 35 xo gor Re p por e 35 Sytem HardWare uis ivteneetetuss erepto E R sheath cares eto te nodules do eris ud Ee sata aao e ES 35 Cental Process opa TEE 35 ducc E 35 Systerm MMO eis nens ocn D deoa RU eitis US p E P ee 36 Internal SD Memory Card icc ipee Ves rere egere ee ti e EH Ee de RU ee vu 36 bunc 36 Power SUpDIly cnicsisdscscetisocsess bsee ete p eese A A AS 37 Main Battery Paese eictec oeste ein tae petu teria tetro etu Er eim tr Eee ta a emanates 3 Backup Ballety aee tite ieri estu erra tocco e tes iud RUD ester niet educa 37 Radio POMS ecann E E AS 37 HUMEUR 37 COM POl e TEES 38 R3 232 Serial POP deae splen rye Rr roc arzt te onore Pad even ar ee aeris 38 USB Client Port sireisas e nite ade cnttita tuv pede qi Pu de A eR UL R A NE Cof pedeR
83. to the SD card is not lost Network connection will need to be re established Or using the input panel you can tap Dd Run and type WARMBOOT Tap the OK button Important Because of the extreme nature of the Cold Reset LXE recommends that the Cold Reset be used only as an emergency procedure and the Warm Reset be used whenever necessary Tap Did Run and type COLDBOOT Tap the OK button to coldboot the MX7 The default settings are restored when the device powers on again Calibrating the touchscreen will need to be performed when the cold boot process is complete This command filename is not case sensitive E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 42 Flash Cards Flash Cards Note When removing or installing SD cards protect the MX7 internal components from electrostatic discharge Make sure the proper software is pre loaded and radio cards are properly configured The SD flash card under the main battery pack is intended to store program CAB files MX7 utilities the registry and the registry backup information The internal SD flash card supports a FAT file system via a special device driver and appears to the OS as a folder This allows the contents to be manipulated via the standard Windows CE interface Operating system files are hidden on this drive with a terminal unique identifier in the internal flash to prevent them being accidentally erased by a user In addition the registry hive files will be st
84. view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL Figure 5 78 Certificate Services Welcome Screen Tap the Request a certificate task link E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 230 User Certificates Microsoft Certificate Services johndoe Request a Certificate Select the certificate type User Certificate Or submit an advanced certificate request Figure 5 79 Request a Certificate Screen Tap on the advanced certificate request link Microsoft Certificate Services johndoe Advanced Certificate Request The policy of the CA determines the types of certificates you can request Click one of the following options to Create and submit a request to this CA Submit a certificate request by using a base 64 encoded CMC or PKCS 10 file or submit a renewal request by using a base 64 encoded PKCS 7 file Request a certificate for a smart card on behalf of another user by using the smart card certificate enrollment station Note You must have an enrollment agent certificate to submit a request on behalf of another user Figure 5 80 Advanced Certificate Request Screen Tap on the Create and submit a request to this CA link MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B User Certificate
85. your first synchronization process begins automatically when you finish setting up your PC in the ActiveSync wizard and using the USB cable connect your mobile device to the PC Serial Connection Tap the Dd Settings Control Panel PC Connection on the MX7 Tap the Change Connection button From the popup list choose COM 1 57600 Note The default is USB LXE does not recommend using serial ActiveSync at 115 Kb s This will set up the MX7 to use COM 1 Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is checked Tap OK to return to the Control Panel USB Connection Tap the Dd Settings Control Panel PC Connection on the MX7 Tap the Change Connection button From the popup list choose USB Default This will set up the MX7 to use the USB configuration Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is checked Tap OK to return to Settings MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B ActiveSync Get Connected Process 129 Connect Initial Install Process Connect the correct cable to the PC the host and the MX7 the client Tap the ud Programs Communication Connect icon on the MX7 The MX7 connection is made using Dd Programs Communication ActiveSync ia Cables for initial ActiveSync Configuration USB Client to PC Laptop MX7A052MULTICBLUSB Serial Client to PC Laptop MX7A055MULTICBLDA9F When the desktop laptop com
86. 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 00 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 00 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 10 00 Map4 hex E9 70 DF 71 74 0D 32 87 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 N 34 00 00 00 39 00 00 00 10 00 2E 11 00 00 00 00 31 00 00 37 38 00 00 28 00 ED 09 35 00 00 00 26 N 33 F1 00 30 00 00 00 12 36 EF 72 73 00 F2 F3 00 Flag4 hex 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Map5 hex 38 75 DF 76 79 00 DB 00 00 00 00 08 00 00 00 00 33 00 00 00 34 00 00 00 10 00 BE 2D 00 00 00 00 DC 00 00 BD BF 00 00 22 00 BB 09 32 00 00 00 21 DD DE 00 BA 00 00 00 DC BC 31 77 78 00 F2 F3 00 Flag5 hex 10 00 A0 00 00 00 00 8D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 10 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 Map6 hex EC 7A DF 7B 7E 00 DB 00 00 00 00 BD 00 00 00 00 DB 00 00 00 C0 00 00 00 10 00 BB 36 00 00 00 00 BF 00 00 BC BE 00 00 25 00 39 14 DD 00 00 00 27 DD DE 00 BA 00 00 00 1B C0 30 7C 7D 00 F2 F3 00 Flag6 hex 00 00 A0 00 00 00 00 8F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 N 10 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 00 N 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 00 10 00 10 00 00 00 00 N 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00
87. 1 rrrrrrrrge COL1ROWO SHIFT Q COL1ROW1 SHIFT 9 COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 SHIFT T COL1ROW4 SHIFT U COL1ROW5 SHIFT 4 H COLIROW6 SHIFT O COL1ROW7 open LP E E M E E E COL2ROWO SHIFT A COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 SHIFT D COL2ROW3 SHIFT G COL2ROW4 SHIFT J COL2ROW5 SHIFT 1 COL2ROW6 SHIFT L COL2ROW7 SHIFT 3 LP NN D M E E COL3ROWO open COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 SHIFT X COL3ROW3 SHIFT V COL3ROW4 SHIFT N COL3ROW5 SHIFT 0 COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open LP PE E M E E E MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 275 COL4ROW0 open COL4ROW1 SHIFT S COL4ROW2 open COL4ROW3 SHIFT F COL4ROW4 SHIFT H COL4ROW5 S COL4ROW6 S COL4ROW7 V COL5ROWO S COL5ROW1 S H H COL5ROW2 open a H COL5ROW3 S COL5ROW4 S COL5SROW5 SHIFT M COL5ROW6 open COLSROW7 VK_END LP E E M I P E COL6ROWO open COL6ROW1 SHIFT W COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 SHIFT R COL6ROW4 SHIFT Y COL6ROW5 SHIFT I COL6ROW6 SHIFT 5 COL6ROW7 SHIFT P COL7ROWO SH COL7ROW1 VK SHIFT COL7ROW2 VK COL7ROW3 VK COL7ROW4 SHIFT 7 COL7ROW5 KY ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY BLUE COL7ROW7 VK CONTROL he name of this key doesn t matter he important part is the MAP value odes are defined in docs his is the map for keys with only SHIFT Map MAP MAP ORANGESHFT LP PN UN EE COLOROWO open COLOROW1 VK F21 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F22 COLOR
88. 1s Charging tap the Power turn device Off button to stop the Charge process Tap Discharge a second time to begin the Discharge process If the battery is Discharging tap the Charge button to stop the Discharge process Tap Charge a second time to begin the Charge process LXE recommends Discharging and Recharging the backup battery twice a year E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 92 Settings Control Panel Options Certificates Access A Settings Control Panel Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Lists the certificates trusted by you Class 2 Public Prim Class 3 Public I Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root civ Go Gove mA Figure 3 7 System Stored Certificates Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the MX7 user These values may change based on the type of radio security resident in the client access point or the host system Tap the Import button to import a digital certificate file Tap the View button to view a highlighted digital certificate Tap the Remove button to remove highlighted certificate files Tap the button and follow the instructions in the Help file when working with trusted authorities and digital certificates See Also Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for instruction MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 93 Date Time Access AY Settings Con
89. 30 or 35 dBm Roam Period 10 sec The amount of time to be used to collect signal strength information from an Access Point before a roaming decision is made Options are 5 sec 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 or 60 sec Frag Thresh 2346 If the packet size in bytes exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold the packet is fragmented sent as several pieces instead of as one block Use a low setting in areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of radio interference Options are Any number between 256 bytes and 2346 bytes RTS Thresh 2347 If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Request to Send RTS threshold an RTS is sent before sending the packet A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point Options are Any number between 0 and 2347 Ping Payload 32 bytes Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping Options are 32 bytes 64 128 512 or 1024 bytes Ping Timeout 5000 The amount of time in milliseconds that a device will ms be continuously pinged The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout Options are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms Ping Delay ms 1000 The amount of time in milliseconds between each ping after a Start Ping button tap Options are Any number between 0 and 30000 ms LE
90. 3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open LP PNE UN I E COL4ROWO VK BACKSLASH COL4ROW1 open COL4ROW2 open COL4ROW3 SHIFT VK_HYPHEN COL4ROW4 SHIFT VK_ SLASH COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 VK_NEXT LP E E M E E COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 VK EQUAL COLSROW2 SHIFT VK TAB COL5ROW3 SHIFT 2 COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COLSROW7 VK_PRIOR LN E E E E COL6ROWO VK RBRACKET COL6ROW1 VK_APOSTROPHE COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 SHIFT VK_SEMICOLON COL6ROW4 open COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 SHIFT VK_BACKSLASH COL7ROWO VK COMMA COL7ROW1 SHIFT 1 COL7ROW2 VK_F8 COL7ROW3 VK F9 COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 KY_ ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY BLUE COL7ROW7 open MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 269 the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys on the MX7 32 key keypad modified with BLUE Map MAP MAP BLUE32 LP E E M E E E COLOROWO KY_PROG1B COLOROW1 VK F11 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F12 COLOROW4 VK_F15 COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 VK_LBRACKET COLOROW7 CHANGE MAP BRITE LP E E RE E COL1ROWO open COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 VK_HYPHEN COL1ROW4 open COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open LP PN E E P E E COL2ROWO SHIFT VK LBRACKET COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 open COL2ROW3 open COL2ROW4 SHIFT VK_BACKQUOTE COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open
91. 4MB Files to be loaded on the Flash card are MX7NK BIN MX7EBOOT NBO MX7 BIT The MX7 reloads the operating system upon every warm boot or cold boot Anything not saved or preserved to the registry is lost In warm boot the OS and the CAB files are reloaded from the internal SD card and the preserved registry is also reloaded During cold boot the system behavior 1s identical to warm boot with the addition that the registry is reloaded with factory defaults e LXE recommends that installation of the Flash card be performed on a clean well lit surface e Place the mobile device in Suspend Mode and remove the main battery pack e Lift the rubber barrier and pull the SD card out of the slot e Locate the lt A gt key on the 55 key keypad e Locate the lt Alph gt key on the 32 key keypad 1 Place the SD flash card with new image files on it into the SD slot 2 Select Start Run and type Coldboot 3 Before the splash screen appears press and hold down the lt A gt key on the 55 key keypad Press and hold down the lt Alph gt key on the 32 key keypad Continue to hold the lt A gt or lt Alph gt key down until the displays shows Writing bootloader to flash Note If you do not press and hold the key quickly enough the display shows Loading system from ATA Remove the main battery for 2 seconds re insert the battery and press the Power button Press and hold the lt A gt or lt Alph gt key again 4 The mobile de
92. 8 Figure 5 79 Figure 5 80 Figure 5 81 Figure 5 82 Figure 5 83 Figure 5 84 Figure 5 85 Figure 5 86 Figure 5 87 Figure 5 88 Figure 5 89 Figure 5 90 Figure 5 91 Figure 5 92 Figure 5 93 Figure 5 94 Table of Contents Set the Association Mode 40 WPA cesso nnda En eD ide RS NU IRE ici tes 221 Connect the MX7 and the AP aree etit eie peti HE ERR ESTEE IIS 222 Settings T r sted Servers Menu ODUGO iiciecent bob ioc MERE Ce eR CH soeur ere EIER RU ESERE Had 223 Selecta Trusted Ro0t QA ertet antem ntis ttaviertatenrm antep 223 Configuring Trusted Server CertiHIGBle aite roit OR eerte tpa teen 224 Logon to Cerificate AUDDOEID cioe ereo ese aro appe RES E TRE Ea EH epu R E EVESEN 225 Certificate Services Welcome Sere ets ssc ie ied ope t ap EPOR EE EUR 225 Select Encoding Method before Downloading sese 226 Download CA Certificate Sore eis seisine eaea eree e o eR ier endo tk re Ee urbes b asbl EE Ri 226 Certificate Stores oae oeiba m vo nO rod neon nana GERE ORO EUROS 227 ipon the Ceti CAS ooo e ph et pee sheets ER PT UR REI Fu LI STU ITI PAS DES 227 Browse to the Certificate Location on the MXT cies eite triti ied e i etta 228 Logon to Certificate Authoritya aiii tne e dvat cm a rir i e t e UR ITa 229 Certificate Services Welcome SOPISOlla o oodd oes akt ERR peux Ee river ur eb HA EOE tea ione les nd dtes 229 Request a Certificate SOreBoieri ero navi ai On mr a reload 230 Advanced Certificate Request SCPOGID
93. A4 B COL5ROW5 2 M COL5ROW6 VK PERIOD COL5ROW7 VK DOWN LP I I EE COL6ROWO VK F10 COL6ROW1 2 W COL6ROW2 VK RETURN COL6ROW3 R COL6ROW4 2 Y COL6ROW5 I COL6ROW6 5 COL6ROW7 P LP Al A A EE COL7ROWO E COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 VK_F3 COL7ROW3 VK_F4 COL7ROWA4 VK F6 COL7ROW5 7 COL7ROW6 VK F8 COL7ROW7 open the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys with only 2ND Map MAP MAP 2ND LP E E E E E COLOROWO open COLOROW1 VK CAPITAL COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_PAUSE COLOROW4 open COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 VK_HYPHEN COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN1 COLIROWO SHIFT 1 COL1ROW1 SHIFT VK_ EQUAL COL1ROW2 ACTION SCAN3 COLIROW3 SHIFT 5 COLIROWA SHIFT 7 COLIROWS5 VK EQUAL COLIROW6 SHIFT 9 COL1ROW7 ACTION SCAN2 LP A E E M E E E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 264 Creating Custom Key Maps COL2ROWO SHIFT VK BACKSLASH COL2ROW1 open B COL2ROW2 SHIFT VK SEMICOLON COL2ROW3 SHIFT VK APOSTROPHE COL2ROW4 VK COMMA COL2ROW5 VK LBRACKET COL2ROW6 SHIFT VK SLASH COL2ROW7 SHIFT VK PERIOD LP E E E COL3ROWO open COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 open COL3ROW3 open COL3ROW4 VK BACKQUOTE COL3ROW5 SHIFT VK_COMMA COL3ROW6 VK_HOME COL3ROW7 SHIFT VK_TAB LP P E E M E E E COLA4ROWO open COL4ROW1 VK_ BACKSLASH COL4ROW2 VK END COL4ROW3 VK_ SEMICOLON COL4ROW4 VK APOSTROPHE COL4ROWS5 VK PERIOD COL4ROW6
94. AP Settings Commands Tools Fk Connect to Network SSID wpapsk Access point DO OF 34 D7 0C 90 Packets in out 7 4 Figure 5 66 Connect the MX7 and the AP Tap the Connect to box and the MX7 then connects to the AP MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 223 Trusted Server Configuration To validate the server side certificates a Trusted Server must be configured Install the Root CA certificate as described in the section titled Root Certificates Then use the following directions to configure the Odyssey client to use the Root CA Certificate Navigate to Settings Trusted Servers Odyssey Client ESCO commands Tools K2 Configure Detailed Status Security Settings EAP FAST Settings Trusted Servers Disable Odyssey j Exit Access point 00 14 1B 58 04 90 Packets in out 92 37 Odyssey Client Trusted Servers Add 3pm Sj queens RS LR B 2e 2 45 a A S 2Y oayss PLAT Figure 5 67 Settings Trusted Servers Menu Option Tap the Add button Odyssey Client Odyssey Client Trusted Root CAs Name must end with m RFEngRootCA RFEngRaotCA Thawte Server Thawte Serv Thawte Premi Thawte Prem Secure Server Secure Serve GTE CyberTrus GTE CyberTr GTE CyberTrus GTE CyberTr GlobalSign Roo GlobalSign Ro Is S
95. AP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC or EAP TLS Encryption None Type of encryption to be used to protect transmitted data Options are None Manual WEP Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA2 PSK WPA2 TKIP WPA2 AES CCKM TKIP or CCKM AES Status This screen displays information on the current profile and radio connection Information cannot be edited or changed on the Status panel Summit Client Util Main Config Config Default No Name Client Is Not Associated MAC Signal Strength I MX7 Reference Guide Bod Channel Tx Power mW traffic The panel displays e Config profile being used e The client name IP address and MAC address e The status of the radio down associated authenticated etc e The name IP address and MAC address of the Access Point maintaining the connection to the network e Signal strength changes with network activity e Channel currently being used for wireless j OF amp x PIT e Current transmit power in mW Pd fei e Bitrate in mBit Figure 5 4 Summit Client Utility Status tab E EQ MX7RG B Summit Client Configuration Diags 181 The Diags panel can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues It can also be used to update the radio driver on the MX7 Administrator login is required for the Re connect button function Diagnostics Update Driver and Site Survey functions are not availab
96. Add Prefix and or Add Suffix are combined with Strip Leading and or Strip Trailing the leading and or trailing characters are stripped before the prefix or suffix is added The mode for Prefix Suffix feature is determined by the Send Key Messages WEDGE setting in the Main tab When checked enabled the prefix suffix feature is in Key Message mode Key E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 114 Settings Control Panel Options message mode sends the prefix barcode and suffix to the application with the focus as keystrokes In Key message mode all keys on the keypad can be entered When the Send Key Messages is not checked Block mode is enabled Block mode allows ASCII characters 0x0 Ox7F plus backspace tab delete return and escape In Block mode the prefix suffix data is added to the beginning and end of the buffered barcode data that can then be read by an application from the WDG device Up to 19 characters can be specified for the prefix and up to 19 characters can be specified for the suffix The characters can be text or control characters e g tab carriage return The characters can be entered into the prefix and suffix text boxes by typing from the keypad entering the key s hex equivalent or entering in hat encoded delimited 8 bit code table notation e To enable the Prefix or Suffix processing check the associated checkbox When the box is checked the edit controls to the right are enabled Keys
97. Barcode Advanced Processing EAN128 Barcodes E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 120 Settings Control Panel Options The user specifies whether the barcodes have an AIM Code ID 3 characters or a Symbol Code ID 1 character They also specify whether the AIM or Symbol Code ID will be stripped or passed through to the Codes match as long as the barcode is an EANI28 barcode Adding Codes to the Match List for EAN128 Barcodes The first elements of an EAN128 barcode are matched against the entries in the Match Code list in the order entered in the list For example if the match code list contains tem 0 ABC Item 1 C and Item 2 AB in that order the AB has no effect When a match is found e g Code ID A was matched by tem 0 ABC and the process terminated or when the end of the list is reached processing terminates Up to 20 Codes up to 16 characters each can be added to the Match list The characters can be text or control characters e g tab carriage return The characters can be entered into the Match Code List text box by typing from the keypad entering the key s hex equivalent or entering in hat encoded delimited 8 bit code table notation e Keys characters are typed into the lower left text box e To adda match code move the cursor to the lower left text box Add the characters to the box and select the Add button to place the new Match Code in the List Box e To edit a match code highlight the match code i
98. CAPITAL VK KAN VK RSHIFT VK CLEAR VK KANJI VK RWIN VK COMMA VK LAUNCH APP1 VK SCROLL VK CONTROL VK LAUNCH APP2 VK SELECT VK CONVERT VK LAUNCH MAIL VK SEMICOLON VK CRSEL VK LAUNCH MEDIA SELECT VK SEPARATOR VK DECIMAL VK LBRACKE VK SHIFT VK DELETE VK LBUTTON VK SLASH VK DIVIDE VK LCONTROL VK SLEEP VK DOWN VK LEFT VK SNAPSHOT VK END VK LMENU VK SPACE VK EQUAL VK LSHIFT VK SUBTRACT VK EREOF VK LWIN VK TAB VK ESCAPE VK MBUTTON VK UP VK EXECUTE VK MEDIA NEXT TRACK VK VOLUME DOWN VK EXSEL VK MEDIA PLAY PAUSE VK VOLUME MUTE VK F1 VK MEDIA PREV TRACK VK VOLUME UP VK F10 VK MEDIA STOP VK ZOOM VK F11 VK MENU VK F12 VK MULTIPLY VK F13 VK NEXT VK F14 VK NOCONVERT VK F15 VK NONAME VK Fl6 VK NUMLOCK VK F17 VK NUMPADO VK F18 VK NUMPADI VK F19 VK NUMPAD2 VK F2 VK NUMPAD3 VK F20 VK NUMPADA VK F21 VK NUMPAD5 VK F22 VK NUMPAD6 VK F23 VK NUMPAD7 VK F24 VK NUMPADB8 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 284 ASCII Control Codes ASCII Control Codes The following table lists ASCII Control codes in hexadecimal and their corresponding Control key combinations Char Hex e Control Action NUL 0 q NULL character Ctrl Shift VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK A 0x41 down SOH 1 A Start O
99. D Off The LED on the radio card is not visible to the user when the radio card is installed in a sealed mobile device Options are On Off E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 184 Summit Client Configuration Parameter Default Function Hide Password On If On the Summit Config Utility masks passwords as they are typed and when they are viewed Options are On Off Admin SUMMIT A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must Password be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped If Hide Password is On the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry text box The password is Case Sensitive Options are none Certs Path System A valid directory path of up to 64 characters where WPA Certificate Authority and User Certificates are stored on the mobile device LXE suggests ensuring the directory path currently exists before assigning the path in this parameter See sections titled Root Certificates and User Certificates later in this chapter for instructions on obtaining CA and User Certificates Options are none MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Summit Client Configuration 185 Wireless Security No Security Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Config tab according to the type of wireless security used by your network The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a netwo
100. Diamond keys and Diamond Sticky keys have no assigned default value i e their default value is no key gt To edit the diamond key parameters Tap Did Settings Control Panel Mappable Keys tab Change the parameter values using the drop down list and tap OK to save the changes The change takes effect immediately See Also Appendix A Key Maps These keys can be mapped by the user to generate any key code defined by Windows CE with the exception of Shift Alt Ctrl Left Right Shift Alt Ctrl 55 Key Keypad The user can program the following key combinations using the Diamond 1 key D O 0O 0O e g ESC Blue Alt e g Home Shft Down Arrow e g BackTab Orange Tab e g Insert Blue T Any combination of standard keypresses can be used E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 50 32 Key Keypad The Keypads The user can program the following key combinations using the Diamond keys user defined without using a sticky key D O asterisk user defined without using a sticky key D E gt dual Sign C open parenthesis user defined without using a sticky key exclamation closed parenthesis D O mark 1 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B The Keypads 51 LED Indicators See Appendix A Key Maps for instruction on the specific keypresses to access all keypad functions
101. Display Brightness Icon 4 Diamond Key 5 X Scan Button 6 Enter Key 7 Orange Key Sticky Key 8 Blue Key Sticky Key 9 On Off Button 10 Scan Status LED Figure 2 6 The ANSI Batch Keypad e When using a sequence of keys that includes a sticky key press the sticky key first release it then press the rest of the key sequence e When using a sequence of keys that includes the Orange or Blue keys press the color key first then the rest of the key sequence e Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters Press the Shft key then the alphabetic key for an uppercase letter e When the computer boots the default condition of Caps or CapsLock is Off The Caps or CapsLock condition can be toggled with Blue plus Tab key sequence The keymaps keypress sequences are located in Appendix A Key Maps E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 48 The Keypads Using the 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad 1 System Status LED 2 Alpha Status LED 3 Diamond Keys 4 Scan Button 5 Enter Key 6 Alph Key 7 Orange Key Sticky Key 8 Blue Key Sticky Key 9 On Off Button 10 Scan Status LED Figure 2 7 The 32 Key Keypad e When using a sequence of keys that require an alpha key first press the Alph key Use the Shft sticky key or the Caps key sequence Blue Tab for upper case alphabetic characters e Pressing the Alph key forces Alpha mode for the 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 keys The 1 and 0 keys continue to place a and 0 int
102. E Trigger Handle Figure 1 5 Handle Optional 1 Scan Aperture 3 Handle 2 Trigger 4 Tether Attach Point Handstrap Figure 1 6 Handstrap Optional 1 Handstrap Retainer Bracket 2 Handstrap 3 Handstrap Clip Note Either the trigger handle is attached to the MX7 or the handstrap is attached not both LXE recommends that in the absence of a trigger handle the handstrap be used at all times MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Quick Start 9 Quick Start Note When your mobile device is pre configured the radio keypad and scan aperture configurations are assembled by LXE to your specifications The desktop will display an Odyssey Client Utility icon or it will display a Summit Client Utility icon This section s instructions are based on the assumption that your new system is pre configured and requires only accessory installation e g handstrap and a power source LXE recommends that installation or removal of accessories be performed on a clean well lit surface When necessary protect the work surface MX7 and components from electrostatic discharge In general the sequence of events is 1 Insert a fully charged battery Always put a fully charged battery in the MX7 at the beginning of the shift or workday Connect an external power source to the unit 1f available If the screen does not automatically display tap the Power key Calibrate the touchscreen A white screen will appear during the boot proces
103. E Files can be accessed by tapping Start Programs JEM CE Doubletap the EVM icon to open the EVM Console A folder of JAVA examples and Plug ins is also installed with the JAVA option LXE does not support all JAVA applications running on the mobile device MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Folders Copied at Startup 75 Folders Copied at Startup AppLock The following folders are copied on startup System Desktop copied to Windows Desktop System Fonts copied to Windows Fonts System Help copied to Windows Help System Programs copied to Windows Programs Copying these folders at startup saves any changes made by the user For example saving user installed fonts and help files and tailoring the desktop and programs menus to meet the user s needs This function copies only the directory contents no sub folders Files in the Startup folder are executed but only from System Startup Windows Startup is parsed too early in the boot process so it has no effect Executables in System Startup must be the actual executable not a shortcut because shortcuts are not parsed by the launch process The AppLock program is accessed by the user or the AppLock Administrator at bootup or upon completion of a warm boot Set parameters using the Administration option in the Control Panel See Chapter 4 AppLock for instruction E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 76 Desktop Desktop For general use instruction please refer to
104. G Exit verify password no pwd set Exiting password verification LOG PROCESSING Exit verify password response from dialog Exiting password verification LOG PROCESSING Found taskbar The handle to the taskbar has been found so that AppLock can disable it in user mode LOG PROCESSING Getting address of keyboard hook init procedure AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook LOG PROCESSING Getting configuration from registry The AppLock configuration is being read from the registry This occurs at initialization and also at entry into user mode The registry must be re read at entry into user mode in case the administration changed the settings of the application being controlled LOG PROCESSING Getting encrypt pwd length The length of the encrypted password is being LOG EX calculated Hook wndproc failure AppLock is unable to lock the application This could LOG ERROR happen if the application being locked encountered an error after performing its initialization and shut itself down prior to being locked by AppLock Hook wndproc of open app failure The application is open but AppLock cannot lock it LOG ERROR Hot key event creation failure The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey LOG ERROR notification Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Hot key set event
105. G PROCESSING MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B AppLock Error Messages Message Switching to admin keyboard hook initialization failure Explanation and or corrective action If the keyboard hook initialization fails AppLock switches to admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered 171 Level LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin registry read failure See the explanation of the Registry read failure above AppLock is switching into Admin mode If a password has been configured the prompt will be displayed and will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered LOG PROCESSING Switching to TaskbarScreenMode In administration mode the taskbar is visible and enabled LOG EX Switching to user mode The registry was successfully read and AppLock is starting the process to switch to user mode LOG PROCESSING Switching to user hotkey press The system is currently in admin mode and is now switching to user mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator LOG PROCESSING Taskbar hook failure AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the locked application from re enabling it LOG ERROR Taskbar hook OK AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar LOG EX Timeout looking for app window After the application is launched AppLock must wai
106. He EUR etu d E 214 Installing User Certificate pet e UN ERR URSI SERIEM OO me EIUS Peel MA AREE 214 Seting BAP TLS Paramelete cane rebar eerte e Rl HR i na EO N rone Op nate 217 Nalidatinp the Server Cera cuoi UP EN OE RS EATEN INDE D MR e te iaatanmeaeds 220 WPA PSK Confip rationioicess ee i p bte ea E EA 221 Trusted Server Confipubatlofh esee tertie bab eia erp ERE Pneu eret e luam PESE PR a ente a 223 Root yo oo P 225 Downloading Root CA CertIicate toa PC ues uostri beoeie tr toe ee ti eiaa rho tine i 225 Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device tr re err Ee Pr ere bote etoeds 227 dr lk jc p em CI 229 Generating a User Certificate for the Mobile Devioe iso estet anaia 229 Installing a User Certificate on the Mobile Device WPA TLS Only eee 234 IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN Configuration Utility 238 Wireless Zero Config UBI scum cnn 240 Odyssey eI MT ETE 240 DUIIEHECO Hen s sere eed rere t Paco erro pb ac e piv e e obsides D Fete RERN nce afr eiTe Ric Oa Red 241 APPENDIX A KEY MAPS 243 lii pulli o Pete eee Rent dme adea EA 243 55 Key Alphanumeric KeymapsS sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 243 ANSI CE UK CV Dad ease nimono neo ea Dit PRU deanna adstat tentent e tbadeesiesats 243 5250 Key Mag Tor the 5 dK ey Keypad visi secet e e pr e Ern rre eH Pr EE US 248 32 Key N
107. IT Figure 3 11 Display Appearance There is very little change from general desktop PC Appearance options Select a scheme from the dropdown list and make changes to the parameters Tap the Save button to save any changes renaming the scheme if desired Tap the Delete button to delete schemes Tap the Apply button to apply the selected scheme to the MX7 Tap the OK box to exit or X to escape without making any changes Saved changes take effect immediately Backlight Display Properties OK x Background Appearance Backlight Save battery life by Q2 automatically turning off the backlight when not needed Turn off backlight when using E seconds External power and device is idle for more than 5 minutes d 2 35 rm AS Figure 3 12 Display Backlight When the backlight timer expires the screen backlight is dimmed not turned off Default values are 3 seconds for Battery and 2 minutes for External Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes or the X button to escape without making any changes Tap the button for Help The changes take effect immediately MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 97 Input Panel Access A Settings Control Panel Input Panel Select the current key data input method Factory Default Settings Input Method Keyboard Allow applications to Enabled cha
108. In the SPECIAL section the COLxROWX is the value data and the values given can be outside the normal key map limits GENERAL Section The first section is the GENERAL section This contains the keymap name all numerics as well as the number of rows and columns in the keymap and the algorithm for converting rows and columns to a data byte to go into the keymap table General MAPDESC Default MAPNAME 00000409 MAPCNT 4 MAPDESC Name of this map This is what appears in the popup menu in the keyboard control panel MAPNAME ID code of this map for use with the internal Win32 APIs which require a numeric value MAPCNT Gives the number of MAP sections and hence keymap tables in this source file MAPCOLS Number of columns in each keymap table This is defined by the hardware keyboard E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 256 Creating Custom Key Maps MAPROWS Number of rows in each keymap table This is defined by the hardware keyboard ALGOR Defines the algorithm for converting row column to internal scan code Current values are MX3X MX7 MXT7 is scancode column lt lt 3 row Note The field MAPDESC needs to be unique but MAPNAME does not SPECIAL Section MAP Section Special EYSHIFT COL8ROWO EYALT COL9ROWO AO The second section is the SPECIAL section which contains the row and column definitions for certain modifier keys which must be pr
109. K x Volume Sounds Volume Sounds gt Event Soft A Poa ORUM i Asterisk Close Program Enable sounds for V Events warnings system events t Critical Stop V Applications t Default Sea z Empty Recycle Bin Notifications alarms reminders amp CD s Key clicks Sancli sot O Loud Sound Preview Screen taps None sot OLoud cree Au Loub E3 Jo Volum gt 4 17 PM A 4 4 Jo volum B Lo 4 17 PM A B Figure 3 40 Volume amp Sounds Follow the instructions on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Good Scan and Bad Scan Sounds Good scan and bad scan sounds are stored in the Windows directory as SCANGOOD WAV and SCANBAD WAV These are unprotected WAV files and can be replaced by a WAV file of the user s choice By default a good scan sound on the mobile device is a single 2700 Hz beep and a bad scan sound is a double beep E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 126 SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs The Flash card located under the main battery pack is intended to protect the user from losing the LXE drivers and configuration information in the event of a cold boot Also on any boot the contents of any registered CAB files are automatically unpacked Access Files on the Flash Card Tap the My Device icon on the Desktop then tap the System icon
110. L ner Ea OaE E 146 API Calls et 147 Clearing Registry SeftngS RE 147 Reflash the Mobile Device ccsssesseccseccseeccseceeeneeeeseeueeseeseeseeeseeeeseeesenees 148 Preparatioti ss ses eorr nn aee E E i RR ER E E EEN EE E t e E NEO ERNEA 148 lolo E 148 CHAPTER 4 APPLOCK 149 Hip le a 149 Setup a c 3b o meter CD 149 Multis amp pplication Version seeriasse e m verte re OU Ar Fk bnc e POS Oro e ebd es Gioia 150 Sinole App ication VETS IOs KE EDEN ete A AVE ela ta ea Ee e INTE TU i PROS 150 Administration Mode eMe 151 Ena User MOUE fr 151 uio S 9 C 152 Multi Application Configuration ccccceceeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeees 153 AADplicauon Paneles cou cantent teet DU pelas tese aed oan ends dE IR DEIN URIS 153 End User Internet Explorer EUTE 5 5 e ta erret nnana RE bee ei Ree RA RN phe o Ur Rete MEER ERREUR RER 154 Security Patel insecto b ee EU te Dubai uen tt Diesen teen ip Moa Ota ac in bone E E aaa 155 PaSSWVOEG ento a te mordet prende a enu o Pietas hnc ies Seer Eton ditte er Font Vieh tun ni 156 Sirm 156 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Table of Contents End User Switching l 6 C DBlQUE ci ese ert Un ete te ipte etH sar t tU ME
111. Login Updated LAUNCH EXE persist settings Added new sections to Utilities Enabling GrabTime Configuring CapsLock Behavior Launch App Launch Command and Configuring IPv6 Added Summit Client panel to section titled Network and Dial Up Connections Chapter 4 AppLock Added Multi AppLock instruction Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Added instruction for Summit Client Utility software Odyssey Client Added instructions for setting No Security and WEP LEAP Instructions for LEAP with WPA are included in section for EAP LEAP Appendix A Keymaps Added section titled Creating Custom Keymaps Appendix B Technical Specifications Added technical specifications for the LXE CF Radio in PCMCIA Adapter card Added note about SE955 scanner replacing SE824 scanner where applicable Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 PII p o MERNCC 1 lucidi M cass a a E E OAE RAEE va can anovatne ca soeaigysnianoneasoes 2 Important Battery Informatio snein E E AEE 3 Whea to Use Tus GUld Esinaine EE 3 Document Conventions nanei en HERR Reti E E E 4 COMPONE E onna ne eC MM aM Seen RII M MIDI Rone rope 5 ONE e RT 5 Baf S 6 Scanner Imager ADSDlecuctadseet n ecu pes Eee evi epu ete debe tied be Cre Me eer a Perge ci SU c i 6 VO P irtand eg T
112. MX7 Reference Guide Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 Equipped Copyright August 2006 by LXE Inc All Rights Reserved E EQ MX7RG B Notices LXE Inc reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this document at any time without notice While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy LXE assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document or from the use of the information contained herein Further LXE Incorporated reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes to it from time to time without any obligation to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes Copyright This document is copyrighted All rights are reserved This document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from LXE Inc Copyright O 2006 by LXE Inc An EMS Technologies Company 125 Technology Parkway Norcross GA 30092 U S A 770 447 4224 Trademarks LXE is a registered trademark of LXE Inc Odyssey Client Copyright 2002 2006 Funk Software Inc All rights reserved Odyssey and Funk are registered trademarks of Funk Software Inc Summit Data Communications Inc Summit Data Communications the Summit logo and The Pinnacle of Performance are trademarks of Summit Data Commu
113. Misen peti laci isque d tS 73 Version Contro lesrooster AER eet e bam abe bu E R ERN Ee ERES put 73 lnudBn m 74 JANA CUIU 74 Folders Copied at Startup iesus eese ene seas ee so erhan enn naa sa usa nr EF A AR a as RP RR SA UMS DS 75 Poo Hio A TT ren tr 75 DMG ss ics ER cae ce eee aaa ates cere tn tears 76 My Device POSES C E 77 Start Menu Program Options T 78 Comin ALON EE 79 AcUye Sy iC senes E A A E A EO 79 anis E 79 Stam Stam PPP SIV Gh scott teomcetutos ttem tutte etie doce teta tutae E re toto bulutens 80 Coimiiand PIOBBE oo etui es UP ovk tA RUM e MM A NEPM I EISE UNITE ELE 80 Ho CRUS 81 Internet EXDIOIOE o iiitepuedtetieet ien Dern a rosca ctae teases irdoeeac sadantiatacanissadien no Ric Res a 81 Media Play Gi sis seen pere Ere espere rel ee Ed e ee rel P EU Eee e ar ebel Enn eee otv 81 Microsott WordPdd uc cette ti rece e Ems dus pace o tete puse M eats tiem testo uci av poc RP ADU asNEOoE 81 Odyssey Im EET 82 Radio Connie Biss eT 82 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Odyssey Clientes tente e E 82 Summit COTE M 83 r rs asic 83 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Client esses 83 TTANSCHBDED ventas c 84 Windows qucd ES 84 TASK DAE E 85 Adva
114. Name Company Address and telephone numbers Enable the Display owner identification checkbox if you want this information displayed each time the system powers on Select the Notes tab enter a note to see at power on Enable the display owner notes checkbox to see the note at power on Select the Network ID tab and enter the User Name Password and Domain Tap OK when finished or X to ignore any changes MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Software Setup 21 Set the Display Backlight Timer Note X Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this manual for information relating to the power states of the MX7 Select 4 Settings Control Panel Display Backlight tab Change the parameter values and tap OK to save the changes The first option affects the MX7 when it is running on battery power only The second option affects the MX7 when it is running on external power e g AC adapter powered vehicle or desktop cradle The default value for the battery power timer is 5 seconds The default value for the external power timer is never and the checkbox is blank The backlight will remain on all the time when both checkboxes are blank The color display backlight timer dims the backlight at the end of the specified time Set the MX7 Power Schemes Timers Note Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this guide for information relating to the power states of the MXT Select amp Settings
115. OG_PROCESSING not considered an error since the Internet value is not necessary to launch and lock the application Open failure The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG_ERROR file open has failed This could occur if the file is write protected If the file does not exist it is created Open registry failure If the Administration registry key does not exist the LOG_ERROR switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in the Administration key is not available Opened status file The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG_EX file has been opened successfully Out of memory for encrypted pwd Not enough memory to encrypt the password LOG_ERROR pRealTaskbarWndProc already set The taskbar control has already been installed LOG_EX Pwd cancelled or invalid remain in The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the LOG_EX user mode maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password was exceeded Read registry error hot key The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty This is LOG_ERROR not considered an error The keyboard hook uses an embedded default if the value is not set in the registry Read registry failure app name AppName registry value does not exist or is empty LOG_ERROR This constitutes a failure for switching into user mode Read registry failure Cmd Line AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty LOG_ERROR This is not considered an error since
116. OW4 open COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 open COLOROW7 open LP A E COLIROWO open COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 open COL1ROW4 open COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open COL2ROWO open COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 open COL2ROW3 open COL2ROW4 open COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open LP NN D I 2 COL3ROWO open COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 open COL3ROW3 open ct Q FE FF E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 276 Creating Custom Key Maps COL3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open LP E E P E COL4ROWO open COL4ROW1 open COL4ROW2 open COL4ROW3 open COL4ROW4 open COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 open LP A I E COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 open COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 open 1 al a A A E 2 E E COL6ROWO open COL6ROW1 open COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 open COL6ROW4 open COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 open COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 VK F23 COL7ROW3 VK F24 COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 open COL7ROW6 open COL7ROW7 open MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps Sample Output File HKEY CURRENT USERMKeyboard Layout Keymaps Default HKL 00000409 Head hex 0D 08 08 40 00 00 02 27 2F 07 0F 0A 40 48 50 58 Map0 hex N 1B 70 DF 71 74 76 38 87 51 39 89 54 55 34 4F 88 N 41 00 44 47 4A 31 4C 33 20 00 58 56 4E 30 25 09 N 78 53 27 46 48 4B 32 26 36 5A 08 43 42 4D BE 28 N 79 57 0D 52
117. Owner Properties E OK x Owner Properties oK ES Identification Notes Network ID Notes Network ID Identification Notes Network ID Mama Windows CE uses this information to gain access to network resources Company Enter the user name password and domain provided by your network administrator User Name j Address At power on Display owner notes Password Work phone Domain j Home phone At power on Display owner identification m zo 2 44 m AS 27 82 owner d Lo 2 16 am A S Figure 3 20 Owner Properties Enter the information and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 106 Settings Control Panel Options Password Access A Settings Control Panel Password Icon Set MX7 user access power up password properties Password and password settings are saved during a warm boot and a cold boot The screensaver password affects the Remote Desktop screensaver only Factory Default Settings Password Blank Enter at Power On Disabled Enter at Screen Saver Disabled Note Once a password is assigned each Settings option requires the password be entered before each Settings option can be accessed Password Properties Ea OK x Password Settings Password J Confirm password L1 Enable password protection at power on sword protection for
118. P MSOLIAD eceinti oper ech erroe bas xr erp E urere rho bep ino 188 PEAP AMSCEHAP Credentials oin tiare orti rt temen Perm URP a EE O AEREE EESE 188 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP w WPA TKIPD netter tentes 189 LEAP Credentials an RODEO PR RENE tes acces RO E OU LP M eH 189 Configure a Summit Profile with WPA PSK ite hid rre bets 190 PSK Enty POoDUDc iet HERE nce REESE aeree EEEO EREE a Ro o Meer Eo o EE LA ERE EIE 190 Odyssey Client Screens Seb nS iio eir ERU Ex Ehren Debo enda REEE AOE CHAR ee arieni 191 Odyssey Client Screens Commands e enontionmton mme ORTHO e REEHEG 192 Odyssey Client Screens TOOLS eder as enit bie he b RE eU b HE Le op Uus 193 Odyssey Client Screens Help a4 iiec e i eem a vi e db HH ERU 193 Punk Odyssey Client Settings Moenia eiit miri i id ve e ERES 194 Add Nerwork Wizard S6f66lli uo cu doibeiboe do te PE UTERE ed ree HS EQ DEP Erbe PEREA GTE 195 Set Bnoryption Mode to NOB aiii em er e ar aO EH guo Hera 195 Set B cryption Mode t6 WEP sonerii ttp pisce Ee ipe Opto veo d Paese a E eop EE YES Ee AVE EPOR END 196 Seting Statie WEP Key C ISESE F EOE 197 Funk Odyssey Client Settings Menu eie er es rur a P Pee EE EE EES 198 Add Network Wizard Sreco nix p HEURE BREF URDU RR r PF Ur these dr TIE QUERER eE bn p BERE REOR ENS 198 Sat Brcryption Mode 19 LEAD eiie om apo oni eto eta rte era 199 BAP LEAP Methods coeno ORDU RUBUS DA TU BR Ta UTOR n non dU ers 199 Creat
119. Password a Figure 4 4 Security Panel Multi Application Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode The default hotkey sequence is Shiftt Ctri A A 2 key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the application being locked does not use The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with Shift Alt and Ctrl text strings representing the shift state keys The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence The hotkey must be entered via the keypad Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel Also hotkeys entered via the SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes For example if the Ctrl key is pressed followed by A Ctrl A is entered in the text box If another key is pressed after a normal key press the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started A normal key is required for the hotk
120. Pin 9 power unavailable ssss 110 Pistol Grp Handle 4t 11 Place im Suspend Mode mets 18 Port and cables cce eene 7 Power key vacua ceive ee eae 41 Power key location sene 18 Power Mode Properties sese 108 Power MOGeS reor reme PER pe 44 Power Off SCHEMES M 21 Power Port 1 while asleep ssesse 110 Power Save miode auis ten eterne 239 Power Supply Battery Pack eese s Rec deseceet a 37 Prefix and SUTAR riccenn erine ereis 113 Pre loaded Files tme 72 Private key c condeitudbsn evite tes 27 PROCESSOR SPESA c coiere 35 PLOCESSOL TY PC iere bietet eder xor ure Se eipic EP 122 Programmable Keys eni ecrit 49 Prompt Command odere eb eret 80 Proprietary boot loaders iem 74 Protective Film it 23 Putting it all Together ssss 2 3 11 Q Quick Start Instructions sisese inire 9 MX7 Reference Guide 292 R Radio and Network Setup sss 24 Radio Config Utility rette 82 Radio ports cce to cate ete etg 37 Radio specifications CE 2 4 GHZ siae eais eer pide 282 Radio Specifications USB 2 4 GHz ner p pt es 282 REDO OBS ioter edi p ese xn 41 Recalibrati ti s i rn Rees 121 Reflash the Mobile Device sess 148 Reflash How To cccccccsssccssecessceessecsseeeesseensees 148 REGEDIT EXE esseseseeeneennnn 139 Regional settings defaults
121. ROW2 2 D COL2ROW3 G COL2ROW4 J COL2ROW5 2 1 COL2ROW6 2 L COL2ROW72 3 LP E D M P RE COL3ROWO COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 X COL3ROW3 2 V COL3ROW4 N COL3ROW5 2 0 COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 VK TAB LP PEN E M E COL4ROWO open COL4ROW1 S COL4ROW2 VK_DELETE COL4ROW3 F COL4ROW4 H COL4ROW5 K COL4ROW6 2 COL4ROW7 VK_DOWN COLSROW2 VK_MENU COL5ROW3 C COL5ROWA B COL5ROW5 2 M COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 VK_UP E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 272 Creating Custom Key Maps LP NE 2 E QE COL6ROWO open COL6ROW1 2 W COL6ROW2 VK RETURN COL6ROW3 R COL6ROW4 Y COL6ROW5 2 I COL6ROW6 2 5 COL6ROW7 2 P LP PE E M I P E E COLTROWO E COL7ROW1 VK_SHIFT COL7ROW2 VK_F3 COL7ROW3 VK_F4 COL7ROW4 7 COL7ROW5 KY_ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY BLUE COL7TROW7 VK CONTROL he name of this key doesn t matter he important part is the MAP value odes are defined in docs his is the map for keys with only SHIFT Map MAP MAP_ORANGE55 LP E E M E E COLOROWO KY PROG1O COLOROW1 VK F6 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK F7 COLOROW4 VK_F10 COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 open COLOROW7 CHANGE MAP_ VOLUME LP P E E M E E COL1ROWO SHIFT 1 COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COLIROW3 SHIFT 5 COL1ROW4 SHIFT 7 COL1ROW5 open COLIROW6 SHIFT 9 COL1ROW7 open 1 al a A A A M E COL2ZROWO SHIFT VK_BACKSLASH COL2ROW1 open COL2ZROW2 SHIFT VK_SEMICOLON COL2ROW3 SHIFT VK_APOSTROPHE COL2ROW4 VK_COMMA COL2RO
122. Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 199 Edit Network Wizard Encryption Method WEP Authenticate using 802 1X nm Keys will be generated automaticaly for data privacy Pre shared key WPA or WPA2 Passphrase 3 unmask GB uer var ma AB Figure 5 28 Set Encryption Mode to LEAP Set the Association Mode to Open Set the Encryption Method to WEP Enable the Authenticate using 802 1X checkbox Enable the Keys will checkbox Tap Next to continue WEP Authentication for LEAP The Funk Odyssey supplicant authenticates a user with the LEAP protocol Your system may have EAP LEAP and or LEAP in the method drop down list EAP LEAP protocol can be used for LEAP authentication Use the remove and add buttons to choose EAP LEAP authentication EAP LEAP does not use server side authentication so the Validate server box is dimmed Tap Next Figure 5 29 EAP LEAP Method E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 200 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Add Network Wizard Permit login using password Prompt for password Use the following password MM C unmask C Permit login using my certificate Li Permit login using my SIM card lay dots B z 10 36 aM A 6 Figure 5 30 Create Username and Password Method Enter a Username For the username Password tap the radio button for either Prompt for password or Use the following password Tap the OK button
123. SOUDS eerie em etre uc eo Red or eua HIR VADE AC URSUS MUSEI Pe E Re EU east e ORE Un 125 ActiveSync Connection Settings on a Windows PC meth dt detes 130 LXE TosinUtlts USt Prompt s eiii orbi ripe era tise nates DOR ober REDI PRAE ar RE rE EAE air 143 Entery Select Login Nate seca o namo di on ma pc OVER TO RICE RC 144 Odyssey Client SCPeben iret teet am a rh oT ER VF YOU ETE EGER WD OU Ea ates 144 Enter the Odyssey Chent Username Password 5 ricette tote opener pucr pe E on RE Ee pee na 145 Odyssey Client Password Screen Cancelled iiim Eat 145 Administrator Control Panels Multi Application sssssssseeeeeeeeneneneenene 150 Administrator Control Panels Single Application sse 150 Application Panel Mul Application 3 5 5 b ote rper eae e o m eb EE Ee 133 Security Panel Mult Applbtcatiafioci oer Pb acte vbx e Diu eret E nbus tun eR PO v bob dE Ed Hb E EUR 155 Status Panel Multi Applicatioti o riot irit estat topo REO on Hace em Ete viet a IE un 156 End User Multi Application Touch Panel 5 ith rh etie dete aee ed 158 ControD Pablo eine e tr bus E A T RE DR ERREUR EDEN R ERERE R KE E EE PR RE 160 Security Paneler nn otov n ipta e re pue OE Ey ep Chet 161 Status Panely srg terpapar tei tri ap anuli Eve ur erc eth te EISE IE 162 Summit Chen tality Ma tA Deseoren a ope Er E E E a rE O er Ea a epe PREMIER TREE 177 Main tab Enter Admit Password esis ipea edi EEUU DOSE Epp EEEE EEN 178 Summ
124. Screens Tools Import User Certificate See section titled User Certificates for instruction Certificate Enroller Use this option to request a certificate from a server See section titled Root Certificates for instruction SIM Card Manager Manage the PIN on the SIM card hardware if installed Help Odyssey Client Settings Commands Tools V Connect to Help Topics License Keys lt APNorth gt View Readme File Status About status Figure 5 20 Odyssey Client Screens Help Help Topics Odyssey local help License Keys Displays a text sequence that represents the Odyssey Client software license An option is available to enter a new license key View Readme Files Readme txt file is displayed About Displays Odyssey Client version number and software license information E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 194 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Wireless Security 4 It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of iud certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication Date Time will fail Set WEP Odyssey Client Odyssey Client Cites Commands Tools Help Configure Detailed Status Security Settings EAP FAST Settings Trusted Servers Disable Odyssey Exit Access point 00 A0 E8 45 42 C9 Packets in out 28124 Details Reconnect
125. System Status The System Status LED is located at the top left of the keypad above the Scan button When the LED is The Status is Comment Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery ds Or Blinking Red Power Fail Connect MX7 to external AC power then replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Steady Red Main Battery Tow Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Blinking Green Display Off No user intervention required No Color Good No user intervention required Scan Status The Scan Status LED is located below the MX7 keypad When the Scan Status LED is The Status is Steady Green Good Scan Steady Red Scan in Progress No Color Scanner Imager ready for use Alpha Mode 32 key Alph Key The Alpha Mode LED is located below the lt F4 gt key on the 32 key keypad LED functions outlined in previous sections titled System Status LED and Scanner LED are the same for the 32 key mobile device When the Alph LED is TheStatusis Steady Green Device is in Alpha character input mode No Color Device is in Numeric key input mode E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 52 The Keypads Standard Keys See Appendix A Key Maps The integrated scanner scans only when the Scan button is pressed or when the neat scan trigger is pressed on the optional trigger h
126. The device is now in end user mode Note AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications Attempting to open multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to administration mode E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 150 Setup a New Device Multi Application Version Access Start Settings Control Panel Administration icon A mobile device running the Multi Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated multiple application device Only the applications or features specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the user This version offers a user mode taskbar icon allowing the user to switch between user applications See section titled Multi Application Configuration for information and instruction Hot Key Filename System applock txt Ctr Shift A AG Level None fw Refresh Confirm Password Oriar 1 Icon z internet 7 Menu 7 Stan m R Key Ciri S w Delay 10 Level None SaveAs Clear 4 Clear Status e m r Figure 4 1 Administrator Control Panels Multi Application Single Application Version Access Start Settings Control Panel Administration icon A mobile device running the Single Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated single application device In other words only the application or feature specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator is av
127. The login prompt is displayed at system boot and when resuming from suspend MX7 focus remains on the login prompt until it is dismissed Nothing else can be done on the MX7 until the user responds to the login prompt Follow the instructions in the following section titled Installation to configure your MX7 to load the LXE Login Utility After the installation instructions have been executed the LXE Login Utility automatically loads after any warm or cold reset of the MX7 It is activated again on a resume from suspend mode Note fit is necessary to remove the LXE Login Utility LXE strongly recommends using the instructions in the section Uninstall the LXE Login Utility to stop the utility from running on the MXT Installation The LXE Login Utility CAB file must be renamed Follow the instructions below to rename the CAB Note File extensions must be enabled for viewing for the following procedure to work To insure extensions are enabled for viewing double tap My Device on the Desktop Select the View menu and the select Options Uncheck Hide file extensions Double tap My Device on the Desktop Double tap System Use the scroll bar to locate LXELogin LXE Tap and hold on LXELogin LXE until the right mouse click menu appears tog i m Select the Rename menu item The stylus cursor changes to the input cursor I and LXELogin LXE is highlighted Press the right arrow key to position the input cursor at the e
128. VK RBRACKET COL4ROW7 VK PRIOR COL5ROWO SHIFT4VK RBRACKET COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 VK_INSERT COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 SHIFT VK_BACKQUOTE COL5ROW5 SHIFT VK_HYPHEN COL5ROW6 VK_DELETE COL5ROW7 VK NEXT LP PN UE M M RE E COL6ROWO ACTION BACKLIGHT COL6ROW1 SHIFT 2 COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 SHIFT 4 COL6ROW4 SHIFT 6 COL6ROW5 SHIFT 8 COL6ROW6 SHIFT VK_LBRACKET COL6ROW7 SHIFT 0 1 al a A A A M EE COL7ROWO SHIFT 3 COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 open COL7ROW3 open COL7ROW4 CHANGE MAP_ CONTRAST COL7ROW5 VK_SLASH COL7ROW6 CHANGE MAP VOLUME COL7ROW7 open i he name of this key doesn t matter he important part is the MAP value odes are defined in docs his is the map for keys with 2ND and SHIFT Map ct Q ctc COLOROWO open COLOROW1 VK_F11 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F12 COLOROW4 open COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 8 COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN1 LP E E I QE COL1ROWO open COL1ROW1 9 COL1ROW2 ACTION SCAN3 COL1ROW3 open MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 265 COL1ROW4 open COL1ROW5 4 COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 ACTION SCAN2 LP E P M E E COL2ROWO open COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 open COL2ROW3 open COL2ROW4 open COL2ROW5 1 COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW72 3 LP NE E I E COL3ROWO open COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 open COL3ROW3 open COL3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 0 COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open 1 al a A A ETE TEE EFE rrF COL4ROWO open COL4ROW1 open COL4ROW2
129. W1 open COL2ROW2 open COL2ROW3 open COL2ROW4 SHIFT 9 COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open LP E M M P E E COL3ROWO VK SHIFT COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 open COL3ROW3 open COL3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 open LP Al A A EE COL4ROWO SHIFT 1 COL4ROW1 open COL4ROW2 open COL4ROW3 SHIFT 7 COL4ROW4 SHIFT 8 COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 VK_HOME 1 al a A A M COL5ROWO open COLSROW1 KY PROG2S COL5ROW2 open COL5ROW3 SHIFT 5 COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COLSROW7 VK_END LP PEE E M I EE COL6ROWO SHIFT 3 COL6ROW1 open COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 SHIFT 0 COL6ROW4 open MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 271 COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 open LP PE E M P E E COL7ROWO SHIFT 6 COL7ROW1 KY PROG3S COL7ROW2 VK F18 COL7ROW3 VK F19 COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 KY ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY BLUE COL7ROW7 open the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for unmodified keys on the MX7 55 key keypad MAP MAP NORMAL55 COLOROWO KY PROG1 COLOROW1 VK F1 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F2 COLOROW4 VK_F5 COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 8 COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN1 1 al A Al 2 A I E COL1ROWO0 Q COL1ROW1 9 COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 T COL1ROW4 U COL1ROW5 4 COLIROW6 O COL1ROW7 open LP A M Q2 COL2ROWO A COL2ROW1 open COL2
130. W5 open COL2ZROW6 SHIFT VK_ SLASH COL2ROW7 open LP PE NN M I E E COL3ROWO VK BACK COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 open COL3ROW3 open COL3ROW4 VK BACKQUOTE COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 SHIFT VK_TAB 1 al ae A A EE COLA4ROWO open COLA4ROW1 VK BACKSLASH COL4ROW2 VK PERIOD COL4ROW3 VK SEMICOLON COL4ROW4 VK_APOSTROPHE COL4ROW5 VK_PERIOD COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 VK_NEXT LP E E M E P E E COL5ROWO open COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 open ctc ic ict MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 273 COL5ROW3 open COLSROW4 SHIFT VK_BACKQUOTE COLSROW5 SHIFT VK_HYPHEN COL5ROW6 open COLSROW7 VK_PRIOR 1 al 2 Al A A M E COL6ROWO open COL6ROWI SHIFT 2 COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 SHIFT 4 COL6ROW4 SHIFT 6 COL6ROW5 SHIFT 8 COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 S d J 3 j c COL7ROWO SHIFT 3 COL7ROW1 VK COL7ROW2 VK_F8 COL7ROW3 VK_F9 COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 KY_ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY_BLUE COL7ROW7 VK_INSERT the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys on the MX7 55 key keypad modified with BLUE Map MAP MAP BLUE55 LP P ME E M P E E COLOROWO KY_PROG1B COLOROW1 VK_F11 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F12 COLOROW4 VK_F15 COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 open COLOROW7 CHANGE MAP_ BRITE LP E E M E E COL1ROWO open COL1ROW1 open COL1ROW2 open COL1ROW3 VK_EQUAL COL1ROW4 op
131. When new key maps or fonts are added to the registry they appear in the Key map dropdown list on the Keyboard Properties panel Only one font at a time can be selected The fonts affect the screen display These values do not affect virtual onscreen key taps Keymaps and Fonts Please contact your LXE representative about the availability of these fonts for your MX7 Descriptive name Font filename Notes Simplified Chinese simsun ttc These Asian fonts are ordered separately Traditional Chinese mingliu ttc and built in to the MX7 OS image Built in Japanese msgothic ttc fonts are added to registry entries and are Korean gulim ttc available immediately upon startup Thai Hebrew Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the default extended fonts See About Software Language for the name of any installed fonts When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the card System folder the font works for Asian web pages the font works with RFTerm the font does not work for Asian options in Regional Control Panel the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names the font does not work for third party NET applications and the font does not work for some third party MFC applications MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 101 Mappable Keys Access A Settings Co
132. X7 to your PC When the MX7 and the desktop ActiveSync applications are synchronized tap Explore on the ActiveSync menu on your PC to display the contents of the MX7 folders Then open the folder on your desktop computer containing the downloaded LXEbook Tap and drag the LXEbook to the My Documents folder on the MX7 When the file copy process is finished disconnect the MX7 from the synchronization equipment and close ActiveSync To view the LXEbook on the MX7 select Start Programs Microsoft File Viewers Microsoft PDF Viewer File Open Locate the LXEbook on the MX7 and open the file See Also Install LXEbooks on the LXE Manuals CD E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 24 Radio and Network Setup Radio and Network Setup Prerequisites e Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point e WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys Note lf the access point uses authentication protocol LEAP WEP etc your radio must use the same authentication keys Please contact your IS department for WEP or LEAP encryption keys before contacting LXE WEP and LEAP are authentication protocols used to encrypt data sent and received from the mobile device to the access point WEP is disabled by default Note The MX7 may use either the Funk Odyssey Client or the Summit Client Utility to configure the radio When the MX7 boots up for the first time and all programs are loaded the Wireless Information window may appear The radio is
133. X7 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed for operation and radio communication The files are loaded by LXE and stored in folders in the mobile device This section lists the contents of the folders and the general function of the files Files installed in each MX7 are specific to the intended function of the MX7 Files installed in LXE mobile devices that are configured for a wireless environment usually contain a radio specific driver the driver for the radio is specific to the manufacturer of the radio installed in the wireless host environment and are not interchangeable Software Load The software loaded on the MX7 computer consists of Windows CE 5 0 OS hardware specific OEM Adaptation Layer device drivers Internet Explorer for Windows CE browser and MX7 specific utilities The software supported by the MX7 is summarized below Operating System e Full Operating System License Includes all operating system components including Windows CE 5 0 kernel file system communications connectivity for remote APIs device drivers events and messaging graphics keyboard and touchscreen input window management and common controls Radio and Device Drivers Java Option e Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option when installed Terminal Emulation e RFTerm VT220 TN5250 TN3270 Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot LXE API Routines See Access
134. XE recommends the WiFi icon be visible in the taskbar at all times If the WiFi utility is closed accidentally you can either perform a Warm Reset to restart the WiFi utility or tap Start Programs Radio Config Utility E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 240 Wireless Zero Config Utility Wireless Zero Config Utility Odyssey Client The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating the application is available but not used for current radio connection To use the Wireless Zero Config Utility with the Odyssey Client the Odyssey Client must be deliberately disabled by the user Note LXE recommends using the Funk Odyssey client to configure the Odyssey Client radio Wireless Zero Config icon is not recommended for configuring the radio as it cannot be used to configure all supported security protocols To use Wireless Zero Config first open the Odyssey Client Utility Start the Odyssey client configuration by tapping the Odyssey Client icon on the desktop or in the taskbar at the bottom right corner of the screen Odyssey Client ETT Commands Tools Help Configure Detailed Status Security Settings EAP FAST Settings Trusted Servers Disable Odyssey Exit Access point 00 A0 E8 45 42 C9 Packets in out 28 24 E Tap the Disable Odyssey option on the Settings menu Odyssey is disabled immediately and the Wireless Zero Config utility b
135. a pen or pencil Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen Place the stylus into the stylus holder on the MX7 when the stylus is not in use Like using a mouse to left click icons on a laptop desktop computer screen using the stylus to tap icons on the MX7 display is the basic action that can Open applications Choose menu commands Select options in dialog boxes or drop down boxes Drag the slider in a scroll bar Select text by dragging the stylus across the text Place the cursor in a text box prior to typing in data or retrieving data using the integrated barcode scanner or an input output device connected to the serial port e A mouse right click is performed by holding the stylus down on the touchscreen A circle of dots appear and then the right click operation can be performed See note Note A right mouse click function must be programmed by the customer to accept a Tap and Hold function An application can choose to interpret this function as a right mouse click LXE does not support non LXE application programming Keypad Shortcuts Use keyboard shortcuts instead of the stylus Press Tab and an Arrow key to select a file Press Shift and an Arrow key to select several files Once you ve selected a file press Alt then press Enter to open its Properties dialog Press Del to delete a file To force the Start menu to display press Ctl and release press Blue and rele
136. a6 38 Audio COMME CON T 38 Audio SUPPO eae sas cosas case dacaticen E A E E ieee aaaneneees 39 SDESKBES Seieren ted areseqen edis E E lt a lohettnatehac EEE 39 bannis 39 VOICE seite tin etu both ERU Ep HEINE IEEE ES EVEN R RENE U LN TEE RE ERN dO ERR Ere ER NR SO e dE pu s 39 Scanner imager oue qM DLL 40 Physical COMTO 5 tc UOTE 41 juod Tm 41 Warm ROSO tmm 41 Cold RESGE me S 41 FSD O co enaA EENAA 42 Flash Card Installation Reboval inte eter t a T E e Lud 43 ee ck Cer ene ear Somn eerie normae cmo amne n AA gu eis 44 Th Display P a a E A Roasie 44 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Table of Contents TUG MIT os cis wb P 45 cy Me 45 OTE Mad RE E T iin cane iin alae tienen ain emi O a eae 45 i 3 er 46 Using the 55 Key ANSI CE Keypad esito teo cx casseeeaidoanieianoncseeavaoniteaavsacedaasgaacancsates 47 Using the 32 K ey NumernicsAlpha Keypad oce tor P e Rt E ERN E MEE Re MU UR 48 Mappable Didr ond Keys ter ped te Ete S bee E res etre Ebo IUEUPX UE TUE ra ERE ERR 49 39 qd pL EET 49 BD Key Keypad uccisi Re asit ir RE e epe A E fe Ded E be ERE or Ite dese 50 EED Wat CAC Ons E R 51 System StI S EN 51 hindi EIE 51 Alpha Mods 32 Eey ATIphs ey Jenniina s Ferre iau idee tb Rechner Leste a
137. adio REJ Trani Ser ovest arte hv REPRE ASVERH DR EG oo E ED RE nas 131 nuu ER 131 js dle 131 Diston eme LET 132 Serial CODI EOS cse tedonc iners o ibi Ire ten Ine PER Id ate detent p OPE eieso etal 132 USB Since M 132 Radio COnngctDn cu o oc be te ru sone ciae tuer pu RTE E A se eas ded in ERU ecu A US E beRS UNE u de 132 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connectloti ote tse DR ORI RARE RARI CANCER aa 132 Activesyne Troubleshoofing renererien ar a etre rte i Feri eper vel Feo eb ave fads edd eda 133 OUNTO G consu Up REM MEME E E 135 LAUNCH BCG e 135 REGEDIT IE XE e satesstensuade lapse te seebadet opetestevavsade psteia Deep veadet cpeinat epuvbdde lepine Pease nw eae 139 BEGUOAD E du m 139 WARNMBOOTIEXE2ettinctott ee Manet ettet ea misdt tbc te ta dane RR 139 WAVPLAY EXE sa ttti epe ee reiutetel be pete niche Ei Obere nhe epp DER botes 139 Enabling Grab VIS eI M 140 Contouring Caps lock Behavior vcs oos p e eT de IRI RPR HON rA ds ences Rec RE 140 Con unne IPVO eiie ete oni toot te eni ete I EIS to RHEIN EEN 140 Launch Appz Launch Command acne rt b e EE FEE nU PIED Ro ena p RE E Rund 141 Bron mss UN 141 COLDBOO TEX qun ER 141 Ataca EA Eccesso EI 141 LXEJLopim ly n te eeu tes etos hehe tst tm E E S 142 inb S 142 Usine the Ulit STET 143 Uninstall the EXE ostii VUY s 01 2ssanscaes bd oct oti REE
138. adle e U bracket mounting e RAM ball cylinder mounting Before installation begins verify you have the applicable vehicle mounting bracket assembly components necessary for your mount type as shown in the section titled Assembly Components Do not slide the MX7 into the passive cradle until the cradle is securely fastened to the vehicle E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 62 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle E Cradle Assembly Components Note Bolts washers and wrench needed when attaching the mobile device to the vehicle are not supplied by LXE U Bracket Figure 2 11 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle and U Bracket U Bracket Footprint il Not To Scale Figure 2 12 U Bracket Mounting Footprint Note LXE does not supply the bolts or washers needed when mounting the cradle assembly to the vehicle chassis LXE recommends using bolts with a maximum 10 32 0 3125 diameter MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle RAM Ball and Cylinder Figure 2 13 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle RAM Ball Assembly Figure 2 14 RAM Bracket Components Mount the cradle U bracket to the upper RAM ball assembly with the bolts washers and nuts supplied by LXE e Q i Qty 4 Hex Cap 74 20 x bolts Qty 4 flat washer Qty 4 74 20 nylon insert lock nuts E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 64 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle E RAM Assembly Footprint Not To Scale Figur
139. ailable to the user See section titled Single Application Configuration for information and instruction View Level None Refresh Ctri Shift A Password Confirm Password Application Startup Delay 10 seconds Log Save As Level E v iis Clear Status a i Lj Figure 4 2 Administrator Control Panels Single Application MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Administration Mode 151 Administration Mode Administration mode gives full access to the mobile device hardware and software configuration options The administrator must enter a valid password when a password has already been assigned before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed The administrator can configure the following options 1 Create change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access 2 Create change the password for administrator access 3 Assign the name of the application or applications to lock 4 Select the command line of the application or applications to lock In addition to these configuration options the administrator can view and manage the status logs of AppLock sessions Administrator default values for this device Administrator Hotkey 55 key Shift Ctrl A 32 key Requires Alpha Mode Password none Application path and name none Application command line none End User Mode End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or ap
140. ame This is for the outer or Phase 1 authentication Enter the correct outer authentication this could be the Phase 2 authentication as well Tap Next to continue Previous to return to the previous screen or Cancel to ignore changes made to this screen E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 208 MX7 Reference Guide Funk Odyssey Client Configuration you and order the inner EAP methods EAP GenericTokenCard Previous Next Figure 5 44 Choose Correct Version of PEAP Add Network Wizard Credentials to use with EAP FAST or EAP PEAP with inner EAP GenericTokenCard My password Choose correct credential configuration Next Cancel Figure 5 45 EAP PEAP Credential Choice By choosing EAP PEAP another configuration screen appears to chose the correct version of For PEAP GTC use the Add Remove buttons to choose EAP GenericTokenCard To be prompted for the token tap the Prompt for token information radio button E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 209 Add Network Wizard Username frsauser Password Permit login using password Prompt for password Use the following password E unmask C Permit login using my certificate ia Permit login using my SIM card Previous Next Cancel Figure 5 46 Prompt for Password Enter a Username For the username Password tap the radio button for Prompt for password or
141. andle Enter The Enter key is used to confirm a forms entry or to transmit information How it e is used is determined by the application running on the mobile device Diamo d The Diamond key s can be programmed to duplicate a single keypress as defined by Windows CE with the exception of the Shift Alt and Ctrl Ctl keys Numeric The number keys are used to add numbers to data entry fields Alpha The alpha keys are used to add letters and characters to data entry fields The Spc key adds a space to the line of data on the display This function is similar Space to a regular keyboard s Spacebar Note that the Spc key only stays active for one keystroke Function Keys Sticky Keys The Sticky Key feature allows the user to activate multi keypress combinations with one finger Ctl Ctrl Control key e e A Control sticky keypress stays active until the Control key is pressed again The Control key enables the control functions of the keypad This function is similar to a regular keyboard s Control key Each time you need to use a Control function you need to press the Ctl Ctrl key before pressing the desired key Alt Alternate key D An Alt sticky keypress stays active until the Alt key is pressed again The Alt key enables the alternate functions of the keypad This function is similar to a regular keyboard s Alt key Each time you need to use an alternate function you need to press the Alt key bef
142. aps key sequence again The CapsLock key sequence is Blue key then the lt Tab gt key S5 Key Keypad e No CapsLock AND No Shift keypress result is a lowercase letter e CapsLock OR Shift result is an uppercase letter e CapsLock AND Shift keypress result is a lowercase letter Visual Cue A Capital A is displayed in the taskbar when the device is in CapsLock mode or the Caps Key has been pressed and the next key to be capitalized has not been pressed 32 Key Keypad Example 2 Bor Not 2B To put the number 2 in a text entry field Tap the 2 key once To put a lowercase b in a text field Tap the lt Alph gt key then tap the 2 key twice To put an uppercase B in a text field Tap the lt Alph gt key tap the lt Shft gt key or the lt CapsLock gt key then tap the lt 2 gt key twice To enter a string of letters in a text field tap the lt Alph gt key to toggle it On It remains active until it is tapped again and toggled off To enter a string of numbers in a text field make sure the lt Alph gt key is toggled off MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Touchscreen 55 Touchscreen Figure 2 9 Touchscreen The touchscreen display is an active color LCD unit capable of supporting VGA graphics modes Display size is 240 x 320 pixels in portrait orientation The covering is designed to resist stains The touchscreen allows signature capture and touch input A pen stylus is included The touch
143. apter 5 Wireless Network Configuration E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 28 Entering Data Entering Data You can enter data into the MX7 through several different methods The Scanner aperture provides barcode data entry the I O port is used to input output data and the keypad provides manual entry Mobile devices with a touchscreen use a stylus to input data the I O port and or the keypad An input panel virtual keyboard is available in applications that expect keyed input Using the Keypad The keypad is used to manually input data that is not collected otherwise Almost any function that a full sized computer keyboard can provide is duplicated on the MX7 keypads but it may take a few more keystrokes to accomplish a keyed task Please refer to Appendix A Key Maps for instruction on the specific keypresses to access all keypad functions Almost every key has two or three different functions The primary alpha or numeric character is printed on the key The Orange or Blue keys are pressed when you want to use a sticky key function For example when you press a Blue or Orange key the sticky key then press the key that has the desired second function key the second function key is the active key The specific sticky character is printed above the corresponding key in either Orange or Blue Using the Input Panel or Virtual Keyboard The virtual keyboard 1s always available when needed e g text field inpu
144. ard keys Titctlons isc rrr idee Rs 52 Start Menu ShitdOwit s eerie teie oceani edat 76 Start Menu described 5 2 nennen 78 Static Screen protector u d eterni 55 Static WEP K ys ete reete ee 197 Status Single User AppLock isses 162 Status Panel ADpLOClk ie A eairesarer pt ee br esed 156 Status tab Suit sc esc o Aretes eee 180 Stereo and mono settings for headsets 102 Stop Bits oai e e a k 110 Storage Temperature MA enoe aeee E ee e MEI 281 E EQ MX7RG B Index USAC to DG cinco nien ceret ds 281 Stored Certificates sc oii merenti 92 Stonng PC Cards aiite Rn eet 43 Strip Leading Strip Trailing 113 Jd 19 and data entry ten deni ceteris 29 Stylus pressute caisses eiie 55 Stylus sensitivity essen 121 Stylus HOW 10 a eo ro rer eR RE 19 S tik and Premios o eit nete 113 Summit LEAP without WPA Authentication 187 NO Security neresini i niens 185 PEAP MSCHAP Authentication 188 rq T tees 24 WEP Key iniieeeeeitecsitn eri sues irren cepe ete fopra des 186 WPA LEAP Authentication ssssss 189 WPA PSK Authentication 190 Sutimit Client ecouter tt He rh 83 Summit Client configuration sss 176 Summit Client Utility llorar 176 Suspend and the LXE Login Utility sss 143 Suspend DUtton 4 a n
145. ase then press Esc the Alt key A stylus replacement kit containing 10 stylus can be ordered from LXE See the section titled Accessories for the stylus replacement kit part number E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 20 Software Setup Software Setup Touchscreen Calibration Note The first time it is used the MX7 automatically runs the touchscreen calibration program If the MX7 is not responding properly to stylus touch taps the touchscreen may need to be recalibrated To recalibrate the screen tap the Dd Settings Control Panel Stylus Calibration tab Tap the Recalibrate button Follow the instructions on the screen and press the Enter key to save the new calibration settings or press lt Esc gt to cancel or quit Set Time Zone Optional Note The first time it is used or the device returns from a Cold Reset the MX7 resets Date and Time to the factory default values To set the Time Zone tap the Did Settings Control Panel Date Time icon Select the physical time zone Enable the checkbox next to Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving if applicable Adjust the time and calendar date and tap Apply Tap OK when you are finished or X to ignore any changes Enter Owner Information Optional Use the virtual keyboard or keys on the keypad to enter the following data To set Owner information tap the ay Settings Control Panel Owner icon Select the Identification tab and enter
146. ater transmission through an RS 232 or USB port The mobile device is vertically oriented and features backlighting for the display The touch screen display supports graphic features and Windows icons that the Windows CE 5 0 operating system supports Keypads are available in 55 key alphanumeric and 32 key numeric alpha versions Also available is an IBM 5250 55 key keypad overlay This device is a Windows CE 5 0 compatible computer that can be scaled from a limited function batch computer to an integrated RF scanning computer A trigger handle is available as an accessory The attached stylus is used to assist in entering data and configuring the mobile device Protective film for the touchscreen is available as an accessory The MX7 is powered by a 2200 mAh Lithium Ion main battery pack and an internal NiCd backup battery Important If the mobile device has AppLock installed please refer to Chapter 4 AppLock for setup and processing information Wireless configuration and security parameters are described in detail in Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide Features New features affect user interaction and internal operation of the MX7 Overview The appropriate radio utililty for your device configuration has been pre installed by LXE The desktop will display an Odyssey Client Utility 1con or it will display a Summit Client Utility icon for 802 11 config
147. audio cable which attaches to the MX7 Use the control panel option Mixer to set up mono or stereo headphones The Summit Client supports mono only To Headset Quick Connect To MX7 Cable Figure 1 16 Audio Cable and Headset Connector A Squeeze the clips on the connector cable to open the catches in the connector assembly Firmly press Connector A into the connector at the base of the MX7 Release the clips in the connector cable Test the connection for stability before connecting the B connector Connector B Align Connector B and the headset quick connect cable end Firmly push the cable ends together until they click and lock in place MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Hardware Setup 17 Adjust Microphone and Secure the Cable Do not twist the microphone boom when adjusting the microphone The microphone should be adjusted to be about two finger widths from your mouth Make sure the microphone is pointed at your mouth Note the small Talk label near the mouthpiece Make sure the Talk label is in front of your mouth The microphone cable can be routed over or under clothing Under Clothing e Leave the cable exposed only at the top of the collar e Be sure to leave a small loop of cable to allow movement of your head Over Clothing e Use clothing clips to hold the cable close to your body e Tuck the cable under the belt but leave a small loop where it goes under the belt e Do not wear the cable on t
148. azardous situation which if not avoided will result in A death or serious injury MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Components Components Front E EQ MX7RG B D EGO b So DO D Front 55 Key Front 32 Key Figure 1 1 Front of MX7 O 00 ND tA FP U Nel Scanner Aperture Speaker System Status LED Scan Button Orange Key Sticky Key Blue Key Sticky Key Scan Status LED Cable Port On Off Button Alpha Lock LED Diamond Number Keys MX7 Reference Guide 6 Components Back Figure 1 2 Back 1 Scanner Aperture 4 Main Battery 2 Stylus and Stylus Pocket 5 Battery Fastener 3 Trigger Handle Attach Points 6 Cable Port Scanner Imager Aperture Figure 1 3 Scanner Aperture Note The Imager has clear plastic protecting the imager engine The Scanner has red plastic protecting the scanner engine The No Scanner option has an opaque window protecting the MX7 internal components MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Components 7 Figure 1 4 I O Port and Cables I O Port and Cables Cable Multipurpose RS 232 and Power MX7A055MULTICBLDA9F gt Cable Multipurpose USB and Power MX7A052MULTICBLUSB MX7A060ADPTCBLVOICE Adapter RS 232 PC port to D9 male Adapter Cable Audio E MX7A058ADPTCBLPER Note There is no IR port on the MX7 Tethered scanners are not supported on the MXT E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 8 Components
149. bleshoo UNE tedster omer DU T 106 PCG OMNES oro ME 107 lj 108 Regional SetUnps uscita HR TREIBEN AEN OO O EISE RARE aaa 109 Remoye PrO Gram S s adire pota pbera Torres ac Earn ace epe ERN EE IEOR TERENE pedea des 109 SCANNED ERE 110 Main P 111 CONDI TS3D icis la ic Lett fen rt error re e alis duas e tutes datu enar elsi Er AUC tere 112 Barcode Advanced e Protx SUEDE uices e Ehre enana i eiae a Meiers 113 St p Lesdine Stip Trailing Caracteres exi tern exitus ute E E Ust DNA 113 Pre tie SUE ioo ete HO N e ote ae has vdais sees lupa TE d ERE oed MeD ads 113 Interaction between Strip Leading Trailing and Prefix Suffix Settings sss 114 Barcode Advanced Cir Char Mapping seseris ase ree ilr P Ee TET ITS bcncbicP dme 115 Barcode Advanced Scancoda Enable teet tete voit eese Eee E EE 117 Barcode Advanced Code ID oot roter rte eno Ea aE deca a ROT ta ad En che das 118 Ne Code me 118 AIM Code UD wei 25 ER 118 Symbol Code ID eter bet teet petet eI OVES AERE TE TAE 118 Sire Een Hipp OO O 119 Strip Identifiers from E AN 128 Barcodes oe n Trier ee toi eb vo ebore RAUS REP dS 119 Adding Codes to the Match List for EAN128 Barcodes sssssssseeeeeees 120 iurc 121 bible 121 AH DFAB ORIG Gesehen odete to eter
150. card The system optimizes for the amount of SDRAM available The operating system executes out of RAM Internal flash is used for boot loader code and system low level diagnostics code Bootloader code is validated at system startup The UUID required by CE 5 0 is stored in the boot flash A second copy of the bootloader code is stored on the internal SD Flash drive so that if a damaged bootloader is detected it may be re flashed correctly Internal SD Memory Card The MX7 has one SD card interface for storage of operating system and program code as well as persistent storage The SD slot is accessible from the battery compartment and ships with an LXE qualified 128MB SD Flash card The internal SD flash card supports a FAT file system via a special device driver and appears to the OS as a folder This allows the contents to be manipulated via the standard Windows CE interface Operating system files are hidden on this drive with a terminal unique identifier in the internal flash to prevent them being accidentally erased by a user In addition the registry hive files are stored on this device At least 32MB of Flash is available for customer use Video Subsystem The touchscreen is a 3 5 8 9 cm diagonal viewing area 4 VGA 320 by 240 pixel TFT Reflective Active Color LCD Backlighting is available and can be turned on and off with key sequences The turn off timing is configured through the Dd Settings Control Panel Display
151. command line information is not necessary to launch and lock the application Read registry failure Internet The Internet registry entry is missing or empty This is LOG_ERROR E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 170 Message Registering Backdoor MSG Explanation and or corrective action The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both AppLock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization AppLock Error Messages Level LOG PROCESSING Registering Hotkey MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both Applock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization LOG PROCESSING Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when entering user mode is the AppName is missing This user mode entry is attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the administrator has closed the application being locked or has changed the application name or command line LOG ERROR Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when switching into user mode This is because the administrator can change the settings during administration mode The read of the registry failed which means the Administration key was not found or the AppName value was missing or empty LOG ERROR Registry read failure The registry read failed The registry information read when
152. ction for stability before connecting the B or C connector Connector B Firmly push the power cable connector pin into connector B until you hear a slight click Plug the 3 prong cable into an AC wall outlet Connector C Align the RS 232 serial cable end carefully to an appropriate serial port on a desktop laptop computer for ActiveSync communication Press the ends together and hand tighten the screws on either side of the serial cable until the MX7 is securely connected to the serial device E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 16 Hardware Setup Connecting to a Printer Interface Cable To MX7 To Printer Cable Figure 1 15 Connect to a Printer Interface Cable Connector A Squeeze the clips on the connector cable to open the catches in the connector assembly Firmly press Connector A into the connector at the base of the MX7 Release the clips in the connector cable Test the connection for stability before connecting the B or C connector Connector B Align the RS 232 serial cable end carefully to the serial port on the cable from the printer Press the ends together and hand tighten the screws on either side of the serial cable until it is securely connected to the printer cable Connecting the Audio Cable and a Headset See section titled Set the Audio Speaker Volume Note The audio option draws power from the main battery The headset consists of an earpiece a microphone and an attached cable The headset attaches to the
153. d 20 c Summit radio support HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist Summit Radio FileName System SUMMIT CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS SDCCF10G DLL Order dword 2 PCMCIA dword 1 c Odyssey support HKEY LOCAL MACHINESSOFTWAREWLXEVPersist Odyssey FileName System ODYSSEY CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS odysseyIMCE DLL Order dword 0E Delay dword 0 HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist Odyssey license FileName System LXECR1A CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS odyssey txt Order dword 0D Delay dword 0 HKEY LOCAL MACHINESSOFTWAREWL XEVPersist Odyssey install FileName System WL XElogin CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS lxelogin exe Order dword 05 Delay dword 0 HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist Odyssey login FileName Windows LXElogin exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 0F Delay dword 0 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 138 Utilities c RFTerm support HKEY LOCAL MACHINESSOFTWAREWLXEVersistL XE TE FileName System RFTERM CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS LXE RFTERM EXE Order dword 11 run the app after it has loaded and radio is ready HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist RFTERM FileName WINDOWS LXE RFTERM EXE Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 40 Delay dword 1 c RFID support HKEY LOCAL
154. d Dial Set network driver properties and network access properties Up Options Owner Set the mobile device owner details name phone etc Enter notes Enable disable Owner display parameters Enter Network ID for the device user name password domain Password Set MX7 access password properties for signon and or screen saver E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 88 Settings Control Panel Options Option Function PC Connection Control the connection between the MX7 and a local desktop or laptop computer Power Set Power scheme properties Review device status and properties Regional Settings Set appearance of numbers currency time and date based on country region and language settings Remove Programs Remove user installed programs in their entirety Note Programs listed in this location are deleted upon warm and cold boot processes Scanner Set scanner key wedge internal scanner port and good scan vibration options Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for COMI port Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel System Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Enter device name and description Review copyright notices Terminal Server Client Licenses Select a server client license from a drop down list Not available at this release Volume and Sounds
155. d in as Administrator see Administrator Mode use the Config tab to manage profiles MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Summit Client Configuration 179 Buttons Button Function Rename Assigns a new unique name If the new name is not unique an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed Delete Deletes the profile The current active profile cannot be deleted and an error message is displayed if a delete is attempted New Creates a new profile with the default settings see Config Parameters and prompts for a unique name If the name is not unique an error message is displayed and the new profile is not created Commit Saves the profile settings made on this screen Settings are saved in the profile Credentials Allows entry of a username and password certificate names and other information required to authenticate with the access point The information required depends on the EAP type WEP PSK Allows entry of WEP keys or pass phrase as required by the type of encryption Keys Important The settings for Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen Please refer to Wireless Security later in this Summit Client Utility section to determine the proper settings for the security type implemented on the wireless LAN Config Parameters Parameter Default Explanation Config Default A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characte
156. d key OK Encrypt password process successful LOG EX Encrypt failure The password encryption failed LOG ERROR Encrypt gen key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt generate key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt get user key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt get user key ok Encrypt password process successful LOG EX Encrypt hash data failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt hash data from pwd OK Encrypt password process successful LOG EX Encrypt length failure Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypt out of memory for key Unable to encrypt password LOG ERROR Encrypted data OK The password has been successfully encrypted LOG_EX Enter AppLockEnumWindows In order for AppLock to control the application being LOG_EX locked so it can prevent the application from exiting AppLock launches the application and has to wait until it has created and initialized its main window This message is logged when the function that waits for the application initialization is entered Enter DecryptPwd Entering the password decryption process LOG_PROCESSING Enter EncryptPwd Entering the password encryption processing LOG_PROCESSING Enter FullScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen mode In LOG PROCESSING full screen mode the taskbar is hidden and disabled MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B AppLock Error Messages Message Enter GetAppInfo Ex
157. d next to the Diamond 2 gt key on the 32 key keypad When a main battery pack is inserted in the MX7 for the first time the Power key must be pressed Quickly tapping the Power key places the MX7 immediately in Suspend mode Quickly tapping the Power key again pressing any key pressing the trigger on the trigger handle or tapping the touchscreen immediately returns the MX7 from Suspend The System LED blinks green when the video display 1s Off Note The unit will suspend on AC power and when connected through ActiveSync Remember to set the suspend timers before using ActiveSync When the Windows CE desktop is displayed or an application begins the power up or reboot sequence is complete If you have previously saved your settings they will be restored on reboot Application and control panel applet changes are saved when OK is tapped on an application applet The Process The MX7 reloads the operating system upon every warm boot or cold boot Anything not saved or preserved to the registry is lost In warm boot the OS and the CAB files are reloaded from the internal SD card and the preserved registry is also reloaded During cold boot the system behavior 1s identical to warm boot with the addition that the registry is reloaded with factory defaults Hold down the Power key for 15 seconds until the display blanks then release the key A warm reset does not affect the operating system but data in SDRAM is lost Data saved
158. d screen without connecting to the cabled device If the MX7 is connected to a PC by a cable disconnect the cable from the MX7 and reconnect it again Check that the correct connection is selected Serial or USB Client if this is the initial ActiveSync installation See Also Cold Boot and Loss of Host Reconnection ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect but it cannot identify it One or more control lines are not connected This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indicate a bad serial port Try the following to re establish the connection On the Host desktop or laptop PC 1 Open ActiveSync 2 Select File Connection Settings and disable Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port 3 Click OK 4 Select File Connection Settings and enable Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port On the MX7 Tap Start Programs Communication Connect to establish an ActiveSync connection to the host ActiveSync indicator on the host disc in the toolbar tray turns green and spins as soon as you connec the cable before tapping the Connect icon One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indicate a bad serial port ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins but connection never occurs Baud rate of connection is not suppo
159. ded ACTION code special function key valid codes listed below CHANGE mapname for modifier keys change keymaps to mapname as specified above OPEN an unused key position does nothing when pressed Valid ACTION codes are as follows SCANI Scan key 1 left side of screen on mobile device SCAN2 Scan key 2 right side of screen on mobile device SCAN3 Handle trigger button unused on mobile device but specified POWER power button BACKLIGHT backlight on off function Note that specifying the power button in a different location will affect suspend resume functions The 15 second hold to force reboot function is controlled by hardware and will only work with the default power button E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 258 Creating Custom Key Maps Keycomp Error Messages Most error messages will specify the line within the keymap source file where the error occurred Duplicate key A COLxROWX code was found in a MAP table but that COL ROW already has a value assigned GENERAL section must come before MAP The GENERAL section must come first or at least before any MAP sections The GENERAL section defines parameters which are needed to process Maps Header line missing close bracket The section header line must have square brackets before and after the section name Header line missing open bracket The section header line must have square brackets before and after the section name I
160. default values 125 Volume control tritt 39 Vol rie MIX6Gt ie i ect beoe e tertius 102 W Wake the device from Suspend 76 Warm RESE csc sciesiscebistecsgecatucicsscncveeassscstavedaneavees 41 Warmboot uauosueico mese eie eere 31 WARMBOOT EXE ccccccesseceeseeseeseeteeneeeees 41 139 Warning LOW Battery i e rettet ee ee ete eet tee 57 Warnings and Labels Laser Scanfiet iovis tro de 30 WAVPLAY EXE eeeeeeeeeneeeen 139 b 110 MX7 Reference Guide Wel StS icc te tie cutie nats eee tenent iet ias 279 When to use this guide ssssssssss 3 WA 160155 dust RR RR UR HERHERN ERR 82 238 Windows CE on line Help 71 139 Windows EXplover ss fcc rere nete 84 Windows OS versions issver as 122 Wireless LAN Configuration Utility 238 Wireless Network Configuration 175 Wireless Security Summit Cents eet be 185 Wireless Zero Config Utility 82 83 Odyssey Client iiec 240 Summit Radio ssseseeeee 176 241 WLAN Networks esee 24 WEAN PrO MISS osiossa e oisinn 24 WordPad 2 certet enseri ane 81 Writing new bootloader ssss 148 WZE 1601 iiiter 82 83 176 240 241 E EQ MX7RG B
161. device keymap and then switched back when they are finished using the customized keys This custom key map file can be made to re define the system return code for each of the 55 key keypad keys key press or key press combinations All keys except the power key can be re mapped IMPORTANT The keycomp utility included with the MX7 SDK is not the same as the one included with the MX3X SDK This one only generates maps for the MX7 Custom keymaps for the mobile device are created on a desktop PC using the command line compiler KEYCOMP EXE Keycomp processes the input keymap source file and outputs a registry text file Note Each VK_code has a numeric value for example VK_F20 hex 83 these are documented in the SDK include file WINUSER H from Microsoft The numeric value is what needs to go into the registry Whether the value is hex or decimal depends on the registry editor being used the one in the mobile device can use either hex or decimal but the desktop one used over ActiveSync that a developer may use requires hex Example KEYCOMP DEFAULT KEY writes KEYCOMP REG to local directory Input File gt Compiler gt Text File DEFAULT KEY KEYCOMP EXE KEYCOMP REG This output file should be renamed to xxx REG the suffix must remain REG then copied to the mobile device over ActiveSync Once the file is loaded on the mobile device double tap the file from the Windows CE Explorer deskt
162. e E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 250 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad E To Get This MX7 Key Press These Keys and Then Press This Key Function Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha Down Arrow BEA Down Arrow Left Arrow Duc woe Tl Down Arrow End qp Pp Arrow Page Down ox 0 0 0 d Down Arrow F1 A A SENE F1 F2 re ee ee ee ee F2 F3 jc F3 F4 Lo P j F4 F5 Ooo T T S eee F5 F6 L x P j F1 F7 e a F2 F8 Lo x P S F3 F9 LE Jo ae p T o 7 F4 F10 Lowe F5 Fn L3 qo p lg d F1 F12 Px P j F2 F13 Px P CT F3 F14 Ix P j F4 F15 ede qe E e o 3 F5 F16 T P ef F1 F17 OT WC e geal F2 F18 L T P X F3 F19 Lo Po X Ed F20 ee ee F5 F21 L x P Jsf Bl F22 L x P xj i F23 NENNEN 2 MN F3 F24 L x P xj F4 a re ee ee ee e 2 b L P lj 22 pum f X 333 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad To Get This MX7 Key Function E EQ MX7RG B ciajoj zioliujolj zi zi irixi ic i rio imim joj oj o iN x isi c j o 5 o ojo 5 3 x xvo Press These Keys and Then Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha He Press This Key 4 44 444 5 55 555 6 66 666 7 77 777 7777 8 88 888 9 99 999 9999 2 22 222 3 33 333 4 44 444 5 55 555 6 66 666 7 77 777 7777 8 88 MX7 Reference Guide 252 32 Key Numeric Alpha Keypad E To Get This MX7 Key Press These Keys and
163. e Command Command line of the application being locked LOG PROCESSING line App Application name gt Name of the application being locked LOG PROCESSING dwProcessID lt gt Device ID of the application being locked LOG EX Encrypt exported key len lt gt Size of encrypt export key LOG EX Encrypt password length lt gt The length of the encrypted password LOG EX Encrypted data len lt gt Length of the encrypted password LOG EX hProcess lt gt Handle of the application being locked LOG EX Key pressed lt gt A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey LOG EX processing SEELELA RE TOES EROR The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG_EX file has been opened successfully Address of keyboard hook AppLock found the kbdhook dll but was unable to get LOG_ERROR procedure failure the address of the initialization procedure For some reason the dll is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting AppLock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Address of keyboard hook AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the LOG EX procedure OK keyboard filter initialization procedure Alt pressed The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the LOG EX HotKey processing MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B AppLock Error Messages 165 Message Explanation a
164. e Validate server certificate Checkbox QF amp gt 2 02 om A MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 221 WPA PSK Configuration To start the WPA PSK configuration tap Settings Configure Tap the Add button to configure a profile Enter an optional description m Is this an infrastructure network use access points or an ad hoc network peer to peer Infrastructure Cance gt KA 1 58 Pm J Been Figure 5 64 Enter Name of Network On the Add Network Wizard screen type the SSID of the wireless network If the SSID is being broadcast by the AP press Scan and choose the correct SSID Choose Infrastructure for the network type Add Network Wizard Association Mode WPA v Encryption Method TKIP Authenticate using 802 1X r1 Keys will be generated automatically for data privacy Pre shared key WPA or WPA2 Passphrase eee unmask Cancel Figure 5 65 Set the Association Mode to WPA Set the Association mode to WPA and Encryption Method to TKIP For WPA PSK uncheck the Authenticate using 802 1X checkbox Keys will box is grayed out when the encryption method is set to TKIP Enter the Pre shared key as entered in the AP Tap Next and Finish to complete the configuration E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 222 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Now you are ready to connect the MX7 to the
165. e Scan engines are not hot swappable The scan engine options are e EV 15 linear imager from Intermec e SE 824 short range scanner from Symbol e SE 955 high performance scanner from Symbol e SE 1524ER extended range Lorax scanner from Symbol The internal scanner activates when the scan button on the front of the MX7 is depressed or when the trigger on an installed trigger handle is depressed A control panel applet Start Settings Control Panel Scanner is available to set scan engine options Functionality of the internal scanner driver is based on the driver version installed in the MX7 Functions may include audible tones on good scan at the maximum db supported by the speaker failed scan LED indication of a scan in progress among other functions If enabled a vibration device provides a tactile response on a good scan event Configuring specific barcode parameters for any of the scan or imager engines is performed by using the MX7 scanner to scan setup barcodes located in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide Note The SE 955 scanner replaced the SE 824 scanner on all MX7 s manufactured after July 2006 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Physical Controls 41 Physical Controls Power Key Warm Reset Cold Reset Note Refer to the section titled Power Modes for information relating to the power states of the MXT The power key is located next to the Z gt key on the 55 key keypad an
166. e 2 15 RAM Assembly Footprint Note LXE does not supply the bolts or washers needed when mounting the cradle assembly to the vehicle chassis LXE recommends using bolts with a maximum 10 32 0 3125 diameter MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle 65 How to Install the Cradle U Bracket 1 MX7 2 Angle Adjust Knob 3 Passive Cradle 4 U Bracket 5 Mounting Bolt Figure 2 16 Install Cradle U Bracket 1 Attach the U Bracket to the vehicle making sure it does not impede safe operation of the vehicle 2 Attach the Passive Cradle to the U Bracket using the Angle Adjust knobs Use both knobs to loosen and tighten the cradle to the U bracket while determining the best viewing angle E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 66 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle 3 The passive vehicle mounted cradle is ready for use Periodically test the mounting device and retighten bolts and or knob as needed If the cradle becomes cracked or warped it must be replaced MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle 67 How To Install the RAM Bracket 1 MX7 2 Angle Adjust Knobs 3 Passive Cradle 4 U Bracket 5 Mounting Hex Bolt 6 Upper RAM Ball Assembly 7 Arm 8 Thumbscrew 9 Lower RAM Ball Assembly Figure 2 17 Install RAM Bracket Assembly I Attach the lower RAM ball assembly to the vehicle making sure it does not impede safe operation of the vehicle 2 Faste
167. e Config tab Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to Summit Client Util ok x this profile in Config status Diags Glob_ lt uti Config pean SDC Set EAP Type to PEAP MSCHAP Rename Delete New Commit yP peso Set Auth Type to Open Set Encryption to Auto WEP without WPA To configure PEAP MSCHAP for WPA set You must click on i ant 5 come tH Encryption to WPA TKIP x Config s settings EAP type EEO Tap the Credentials button PEAP MSCHAP j amp uto WEP Enter the Username or Domain Username in the Gein e WEP PSK keys Credentials popup text entry box Enter the Password Leave the CA Certificate Filename blank for now Figure 5 11 Configure a Summit Profile with PEAP MSCHAP Credentials Credentials Figure 5 12 PEAP MSCHAP Credentials Tap OK Tap Commit Once successfully authenticated copy the CA certificate into the System directory of the device Once the certificate file is in the System directory enter the filename in CA Certificate Filename on the popup Credentials data entry box Tap OK Tap Commit Perform a Warm Reset function The mobile device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP MSCHAP for the user authentication MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Summit Client Configuration 189 WPA LEAP Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel
168. e Mode Valid Mode static Mode Antenna Diversity Diversity Y Roaming IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN U ij About Savesexit gt Network Driver Version 3 03 25 Date Sep 27 2005 Configuration Utility Version 1 01 01 Date Nov 7 2005 Use UMAC def NIC Firmware Version 2 13 10 01 Address 00 60 B3 00 F1 1D Hardware Version Date amp IEEE oo b gt 10 22 aM DA Y IEEE oo gt 10 33 A A Figure 5 94 802 11g WiFi Configuration Utility Menus Conf About Save amp Exit Pd IEEE 90 4 e 10 32 a pa E Configuration default options Power Save Save Mode Dynamic Valid Mode Static Mode Dynamic save mode sets the radio to allow it to enter Power Save mode LXE does not recommend using Maximum save mode Antenna Diversity Roaming Profile displayed and greyed out Threshold populated by RSSI Control panel setting Scanning Mode displayed and greyed out The About screen displays version information The values cannot be edited by the user Save amp Exit buttons The Save button is greyed out if there have been no changes made to the 802 11g parameters since the last reboot If WiFi changes have been made tap the Save button and then tap OK to save the changes The WiFi icon minimizes to the taskbar Tap the Exit button to close the WiFi utility and the WiFi icon is removed from the taskbar L
169. e Username and Password Method utor re rp er E ec espe top ES ahe dh 200 Enter Password for LEAP ics ass niece ne bail eb RA E OE EE UO WAL 200 punk Odyssey C licni Setting S MODI e Ha oen ee RE ERE NE EE ERI RU PERSONEN UM EBENE EXENE RR ep ERO 201 Tap Add to Con ure a Profile coeno HER ERIS ERE RA RD FER ERE ERE ER SE RE REIP ERO 201 Add Network Wizard Seteet caro Pm em rr en 202 Set Assocation Mode tO W E enais iarr rr HS HUE HPEE RI NUR Ursus EU EEEO 202 Select Msthod 55i HEU OH UR HOW DU OPE BUE HAGO 203 User Name tor Phase 1 Authentication coe br E OE RE OSEE ERGO E PURErUP EOS 203 Select EAP NIS CEIADSV2 do oamup mb m d b o E ER rr P E PL HE HE a Ca Eo een 204 User Name and Password for Phase 2 Authentication ccccccccccsscesssccessceeseecsseceeseeceesessecenees 204 Conneal TO IN Sw PrO TG a2 ect ies Recstettestu E Osee ance tugs eSI PEDES EA 205 Validate Server COrbifie die oeste so shades obec ette IPOs I ER OEN 206 PEAP GTC Authentication ConflguratiOn n ee erp i UO ER e en Ree Vis 207 User Name for Outer AuthenticatlOTi uiae niaranra rea ae EE EPE PIE YRE taba FERRO EE Rua 207 Choose Corect Version of PEAR snauenonno pa mot m ORE ROT BOUE 208 EAP PBAP Credential CHoleeacunaosrtaui mtem mamme e nN OT 208 Prompt fot Pass ori P 209 Bunter the Profile Passwords ni mee Geass ees NERO ERN Re ER ARE 209 Authentication ds Suecesstul ies roy o ED ER DUANE Od GRR Eee Ieee 210 Validate Serve
170. e a pen or pencil Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen The touchscreen responds to an actuation force touch of 4 oz or greater of pressure The stylus can be used in conjunction with the keyboard and scanner and an input output device connected to the serial port e Touch the stylus to the field of the data entry form to receive the next data feed e The cursor begins to flash in the field e The unit is ready to accept data from either the physical keypad virtual keyboard or the integrated scanner Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display Never use an actual pen pencil an abrasive or sharp object to write on the touchscreen E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 30 Entering Data Using the Scanner Read all cautions warnings and labels before using the laser scanner Do not look into the laser s lens Do not stare directly into the laser beam To scan with the integrated laser barcode reader point the laser aperture towards a barcode and press the Scan button You will see a red laser beam strike the barcode L 3 1 345 5T8RBU laden ar280 Correct Scan Incorrect Scan Incorrect Scan Figure 1 24 Scan Beam Align the red beam so that the barcode is centered within the beam The laser beam must cross the entire barcode Move the MX7 towards or away from the barcode so that the barcode takes up approximately tw
171. e changes made to this screen After pressing Next tap Finish to return to the Profile screen Tap OK to end assigning WEP for security E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 198 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Set LEAP Odyssey Client Odyssey Client Stites Commands Tools Help Configure Detailed Status Security Settings EAP FAST Settings Trusted Servers Disable Odyssey Exit Access point 00 A0 E8 45 42 C9 Packets in out 28 24 Details Reconnect 4 gt ae d oays 9f gt 1 56 PM A Funk Odyssey Client Settings Menu Tap Add to Configure a Profile Figure 5 26 Funk Odyssey Client Settings Menu Start the Funk Odyssey client configuration by tapping the Odyssey Client icon Tap Settings Configure Tap the Add button to configure a profile The Add Network Wizard screen is displayed Add Network Wizard Enter an optional description m Is this an infrastructure network use access points or an ad hoc network peer to peer Infrastructure TE 4 gt E7 oays of 1 58 mu A f Figure 5 27 Add Network Wizard Screen On the Add Network Wizard screen enter the SSID of the wireless network If the SSID is being broadcast by the AP tap Scan and choose the correct SSID Choose Infrastructure for the network type Tap the Next button to continue or the Cancel button to ignore changes made on this screen MX7
172. e deleted upon warm and cold boot processes Select a program and tap Remove Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user installed only programs The change takes effect immediately Files stored in the My Documents folder are not removed using this option Note Do not remove LXE installed programs using this option E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 110 Settings Control Panel Options Scanner Access AY Settings Control Panel Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports Scanner parameters apply to the MX7 integrated scanner only Barcode manipulation parameters apply to barcodes scanned by the integrated scanner engine only Factory Default Settings Main Port 1 Internal Port 2 Disabled Port 3 Disabled Send key messages WEDGE Enabled Enable Internal Scanner Enabled Sound Good Scan Vibration Disabled Long Bad Scan Vibration Disabled Long COMI Port external serial port Baud Rate 9600 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Data Bits 8 Barcode Use Advanced Barcode Processing Disabled Scanner Control Scanner Control fa OK FEE Scanner Control Main comi Barcode EE Barcode Main com Stop Bits 1 2 Prefix Suffix Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Advanced Proces
173. ecial function makes Launch copy system folders from ATA drive we put it in here so that we control when it happens esp for Applock HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist COP YFOLDERS FileName COPY FOLDERS Installed dword 0 FileCheck Order dword 10 Cisco radio support HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist Cisco Radio FileName System CISCO CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS CISCO DLL Order dword 2 PCMCIA dword 1 5j Symbol radio support HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist Symbol Radio FileName System SYMBOL CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS NICTT EXE Order dword 2 PCMCIA dword 1 5 LXE USB radio support HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist LXE USB Radio FileName System LXECR1 CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS PRISMA02 DLL Order dword 2 PCMCIA dword 2 HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist Old LXE USB Radio CAB files for options not purchased are not loaded e g JAVA or RFID If a CAB file is missing please contact your LXE Representative MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Utilities 137 FileName System NL XEUSB CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS PRISMA02 DLL Order dword 2 PCMCIA dword 1 HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE ersist Wifi Utility FileName Windows Wifi_Utility exe Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dwor
174. ed air Static screen protectors for the MX7 are available from LXE E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 56 Power Supply Power Supply The MX7 computer is designed to work with a Lithium Ion Li ion battery from LXE Under normal conditions it should last approximately eight to ten hours before requiring a recharge The more you use the scanner or the radio transmitter the shorter the time required between battery recharges A suspended MX7 maintains the date and time for a minimum of two days using a main battery that has reached the Low Warning point and a fully charged backup battery The MX7 retains data during a main battery hot swap for at least 5 minutes Note New main battery packs must be charged prior to use This process takes up to four hours in an LXE Multi Charger and six hours when the MX7 is connected to external power Checking Battery Status Tap the ay Settings Control Panel Power Battery tab Battery level power status and charge remaining is displayed Turbo setting is enabled disabled using this applet Note Power drain increases substantially in Turbo mode MX7 Status LED and the Batteries When the LED is The Status is Comment Blinking Red Power Fail Replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Or Connect the MX7 to external AC power then replace the main battery with a fully charged main battery Steady Red Main Battery Low Low Battery Warning R
175. egins MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Wireless Zero Config Utility 241 Summit Client The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled and the MX7 is not connected to a network LXE does not recommend use of the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility for configuring the radio as it cannot be used to configure all supported security protocols You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network LXE recommends using the Summit Client Utility to manage the radio To use Wireless Zero Config first open the Summit Client Utility Summit Client Util Main Config Status Diags Glob Admin Login u SUMMIT J DATA COMMUNICATIONS Active Config Defaut Is Not Associated Worldwide Driver v1 01 10 SCU v1 01 10 Powered by DeviceScape This product includes software developed by the OpenssL foe ice im tin Onoanccl 9 summit peus r7 10 om A E 1 Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Config drop down box 2 A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly Tap OK 3 Tap the Disable Radio button to remove the connection to the Summit Client Utility The text on the button changes to Enable Radio 4 Tap the Power button to place the MX7 in Suspend then tap the
176. elates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Select View Options to setup General Connection Security Privacy Advanced and Popup options when connecting to the Internet Tap the button to access Internet Explorer Help Media Player Access Dd Programs Media Player There are few changes in the CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options Select View Options to setup Buffering Playback and Media Network Share options when connecting to the Internet This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider Tap the button to access Media Player Help Microsoft WordPad Access AY Programs Microsoft WordPad Create and edit documents and templates in WordPad using buttons and menu commands that are similar to those used in the desktop PC version of Microsoft Word By default WordPad files are saved as PWD files Documents can be saved in other formats e g RTF or DOC Tap the button to access WordPad Help E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 82 Start Menu Program Options Odyssey Client Access AY Programs Odyssey Client Odyssey automatically installs and runs after every cold and warm boot Disable Odyssey Start Programs Odyssey Client Settings Disable Odyssey When Odyssey is disabled the Wireless Zero Config screen is displayed When Odyssey is disabled before Suspend
177. en COL1ROW5 open COL1ROW6 open COL1ROW7 open LA P A E M E E COL2ROWO open COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 open COL2ROW3 SHIFT VK COMMA COL2ROW4 VK_SLASH COL2ROW5 open COL2ROW6 open COL2ROW7 open 1 al a A A A M I E COL3ROWO VK HYPHEN COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 SHIFT VK RBRACKET COL3ROW3 CHANGE MAP VOLUME COL3ROW4 open COL3ROW5 open COL3ROW6 open COL3ROW7 VK_CAPITAL LP Al A A 2 Ar COLA4ROWO open COL4ROW1 open COL4ROW2 SHIFT VK_ EQUAL COL4ROW3 open COL4ROW4 SHIFT VK_ PERIOD COL4ROW5 open E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 274 Creating Custom Key Maps COL4ROW6 open COL4ROW7 VK_LEFT LP NN E M P E E COL5ROWO open COLSROW1 VK_RBRACKET COLSROW2 VK_ESCAPE COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COLSROW7 VK_RIGHT COL6ROWO open COL6ROW1 SHIFT VK_LBRACKET COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 open COL6ROW4 VK LBRACKET COL6ROW5 VK_INSERT COL6ROW6 open COL6ROW7 SHIFT VK_ EQUAL LP PN E E P E E COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 VK SHIFT COL7ROW2 VK F COL7ROW3 VK F COL7ROW4 open COL7ROW5 KY_ ORANGE COL7ROW6 KY BLUE COL7ROW7 open SW 7 the name of this key doesn t matter 7 the important part is the MAP value 7 codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys on the MX7 55 key keypad modified with SHIFT Map MAP MAP SHIFT55 COLOROWO KY PROG1S COLOROW1 VK F16 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F17 COLOROW4 VK_F20 COLOROW5 open COLOROW6 SHIFT 8 COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN
178. en interpreted by the receiving application by using the escape format described above The same is true for hex encoded characters Barcode Advanced Ctrl Char Mapping Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner Barcode tab Scanner Control ka OK na Ctrl Translation Translate All Control Character Prefix Suffix Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Advanced Processing Prefix Suffix Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Character acknowledge Advanced Processing Replacement fignore drap Assign Delete vay Scann qp jf 9 39 a A 5 n Scann Q o gt 9 03 AM A k PUT Scann LI 9 39 AM A E Figure 3 29 Barcode Advanced Ctrl Translation Note that Control Character Mapping is available regardless of the status of the Use Advanced Barcode Processing checkbox See Hat Encoding and Decimal Hexadecimal Chart at the end of this chapter Translate All If Translate All is checked unprintable ASCII characters characters below 20H in scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in Character mode When Translate All is not checked and Send Key Messages is checked CTRL codes are passed through in Block mode The wedge provides a one to one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control character sequence of keystrokes in Key Message mode If a control character
179. ent rinse the affected area thoroughly with water If the solution contacts the eyes get immediate medical attention NiCd and Li Ion batteries are capable of delivering high currents when accidentally shorted Accidental shorting can occur when contact is made with jewelry metal surfaces conductive tools etc making the objects very hot Never place a battery in a pocket or case with keys coins or other metal objects Battery Maintenance Publication The LXE publication Getting the Most from Your Batteries is available on the LXE Manuals CD and is a single source guide to battery management The publication contains information about battery recharging conditioning and other pertinent issues MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Multi Charger Optional 59 MX7 Multi Charger Optional The multi charger requires an external power source before battery pack charging analyzing can commence The battery pack begins to recharge as soon as it is placed in the battery well There are five Charging wells The well closest to the overlay can be used to analyze the main battery pack in the well Gi TOANALYZE Insert BATTERY pack into RI IGHT HAND slot 2 Press dome switch within 15 seconds STATUS LIGHT CHARGING ALL SLOTS RIGHT ONLY CHARGING ANALYZING FAULT FAULT READY 15 STANDBY STANDBY MULTI charger LXE 7 Figure 2 10 LCD Panel and Dome Switch Pressing the dome switch within three
180. entered The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed What does this mean When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes they are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications LXE has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY When RFTerm is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator the following error message is displayed in a message box Selected hotkey is not allowed Please reenter When RFTerm is not installed on the mobile device the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 160 Single Application Configuration Single Application Configuration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administrator mode a password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured A password must be entered within 30 seconds and within three tries or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end user mode with the focus returned to the locked application Without entry of a valid password the switch into Administrator mode will not occur Access Start Settings Control Panel Administration icon The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured When the valid password is ent
181. eplace the main battery with a fully charged main battery No Color Good No user intervention required Main Battery Pack The main battery pack has a rugged plastic enclosure that is designed to withstand the ordinary rigors of an industrial environment Exercise care when transporting the battery pack making sure it does not come in contact with excessive heat or any power source other than the LXE Multi Charger or the MX7 unit When the main battery pack is properly installed in the unit it provides up to eight hours of operation depending upon use and accessories installed The battery pack is resistant to impact damage and falls of up to four feet to a concrete surface Under normal conditions it should last approximately eight hours before requiring a recharge The more you use the scanner or the radio transmitter the shorter the time required between battery recharges MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Power Supply 57 Battery Hotswapping Important When the backup battery power is Low or Very Low Aw Settings Control Panel Power Battery tab connect the AC adapter to the MX7 before replacing the main battery pack When the main battery power level is low the MX7 will signal the user with the low battery warning indicator the Status LED remains a steady red that continues until the main battery is replaced the battery completely depletes or external power is applied to the MX7 using an AC Adapte
182. er Status USB is available Status Network connections are disabled Status icon Iv Show status icon in Taskbar Cancel Help Figure 3 41 ActiveSync Connection Settings on a Windows PC MX7 and PC Partnership An ActiveSync partnership between the PC and MX7 has been established See section Initial Setup Serial Port Transfer e A PC with an available serial port and an MX7 with a serial cable The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 95 98 NT 2000 or XP e Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port is checked e Null modem cable with all control lines connected LXE recommends using the RS 232 cable listed in the following section Connect USB Transfer e A PC with an available USB port and an MX7 with a USB cable The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 98 SR2 Windows 2000 or Windows XP e LXE specific USB cable as listed in the following section Connect e Allow USB connection with this desktop computer is checked MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B ActiveSync Get Connected Process 131 Radio RF Transfer Connect Explore e A PCorlaptop with a radio card or wireless connection e The Allow network Ethernet and Remote Access Service RAS server connection with this desktop computer is checked Connect the correct cable to the PC the host and the MX7 the client Select Connect from 4 Programs Communications Con
183. er a cold reset the Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters Sections in this chapter that are not specifically Multi Application or Single Application are used changed in the same way by both versions Note LXE has made the assumption in this chapter that the first user to power up a new mobile device is the system administrator Setup a New Device LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password thus when the device is first booted the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed After the administrator specifies an application to lock a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the device switches to end user mode Briefly the process to configure a new device is as follows 1 Insert a fully charged battery and press the Power button 2 Connect an external power source to the device if required 3 Adjust screen display audio volume and other parameters if desired Install accessories e g handstrap stylus 4 Tap a Settings Control Panel Administration icon 5 Assign an application on the Control single application or Application multiple application tab screen 6 Assign a password on the Security tab screen 7 Selecta view level on the Status tab screen if desired 8 TapOK 9 Press the hotkey sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application s 10
184. ered the Administration Control panel is displayed When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the user is returned to the System Control Panel If a password has not been configured the Administrator Control panel is displayed Control Panel Administrator Control OK Application Internet m Command Line P Application Startup Delay 10 seconds a Figure 4 7 Control Panel Note If your Administrator Control Panel does not look like the figure shown above you may have the Multi Application version Use the Control tab options to select the application to launch when the device boots up Move the cursor to the Application text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the application from the Browse dialog tap OK Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Command Line text box Enter the number of seconds the selected Application must wait before starting to run upon reboot If no application is specified when the Administrator Control panel is closed the device reboots into Administrator mode If a password has been set but the application has not been specified MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Single Application Configuration 161 the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode The password prompt remains on the dis
185. erver Certificate must be issued by ema B 2 8 48 aM DA Figure 5 68 Select a Trusted Root CA Tap Browse Tap the Trusted Root CAs tab Choose the correct Root CA certificate Tap OK E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 224 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Server name Any name Name must end with fRFEngACServed Odyssey Client Trusted Servers RFEngACServer Server Certificate must be issued by Edit Add Delete Figure 5 69 Configuring a Trusted Server Certificate The Server Certificate is listed in the grayed box To authenticate the RADIUS server only change the Server name button to Name must end with Enter the name of the RADIUS certificate as shown in the screen titled Trusted Servers Tap the OK button The server name should be listed in the box Tap the OK button The trusted server certificate is configured for the MX7 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Root Certificates 225 Root Certificates 4 It is important that all dates are correct on CE and desktop laptop computers when Hd using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not Date Time correct authentication will fail Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC A Please refer to the LXE Security Primer for more information on obtaining and installing root certifica
186. ery 1s depleted Minimal life expectancy is 2 years Radio 802 11 b g 2 4GHz USB 2 0 device in Supports diversity Dynamic control for D PCMCIA S D management 802 11 ur g 2 4GHz nM Flash device in Supports Dynamic control for LXE PCMCIA Adapter Card power management Display Specifications MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Environmental Specifications 281 Environmental Specifications MX7 Standards See MX7 User s Guide Appendix B AC Wall Adapter Input Connector Connector North American wall North American wall plug no ground 0 no ground Output Connector AC wall adapter has a 5 5mm barrel connector This connects to the LXE cables which transition DII S NN to the 20 pin D connector Output Voltage 12V 12V regulated 0000000000000 Operating Temperature 32 F to 100 F 0 C to 40 C The LXE approved AC Power Adapter is only intended for use in a 25 C 77 F maximum ambient temperature environment Storage Temperature 40 F to 180 F 40 C to 80 C fahrenheit degrees temperature centigrade temperature 9 5 32 Operates in a relative humidity of 5 95 non condensing E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 282 Radio Specifications Radio Specifications Odyssey Client 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps Summit Client 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B List of Valid VK Codes fo
187. es When the launch feature is installed on the device the following registry settings are created The launch feature registry settings are embedded in the mobile device OS image HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Persist Filename AppLock exe HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Persist Installed HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Persist FileCheck AppLock registry settings identify the application that is going to be locked and any parameters that are needed by the application These registry settings are as follows HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE Administration AppName HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE AppCommandLine In addition to the registry settings needed to specify the application additional registry settings are needed to store the configuration options for AppLock These options include among others the administrator s password and hotkey HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE AppLock Administration HotKey HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software LXE AppLock Administration EP E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 174 AppLock Registry Settings E MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Introduction The MX7 mobile device uses the LXE 802 11b g radio and either the Funk amp Odyssey Client software on the mobile device or the Summit Client software Both client software utilities suppor
188. et the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Summit Client Util ox x Main Config status Diags Glob_ lt gt i Config leap no wpa SBC Rename Delete New Commit Config tab Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to LEAP Set Encryption to Auto WEP You must click on Commit to save th Config s settings Tap the Credentials button Encryption Summit CI Pm ost a p Figure 5 9 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP w o WPA Username or Domain Username Password pme OK Figure 5 10 LEAP Credentials Enter the Username or Domain Username in the Credentials popup text entry box Enter the Password Tap OK Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration Perform a Warm Reset function to connect using the new profile configuration Please see WPA LEAP Authentication later in this section to configure the radio for WPA LEAP E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 188 Summit Client Configuration PEAP MSCHAP Authentication Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap th
189. ey Client Ok Result Success Type EAP TLS Elapsed time 00 03 38 Cipher suite 000A RSA 3DES EDE CBC SHA AP id networkid tlsTest nasid AP 12 portid 0 1 Authentication Encryption Signal power Strong 51 dB Refresh 4 MV de odys of di 2 35 ru A en d odys KALA 2 36 PM AR Signal Authentication Pairwise cipher TKIP Group cipher TKIP Refresh gt Ev d oays Fd 2 36 mu A Figure 5 62 Detailed Status is Displayed Signal Authentication Encryption E EQ MX7RG B 219 MX7 Reference Guide 220 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Validating the Server Certificate To validate the server certificate the root CA certificate must be installed For instructions for installing see section titled Root Certificates The RADIUS server certificate is not required only the root CA which issued the server certificate Next configure the Root CA Certificate as a Trusted Root CA as described in the section titled Trusted Server Configuration Navigate back to the authentication type screen and check the Validate server certificate checkbox Tap Next to the end then Finish buttons Tap OK to end the configuration process Add Network Wizard Select and order the EAP methods that you would like to use EAP TLS A 3 Add eo Figure 5 63 Enable th
190. ey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key However when the hotkey is pressed to switch modes the normal key must be entered from the keypad it cannot be entered from the SIP E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 156 Password Multi Application Configuration Move the cursor to the Password text box The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match Passwords are case sensitive When the user exits the Administrator Control panel the two passwords are compared to verify that they match If they do not match a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error After the user closes the dialog box the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again If the passwords match the password is encrypted and saved See Also Passwords and Troubleshooting Multi Application AppLock Status Panel Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific log file specified by the Administrator For this reason the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged as well as clear the status information Administrator Control OK LX Repeat Filename System applock txt B r V
191. f Heading WM CHAR 0x1 VK A 0x41 up VK CONTROL 0x11 up STX 2 B Start of TeXt Ctrl b ETX 3 C End of TeXt Ctrl c EOT 4 D End Of Transmission Ctrl d ENQ 5 AE ENQuiry Ctrl e ACK 6 F ACKnowledge Ctrl f BEL 7 G BELI rings terminal bell Ctrl g BS 8 H BackSpace non destructive Ctrl h HT 9 I Horizontal Tab move to next tab position Ctrl i LF a J Line Feed Ctrl j VT b K Vertical Tab Ctrl k FF c L Form Feed Ctrl l CR d M Carriage Return Ctrl m SO e N Shift Out Ctrl n SI f O Shift In Ctrl o DLE 10 P Data Link Escape Ctrl p DCI 11 Q Device Control 1 normally XON Ctrl q DC2 12 R Device Control 2 Ctrl r DC3 13 S Device Control 3 normally XOFF Ctrl s DC4 14 AT Device Control 4 Ctrl t NAK 15 U Negative AcKnowledge Ctrl u SYN 16 V SYNchronous idle Ctrl v ETB 17 W End Transmission Block Ctrl w MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B ASCII Control Codes 285 Char Hex Ee Control Action CAN 17 X CANcel line Ctrl x EM 19 Y End of Medium Ctrl y SUB la Z SUBstitute Ctrl z VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down ESC 1b ESCape WM CHAR 0x1b VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down FS lc N File Separator WM CHAR 0xlc VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down WM CHAR 0xld down WM CHAR 0x1d up VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up GS Id Group Se
192. fined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No equal in value line A value line must be of the form value data A value line was expected but there was no equal in it or A comment line did not begin with a semicolon No MAPNAME defined There is no map name defined The keyboard driver requires this name to be able to load the keymap tables This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified Scan code algorithm required A COLxROWX data value was found before any ALGOR statement ALGOR algorithm is parsed to decide how to encode COLxROWX into a keymap value Too many maps for specified MAPCNT There are more MAP sections defined that the MAPCNT field specified Unknown scan code algorithm The ALGOR algorithm specified is not one that KEY COMP understands Unrecognized scancode algorithm s The ALGOR algorithm specified is not one that KEY COMP understands E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 262 Creating Custom Key Maps Value outside of section A value defined as value data is only valid within a section defined as section A value line was found when a section header line was expected Sample Input File general parms give the size of arrays all numeric values are decimal these numbers are validated with the data below n at compile time MAPNAME must be 8 digits all numerics General MAPDESC Defaul
193. g Enter remember to tap the Alph key to toggle between Alpha and Numeric mode When using a sequence of keys that do not include the Alph key but does include a sticky key press the sticky key first then the rest of the key sequence To Get This MX7 Key Press These Keys and Then Press This Key Function Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Alpha Power Suspend Po o d po mE Power Diamond reece me LT e ic x Diamond 2 or MAP Default is MAP ARESE x Diamond 3 or MAP Default is MAP dal eee Volume Adjust Mode o xi 0 0 0 Scan Key mee x PL t Toggle Blue Mode ee 0 bo 4 Blue Toggle Orange Mode ome Toggle Shift Mode O o 0 0 b bo 4 Shft Toggle AlphaMode J J Apm Alt Mode C a EE Alt Control Mode L 1 ee cti Scan Mode Lo o San key Esc Px L Alt Space L 1 ee ee ee Spe Enter Lo o d ter Capstock Toggle x Tab Back Space Lo ox J C tL Spe Tab Tab 7 Tapping the Power key when in any sticky mode Blue Orange Shift etc either turns the device On when Off or places it in Suspend when active Orange Scan enters Volume Adjust Mode Use Up Arrow and Down Arrow to adjust volume Press any other key but Up Arrow or Down Arrow to exit Adjust Mode Blue Scan enters Backlight Brightness Adjust Mode Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to adjust brightness Press any other key but Up Arrow or Down Arrow to exit Adjust Mod
194. g programs Changes or modifications require Administrator access Refer to Chapter 4 AppLock for setup and processing information RFTerm opens and runs upon each cold reset and warm reset Tap File Exit to close the RFTerm application The Login utility waits for a login name before the MX can continue For devices with an Odyssey Client only Enter Login name LLNMGUTILO14 SIT1 If the LXE Login Utility has been installed a login screen is presented to the user after a return from Suspend a warm reset and a cold reset Type the login name and tap OK to continue Tap Cancel to use the previously entered user name Refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled LXE Login Utility Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key Hotkey Touch See Also Chapter 4 AppLock If the mobile device uses LXE s Multi AppLock to allow the user to switch between two applications the default Activation key is Ctrl Spe The key sequence switches the focus between one application and another Data entry affects the application running in the foreground only Note that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when switching applications Tap the taskbar icon to place the popup menu on screen Tap one of the application icons in the popup menu The selected application is brought to the foreground while the other applicat
195. g the Power key when in any sticky mode Blue Orange Shift etc either turns the device On when Off or places it in Suspend when active 5 Orange Scan and Blue V enters Volume Adjust Mode Use Up Arrow and Down Arrow to adjust volume Press any other key but Up Arrow or Down Arrow to exit Adjust Mode E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 244 To Get This MX7 Key Function Display Backlight Brightness Adjust Mode Toggle Blue Mode Toggle Orange Mode Toggle Shift Mode Alt Control Scan Esc Space Enter CapsLock Toggle Back Space Tab BackTab Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Insert Delete Home End Page Up Page Down F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 Blue Scan enters Backlight Brightness Adjust Mode Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to adjust brightness 55 Key Alphanumeric Keymaps Press These Keys and Then Caps Blue Orange Ctl Alt Shft Lock Press any other key but Up Arrow or Down Arrow to exit Adjust Mode MX7 Reference Guide Press This Key Scan Key Blue Orange Shft Alt Ctl Scan Key Alt Spc Enter Tab Spc Tab Tab Up Arrow Down Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow I letter i or Ctl Del Down Arrow Up Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F1 E EQ MX7RG B 55 Key Alphanumeric Keymaps To Get This MX7 Key Function F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 1 N A iN x s c
196. gate back to the authentication type screen and check the Validate server certificate checkbox Tap Next to the end then Finish buttons Tap OK to end the configuration process Edit Network Wizard 0 Select and order the EAP methods that you would like to use EAP PEAP Add Remove H Previous Next Cancel Figure 5 49 Validate Server Certificate for PEAP GTC Navigate back to the authentication type screen and enable the Validate server certificate checkbox Tap Next to the end then the Finish buttons Tap OK to end configuration E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 212 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration EAP LEAP Authentication The Funk Odyssey supplicant authenticates a user with the EAP LEAP protocol Use the delete and add buttons to choose EAP LEAP authentication Your system may have EAP LEAP and or LEAP in the method drop down list EAP LEAP protocol can be used for LEAP authentication Edit Network Wizard Select and order the EAP methods that you would like to use Remove J validate server certificate Previous Next cancel Figure 5 50 EAP LEAP Method EAP LEAP does not use server side authentication so the Validate server box is grayed out Tap Next Add Network Wizard OK Username user2 Permit login using password Prompt for password Use the following password C Unrmask C Permit login using my certificate C Permit login using my SIM ca
197. gs Control Panel Certificates y Certificates Set the drop down box to My Certificates as shown below The correct user certificate should be shown in the right pane Tap the Import button to import a digital certificate file Tap the View button to view a highlighted digital certificate Tap the Remove button to remove highlighted certificate files Tap the button and follow the instructions in the Help file when working with trusted authorities and digital certificates Trusted Authorities Lists the certificates trusted by you rim a Import Class 3 Public Prim Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur Mew Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root civ Remove OS S Cp ceniti db o 9 53 M D E Figure 1 21 Certificate Stores MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Installing User Certificates and Private Keys 27 Private Key Tap the View button Trusted Authorities a ell Certificate Details Friendly Name Field Private Key Prin p Import Present Class 3 Public Prim Entrust net Certifi o view Entrust net Secur View Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root cv Remove OL e T Certifi GD o gt 9 53 AM A a Lists the certificates trusted by you E Figure 1 22 View Certificate Details Set the Field to Private Key Make sure the private key is Present If it is not present install the private key file See Ch
198. h SE955 scanner where applicable Removed references to Bluetooth except to state that it is not supported Chapter 1 Introduction Added section titled Features Added Multi AppLock activation key instruction Added Summit Client Desktop panel to section titled Quick Start Installing Trigger Handle Added Equipment Needed Torque wrench capable of torquing to 3 1 in Ib 34 11 N m Removed and washers from step 5 and included torque instruction in step 6 Expanded end user instruction for voice data entry using audio cable and headsets Accessories Updated to reflect ROHS compliance Added voice accessories Removed MX7A309PSACWW Added 9000A302PSACWW AC DC power supply int l no power cord Added SE955 scanner Noted the replacement of SE824 scanner with SE955 scanner where applicable Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Removed statement referring to low battery warning dialog box and edited Power Supply section for clarification Chapter 3 System Configuration Added user information for JAVA option Updated battery charge panels Battery Panel and Power Panel Updated scanner panels with barcode wedge enhancement Moved Odyssey Client menu information and Summit Client menu information from Start Control Panel section to Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Corrected Order statement for Utilities LXE Login Install and LXE
199. h card and port 42 Internet connectivity 5 ce 98 Internet Explorer teret 81 APPLOCK 55 ste nxUO Uber 154 Radio card and ISP required 81 single User AppLock noie 161 Internet popup blocker sss 98 Internet priv aey cioe geteiceei t petes 98 Internet Security oni iem HERO 98 IO Coriponehts ion ect e ates 35 IPv6 config r tioti eene teens 140 J Java ODD uia cet Te ea aerate ees 72 Nis E eio 74 K key repeat delay and rate ssssss 100 Keyboard Onscreen only cocti iter eren 97 KEY COMP oripiler ee eerte 283 KEYCOMPB EXE rtr rper ters 254 Keymap 32 key Keymap uieocniendeenper terrere ette ceps 249 5250 key functions eene 248 SR E 243 Keypad and entem d t ceret hen 28 Keypads ShOFCUIS osten tette ditate dtes 19 L Launch APP and Launch CMD 141 LAUNCH EX Esaeraren eee tenete ei eee 135 LCD Milt Char S60 Jer onere Ree 60 LCD M SSaBeS cone ert rp eren 60 LED Alpha mode sss Mind de ith ues 51 Battery Status Leetaru 56 MX7 Reference Guide Mult charget 5 ene Renee eere rane 60 Ieri M texts 51 System StAtUs ete teei et m ERR EREERRR 51 LED Pan CHOMS iisas sse erap aeia 60 Levels Logging Single User AppLock ss 163
200. he CapsLock icon in the Windows CE taskbar The current status of CapsLock can be changed with the CAPS key however this method does not change CapsLock behavior upon reboot Note These utilities affect the behavior of the CapsLock on warmboot After a coldboot CapsLock is disabled Configuring IPv6 By default IPv6 is enabled and an IPv6 broadcast message is sent on power up To disable IPv6 run Windows ipv6Disable reg and perform a warmboot To enable IPv6 run Windows ipv6Enable reg and perform a warmboot Note These utilities affect the behavior of IPv6 on warmboot After a coldboot IPv6 is enabled MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Utilities 141 Launch App Launch Command The Launch App Launch Command are defined for use by CE administrators The VK LAUNCH APPI 4 and VK LAUNCH CMDI I 4 keys are parsed and executed directly by the keyboard driver They are configurable in registry keys to execute any desired function The CMD keys differ from the APP keys in that they call the ShellExecuteEx API which lets them open documents directly the APP keys only start EXE applications Note that executables and parameters are not checked for accuracy by the keyboard driver If the launch fails the mobile device emits a single beep 1f the launch is successful the mobile device is silent The registry keys are HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software XEWaunch Appl App2 App3 App4 Exe name of executable file
201. he front of your body It may get in your way or get caught on protruding objects Entering Data Data is entered into the MX7 by speaking into the headset s microphone when prompted Please contact your System Administrator 1f assistance 1s needed with the voice software installed on your MX7 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 18 Power Key Power Key Note Refer to the section titled Power Modes later in this guide for information relating to the power states of the MX7 Power 55 Key Key Figure 1 17 Power Key Location The Power key is located at the bottom of the keypad When a battery 1s inserted in the MX7 for the first time press the Power key Tapping the Power key places the MX7 immediately in Suspend mode Tapping the Power key again immediately releases the MX7 from Suspend Mode Or Tap Dd Suspend d My Device My Documents CUPIS Figure 1 18 Enter Suspend Mode Press Enter Please refer to the section titled Power Key in Chapter 2 for Reboot options and instruction See section LED Indicators and System Status LED later in this guide MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus 19 Tapping the Touchscreen with a Stylus Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display Never use an actual pen pencil sharp or abrasive object to write on the touchscreen Hold the stylus as if it were
202. his file at the end of this section in Sample Input File This section should be read while referring to this sample source for simplicity It is an important limitation that the keymap must have a 4 5 or 6 digit numeric name this is a limit of the Microsoft Windows CE layout manager The format of this file is familiar to anyone who has used INI files under Windows There is a section header in square brackets followed by various values in the form value data Lines beginning with a semicolon or empty lines are ignored as comments Spaces or tabs before or after the information are stripped off and ignored Case is ignored in section names value names and value data Note Before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop Connection go to Start Settings Control Panel Keyboard and select Default from the keymap popup Tap OK COLxROWx Format Note There is no relationship between the physical layout COL ROW of the keyboard keypad and the COL ROW listing in the key map file The key map file represents the electrical layout not the physical layout All keys are specified in COLXROWx format In this format the first x is the 1 or 2 digit column in the keymap and the second x is the 1 or 2 digit row in the keymap All rows and columns are enumerated starting with zero 0 In the MAP section the COLxROWx is the value name and the values must be less than the MAPROWS and MAPCOLS specified in the GENERAL section
203. hod you must select and order the inner EAP methods EAP GenericTokenCard e amp oays BH Loo 10 42 am A v de cays 2 gt 10 35 am D Figure 5 38 Select EAP MS CHAP V2 For PEAP MS CHAP use the Add Remove buttons to choose EAP MS CHAP V2 Tap Next to continue Previous to return to the previous screen or Cancel to ignore changes made to this screen m Network Wizard The configuration of the new netwo A is complete Add Network Wizard Press Finish to accept the configuration and add the new network Permit login using password Prompt for password Use the following password C unmask C Permit login using my certificate C Permit login using my SIM card Previous Next Cancel 4 d en d Odys I 10 36 a Ev dons 10 37 AM z Figure 5 39 User Name and Password for Phase 2 Authentication A screen appears asking for a user name This is for the inner or Phase 2 user name Under Password choose Prompt for password or Use the following password radio buttons Tap the OK button Then tap Finish on the The configuration of the new network is complete screen MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 205 On the main configuration screen check the Connect to box and choose the profile just configured Once connected the status should
204. hoose the user certificate for authentication Tap Finish to complete the configuration E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 218 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Explore the profile just created Settings Commands Tools V Connect to Odyssey Client Status Status searching for access point Network SSID Access point Packets in out Delete b fd 2 07 pu A 2 amp Odys 9f 2 07 Pm A Figure 5 59 Choose the New Profile Tap the OK button in the top right corner On the main configuration screen check the Connect to box and choose the profile just configured Odyssey Client ox V Connect to open and authenticated Network SSID tlsTest Access point 00 14 18 58 04 90 Packets in out 62 32 Em 9f amp 2 33 mu AS Figure 5 60 Status is open and authenticated Once configured the status shows authenticating then once authenticated it shows open and authenticated MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration To check the EAP TLS status tap Settings Detailed Status Odyssey Client Detailed Status Security Settings EAP FAST Settings Trusted Servers Disable Odyssey Exit Access point U0 14 1B 58 04 90 Packets in out 75 32 EXIT Commands Tools Kal m 9f amp 2 34 PM d Odyss
205. ic vi Codabar Ames Prefix Suffix msi Code 93 Ctrl Char Mapping Code 128 UPC A Scancode Enable UPC E M EAN JAN Advanced Processing wy Seam GF 9 39 a a 3 vy Scann PEL P DA Figure 3 30 Barcode Advanced Scancode Enable Disable Note that Scancode Enable is available regardless of the status of the Use Advanced Barcode Processing checkbox This panel displays a list of all barcode symbologies supported by the integrated barcode scanner Barcodes are sent to the application just as they are received from the scanner and before the Strip Leading Trailing or Append Prefix Suffix features E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 118 Settings Control Panel Options Barcode Advanced Code ID Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner Barcode tab Note that the Use Advanced Barcode Processing checkbox must be enabled before Advanced Processing can occur See Also The Integrated Scanner Programming Guide section titled Data Options for full details on AIM Codes and Symbol Codes Scanner Control Data includes AIM Code ID Data includes Symbol Code ID O Strip Code ID Prefix Suffix _ Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Advanced Processing e wy Seam GF 9 39 JE 9 Scan f 9 44 B FR Figure 3 31 Barcode Advanced Processing No Code ID Options on this Ba
206. icate is selected in the list box Microsoft Certificate Download a CA Certificate Certificate Chain or CRL To trust certificates issued from this certification authority install this CA certificate chain To download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL select the certificate and encoding method CA Certificate Encoding method DER OBase 64 Download CA certificate Download CA certificate chain Download latest base CRL Download latest delta CRL Figure 5 72 Select Encoding Method before Downloading Tap the DER button To download the CA certificate tap on the Download CA certificate link File Download Security Warning x Do you want to open or save this file Name certnew cer Type Security Certificate 1 10 KB From 100 100 100 100 Open Save Cancel While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this software What s the risk Figure 5 73 Download CA Certificate Screen Tap the Save button and save the certificate to the desktop PC Keep track of the name and location of the certificate as the certificate file name and file location 1s required in later steps MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Root Certificates 227 Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device Copy the certificate file from the desktop PC to the mobile device Import the certificate by na
207. icates iis scseete non cede seeie deire 26 My Device POI iSe deese R te TI E EQ MX7RG B Index N Network driver properties 104 No Security Irina RR 185 O Odyssey Client ICOf ei erener 191 240 Commands i250 sten cote nr eee 192 Configured and authenticated 218 Connect the MX7 to the AP 222 EAP TLS ptoto6ol 2 three 214 217 EAP LEAP protocol mre 212 EAP MS CHAP V2 ccssssssssssessessressseseeseeees 204 Pe p E 193 Installing User Certificate sus 214 LXE Login Utility inrer ns 142 NO EneryptOLs reiecit deett a 195 password for the private key sss 215 PEAP MS CHAP protocol 203 PEAP GTC protocol niet 207 Private Key eor ee Rte Rs 216 Server authentication ssssessss 206 211 Server certificate validation sssse 220 SIS e M 194 Set WPA 2 ieuawipeto diis 201 Selle ccs seve hat sas ISO sir 191 Signal Authentication Encryption 219 Sim Card Manager see draco 193 STAFTUD sacri ee Deed rover ue e ees do corre 24 T6018 d cis p iret tot reete rines 193 Trusted Server configuration 223 Unmask client password s 209 User Certificate installing ss 214 Validate the server side certificates 223 WEP
208. iew Level None v Refresh Save As Clear Status Figure 4 5 Status Panel Multi Application Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the log file path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the log file from the Browse dialog tap OK Note f your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above you may have the Single Application version Error Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked Process Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program Extended Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Multi Application Configuration 157 All All messages are displayed Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another The filtered records are displayed all others are not displayed Log Note If a level higher than Error is selected the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely The system default is
209. ighted so the user can type a replacement if the control character is not being ignored Once the user types into the Replacement edit control reselecting the character form Character combo box redisplays the Ignore drop default in the Replacement edit control Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character combo box typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control according to the formats defined above and then selecting Assign The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button List Box The list box shows all user defined control characters and their assigned replacements All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned Delete This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted When an entry or entries is highlighted and Delete is selected the highlighted material is deleted from the list box MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 117 Barcode Advanced Scancode Enable Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner Barcode tab See the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide section titled Data Options for full details on AIM Codes and Symbol Codes Scanner Control Es OK E Code Enable Disable OK
210. ile configuration EAP type Encryption oe H oe Perform a Warm Reset function to connect using the new profile configuration Credentials WEP PSK Keys i 18 9 42 M DA f Figure 5 7 Configure a Summit Profile with No Security 3 tapped LXE recommends performing a warm reset or Suspend Resume function each time the Commit button is E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 186 Summit Client Configuration WEP Keys Please see your System Administrator for complete information about your network WEP key requirements To connect using WEP use the following minimum required profile options e Auth Type Open e EAP Type None e Encryption Manual WEP Tap the WEP PSK Keys button The WEP Key Entry text entry box appears Tx Key i o123456789abcdef0123456789 _ Os pisces e Oa Figure 5 8 WEP Keys Enter the WEP key If there are more than one set of keys tap the radio button in front of the Key to be used Valid values are 10 characters for 40 bit encryption or 26 characters for 128 bit encryption hexadecimal characters Tap OK Tap the Commit button Perform a Warm Reset function MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Summit Client Configuration LEAP w o WPA Authentication 187 If the Cisco CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open If the AP is configured for network EAP only s
211. ile created later in this process must be given the same name for example MX7USER CER DO NOT check Enable strong private key protection Make any other desired changes and tap the Submit button E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 232 User Certificates Potential Scripting Violation Potential Scripting Violation xw ow Figure 5 82 Script Warnings If any script notifications occur tap the Yes button to continue the certificate request Create Private Key Password Figure 5 83 Script Warnings When prompted for the private key password e Tap None if you do not wish to use a password or e Enter and confirm your desired password then tap OK Microsoft Certificate es johndoe Certificate Issued The certificate you requested was issued to you DER encoded or Base 64 encoded Download certificate Download certificate chain Figure 5 84 Certificate Issued Tap the Download certificate link MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B User Certificates 233 File Download x Some files can harm your computer If the file information below looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or save this file File name certnew cer File type Security Certificate From 100 100 100 100 s This type of file could harm your computer if it contains malicious code Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer
212. inel Xscale operating at 400 MHz 32 bit CPU with on chip cache Ec IN 128 MB SDRAM 20 MB available for programs and data Display LCD Transmissive Color optimized for indoor use Mass Removable 128MB SD Flash Card Storage SD Card available for customer use FAT file PCMCIA Interface Weights External Connectors Interface Dimensions Scanner Nons Unit with radio battery SE1524ER scanner and handle Unit with radio battery SE1524ER scanner and handstrap Transmissive LCD with touchscreen Customer Configurable Display LED Backlighting 1 6 26 1 oz 1 4 Ibs 22 6 oz RS 232 COMI mini D serial port Width at display Width at handgrip 2 Depth at Scanner Depth at Battery No Scanner Intermec EV 15 Linear Imager Symbol SE824 Short Range Symbol SE1524ER Lorax Symbol SE955 Short Range 20 Position D female Connector Provides cabled connection to external devices such as an audio headset printer USB power connection RS 232 power connection Integrated SE955 replaced SE824 in July 2006 EO E MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B 280 Display Specifications Batteries Main Li Ion battery pack In Unit Chargeable or Externally 7 4V 2 4Ah Chargeable Backup Internal Nickel Cadmium NiCd Automatically charges from main battery CMOS 1 42V max during normal operation Requires AC power for re charging Memory operational for 24 hours when main batt
213. ion continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application running in the foreground only MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Hardware Setup 11 Hardware Setup Installing Trigger Handle Optional The MX7 can be purchased with a customer installable pistol grip handle The handle enables the user of the MX7 to hold the unit while pointing and activating the scanner with the trigger on the handle Pressing the trigger activates the scanner and functions the same as the Scan key on the keypad With the handle installed the Scan key on the keypad remains active The trigger duplicates the operation The handle is built of a durable and flexible plastic that will not detach from the MX7 if the unit is dropped The trigger handle is a mechanical device Battery or external A C power is not required for operation of the trigger handle The trigger handle does not need to be removed when replacing the main battery pack Either the trigger handle is attached to the MX7 or the handstrap is attached but not both Figure 1 8 Trigger Handle Attach Points Handle Installation Equipment Needed Torque wrench capable of torquing to 3 1 in Ib 34 11 N m Place the MX7 with the screen facing down on a flat stable surface 2 Remove the main battery pack 3 Slide the locking tab on the underside of the pistol grip into the slot at the back of the battery compartment and press it firmly into place 4 Ens
214. is replaced by another control character the replacement is performed on the barcode data prefix and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 116 Settings Control Panel Options For example if Carriage Return is replaced by Line Feed by specifying J or 0x0A in the configuration the value 0x0d received in any scanned barcode or defined in the prefix or suffix will be replaced with the value 0x0a The Wedge then sends Ctrl J to the receiving application rather than Ctrl M Translate All This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode on the Main tab selected In Key Message mode when this option is enabled control characters embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent control key keystroke sequence 13 0x0d is translated to Control M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL SHIFT and m keys on the keypad It does not replace control characters in the prefix and suffix The assignments provided by this enhancement allow the user to override the one to one translation provided by Translate All Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name Refer to the table in Assigned Replacements for the list of control characters and their names When a character name is selected from the combo box the text Ignore drop is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control Ignore drop is highl
215. it ChentUtlity Con tA Dessen eae ben D ERE es ptr EAR tases NEIN SE aE NEERA TEREE 178 Summit ient Utility Staus Tabu neo dt eai to pO m RT REGE 180 Summit Client Utility Dia gs tab ioni a teat t EHE o BH r EREE ERES 181 Summit Chem U hty Global Sette tab eerie ster e Wied ane sS PR EXER eae AE aiaa 182 Configure Summit Profile with No Security 5 3 e irn e Ut bove i eit ee beds 185 MBPS GY ead ie nid EE A ERE dcl er APERTURA os XR RUE EX HEP ERE RUEDA EAR ER euo E A A 186 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Table of Contents xi Figure 5 9 Configure a Summit Profile with LEAP w o WPA 5 3 1 8 d ritreciet roce bo ate teni eUe cob et boc e beides bna 187 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 5 44 Figure 5 45 Figure 5 46 Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 LEAP Credentials ooh OUR REM ORE EDS 187 Contigure a Summit Profile with PEA
216. l X Ctrl E or Ctrl 5 Ctrl 9 Ctrl 3 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Multi Application Configuration 153 Multi Application Configuration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administrator mode a password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured A password must be entered within 30 seconds and within three tries or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end user mode with the focus returned to the locked application Without entry of a valid password the switch into Administrator mode will not occur Access Start Settings Control Panel Administration icon The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured When the valid password is entered the Administration Control panel is displayed When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the user is returned to the System Control Panel If a password has not been configured the Administrator Control panel is displayed Note AppLock cannot support multiple windows of some applications Attempting to open multiple windows of RFTerm or Pocket Word will cause AppLock to switch to administration mode Application Panel Administrator Control OK Ed Application Filename 7 m Title Arguments B Order 1 Icon Internet a Global Key Ctri Space Y Delay 10
217. l key is selected from a predefined list of Global hotkey combinations The Global key is presented to the end user as the Activation key Enter the number of seconds in Global Delay that both Applications must wait before starting to run upon reboot Tap the Clear button to clear all Application information that are currently displayed The Global settings remain the same for both applications Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to application setup screen The left and right buttons update the information on the screen with the previous or next configured application respectively If no application is specified when the Administrator Control applet is closed the device reboots into Administrator mode If a password has been set but an application has not been specified the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode The password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered End User Internet Explorer EUIE AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer such as HTML pages and JAVA applications The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer s address bar To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end u
218. le in this release Buttons Summit Client Util Main Config Status Diags Glob Config Default SDC Re connect Tice Release Renew Start Ping Diagnostics Jpd Driver Site Surve it Qf ge 10 21 AM DA Figure 5 5 Summit Client Utility Diags tab Button Function Re connect Tap this button to apply or reapply the current config profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN Activity is logged in the Diagnotic Output text box on the lower part of the panel Release Renew Release the current IP address to obtain a new IP address This option renews the IP address when applicable Activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output text box If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the radio this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box Note that the current IP address is displayed next to the Release Renew button Start Ping Tap the text box and type an IP address to Ping Tap the Start Ping button to start pinging the IP address The button name changes to Stop Ping Tap Stop Ping to end the pinging process The pinging process ends when any other button on this panel is tapped or a different menu tab is selected Ping results are displayed in the Diagnostic Output text box Diagnostics Tapping this button begins an attempt to re connect to the wireless LAN This option provides more data in the Diagnostics Output text box than the
219. le network Jassociated 00 60 1D 04 D5 C4 Current Tx Rate Mbits sec RSSI Threshold dBm ja RSSI Reading Interval Radio Measurement Threshold ms o Max Transmit Power dBm E Current Channel RSSI dBm F7 Fair 46 G E sec Y 1EEE oo d Lo 10 31 0 D amp iet oo dh Lo 10 32 0 A f 9 ecc oo d o 10 32 am A 6 Figure 5 93 802 11g WiFi Configuration Utility Menus Status CCX RSSI The Status screen displays the current status of the radio current data rate the current AP channel that the radio 1s operating on RSSI threshold and signal strength These values cannot be changed by the user The CCX Support options are only populated when the MX7 is connected to a Cisco CCX compatible network or AP Radio Measurement Threshold and Max Transmit Power values cannot be changed by the user The RSSI Control panel allows the user to set roaming support options RSSI Threshold default is 70 RSSI Reading Interval is 1 sec When the threshold reaches 70 the mobile device begins searching for a stronger AP signal every second until it locates an AP with a stronger signal MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN Configuration Utility 239 IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN U OK Configuration About Save amp Exit gt IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN U J RSSI Control Configuration abo gt Power Save Sav
220. mit a tone each time the volume increases or decreases in decibel range MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Software Setup 23 Applying the Protective Film to the Display First clean the display of fingerprints lint particles dust and smudges Remove the protective film from its container Remove any protective backing from the film sheet by lifting the backing from a corner of the film Discard the backing Apply the film to the screen starting at one side and smoothing it across the display If air bubbles appear raise the film slightly and continue smoothing the film across the display until it covers the glass surface of the display If dust lint or smudges are trapped between the protective film and the glass display remove the protective film clean the display and apply the protective film again Copy the MX7 LXEbook to the MX7 Optional Note The LXEbook user guides do not contain the illustrations and regulatory information contained in the full user guides on the LXE Manuals CD and on the LXE ServicePass website See the full format User Guide MX7 User s Guide on the LXE Manuals CD Mobile Device Required Adobe Acrobat Reader Version MX7 Windows CE PDF Viewer pre installed First using your desktop computer download LXEbook MX7 Users Guide from the LXE Manuals CD to your desktop computer Next refer to ActiveSync Processes and Initial Install in Chapter 3 of this guide before connecting the M
221. mpt should match the username typed in the LXE Login Utility MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Utilities 145 Odyssey Client Please enter your password unmask Authentication information Login name user3 Network wpaPEAP a m od f Odyss aca 4 21 Pm A fa Figure 3 45 Enter the Odyssey Client Username Password If the Login name displayed in the Odyssey Client password screen is not correct cancel the authentication by pressing the Esc key or tapping the Cancel button on the screen When the Odyssey Client password screen is cancelled the following message is displayed Odyssey Client Odyssey Client If you do not want to use Odyssey for your network connection you can disable it now You can re enable your Odyssey connection at any time by checking Connect to check box Do you want to disable your Odyssey connection Figure 3 46 Odyssey Client Password Screen Cancelled Select Yes by pressing Enter using the keypad or tapping the Yes button on the screen Note Sometimes the password prompt is displayed a second time If the password prompt is displayed again repeat the last two steps to cancel the password prompt Suspend and resume the MX7 by pressing the power key twice The LXE Login Utility screen is displayed to the user to enter a new username Repeat the process described previously in this section to connect E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference
222. n 1 Pulse dialing Disable call waiting dial z Dialing patterns ae Local Long Distance International a 9 1FG 9 011 EFG Figure 3 9 Dialing Tap the Edit button to make changes to Dialing properties Tap the and follow the instructions in Help MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 95 Display Access A Settings Control Panel Display Icon Select the Desktop image and set the display keypad backlight timers when on battery or external power Factory Default Settings Background Windows CE Tile Disabled Appearance Default Windows Standard Backlight Battery Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Timer 3 seconds External Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Timer 2 minutes Background Ir S n seran Figure 3 10 Display Background There is very little change from general desktop PC Display Properties Background options Select an image from the dropdown list or tap the Browse button to select an image from another folder to display on the Desktop then tap the OK box to save the change The change takes effect immediately E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 96 Settings Control Panel Options Appearance Display Properties fa OK se Background Appearance Scheme 32g s TESTE E d Save Delete Apply Normal 5 55 ER 7 x Item Desktop e tx Er
223. n above This example is shown only to aid in describing how the user can switch between applications using a stylus If RFTerm and Microsoft Word were the two applications locked a switching icon showing both applications is displayed on the screen Using a Hotkey Sequence One hotkey is defined for the end user to key in when switching between locked applications This is known as the Activation key The Activation key is assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter When the hotkey or hotkey sequence is pressed on the keypad the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background The previous application continues to run in the background but end user key presses affect the application in focus only MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Multi Application Configuration 159 Troubleshooting Multi Application AppLock The mobile device won t switch from Administration mode to end user mode e Ifthe configuration is valid for one application but not the other the switch to end user mode fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered e If two copies of the same application are configured but the application only allows one copy to run at a time for example Microsoft Pocket Word the switch to end user fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is
224. n the List Box and double click The match code text is moved to the lower left text box Make changes to the copied match code and select the Add button e To delete a match code highlight the code in the List Box and select the Remove button The match code is deleted from the list e After adding editing or removing match codes perform the Suspend Resume function to store your changes in the registry e Hex values can be entered by preceding the two digit hex value with Ox Control characters can also be entered using the hat delimited notation i e M for Carriage Return See Hat Encoding and Decimal Hexadecimal Chart at the end of this chapter e All keypad keys can be entered by typing the key Note No matching is done for barcodes using this option if they are not EAN128 barcodes MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 121 Stylus Access A Settings Control Panel Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel Double Tap Stylus Properties OK Lx Double Tap calibration Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above stylus do 2 50 mm E Figure 3 34 Stylus Double Tap Follow the instructions
225. n the upper RAM ball assembly to the base of the U bracket using the supplied bolts washers and screws E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 68 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle 3 Loosen the turnscrew on the RAM arm place the lower socket over the vehicle mount RAM ball then the other arm socket over the RAM ball on the U bracket 4 Tighten the arm turnscrew until the U bracket 1s secured to the RAM arm and the vehicle 5 Attach the Passive Cradle to the U Bracket using the Angle Adjust knobs Use both knobs to loosen and tighten the cradle to the U bracket while determining the best viewing angle 6 The passive vehicle mounted cradle is ready for use MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle 69 Periodically test the mounting device and retighten bolts and or knob as needed If the cradle becomes cracked or warped it must be replaced E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 70 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle E MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Chapter 3 System Configuration Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the MX7 Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the mobile device The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only because the configuration of your specific MX7 may vary The following sections provide a general reference for the configu
226. n to WPA PSK You must click on Corte o3 Se tH Tap the WEP PSK Keys button Config s settings Encryption None wpa PSK v Credentials WEP PSK Keys For Passphrase enter 8 63 chars For PSK enter 64 Hex chars Figure 5 16 PSK Entry Popup Enter the Passphrase in the PSK Entry popup text entry box This value can be a 64 hex character or an 8 63 byte ASCII value Tap OK Tap the Commit button to save the new profile configuration Perform a Warm Reset function to connect using the new profile configuration MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 191 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration uj Odyssey Client Icon Start the Funk Odyssey client configuration by tapping the Odyssey Client icon on the desktop or in the taskbar at the bottom right corner of the screen mn To create a Funk Odyssey Client user login please refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled LXE Login Utility For additional information on the Odyssey client see the Funk web site at www funk com Note LXE recommends using the Funk Odyssey client to configure the radio Wireless Zero Config is not recommended for configuring the radio although it can be used to reveal the IP address Prerequisites e Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point e WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys Odyssey Client Menu
227. nced Prom ET 86 Settings Control Panel OptiOns eene reete nena nan ba baba ana a bna rn Rana u rna a rn aurae 87 PRD OU ass ie edes Rar Er EE aa cetaceans A E 89 DOC BSSIDII y inne OE E OE UII E iade De E Wrap EFC tute O E 90 Adintustiauon FOR App LOCK ueste ete mew drtsstes t a a 90 Battery i cida siib bI cis U De see EI UR RQUN EHI blc UU eU v ERE QUE S UU Ee eue HN PEU ES UUb eum EUU Y v ESO be IT GUE been Ed REED AQUI meudess 91 C ettil odis oai uodiettates teme eris idee es usa E e Metas tale estu tcc s ru ANRA 92 pzuc Bur RUM P 93 JEU cm seca TE E ta nior teradeaneeiens RE 94 Lil QM 95 PBSC spi EE 95 JADDOOEIIGE oce reete ides pete etr rM We DEEP Se E es tr v ior E ista Ee heh ie tu vivet Or EN UR deta 96 pr dipl qe 96 Input Pariel iei ei HS Pob NOE ER pute UT bc O SRL EY EHE DEOR ENG EAE ev Pe seta 97 Internet ODLUODS capinas a e E EAO O AOE ia 98 OY OCA Mer 100 Kevmapsand Ponts Ph cavessedocswscasveveedesaa ies Ede UMS Ua n s patet Ie vEedute 100 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Table of Contents Mappable Keys MIXGE ts pii tase ENDRS HSNO A pe PERSE EUER Suv E I EU LE e VERE NEN UE POSEEN NES Eee SER un DS huc TTE Network and Dial up Connections eir PI De eos Feb E oo ette Ep ee e Rare feoda 104 Create a Connection Option socio eo pO ER Gro aet UE Ld Eph BI TUR PROMISE ED D DNE OE NR 104 OWED 105 PASS WOM mL 106 Trou
228. ncluded to force the system folders Desktop Fonts Programs etc to copy from the internal ATA card System to the Windows directory This is implemented as a persist key so the sequence of startup events can be controlled especially for AppLock The filename is a special internal trigger for the Launch utility to activate the CopyFolders function DO NOT EDIT OR ALTER THIS KEY OR IT MAY NO LONGER FUNCTION You may however change the Order or Delay values if necessary for a particular startup sequence HKEY LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist COP YFOLDERS FileName COPY FOLDERS FileCheck Order dword 0F To have files CAB EXE REG or WAV files loaded on startup when sequence of execution is not important you can put these files in the System Startup folder on the internal Flash card This is parsed by the Launch utility and these programs are started or executed REGEDIT EXE Before using REGEDIT EXE please refer to commercially available Microsoft S Power Tools for Windows manuals For example Microsoft Windows Registry Guide Second edition The Registry Editor allows viewing searching for items and changing settings in the registry The registry contains information about how the mobile device runs LXE recommends caution when inspecting and editing the Registry as making incorrect changes can damage the mobile device operating system LXE recommends making a backup copy of the registry before viewing or car
229. nd of the input field Use the BkSp key to erase LXE from the filename Type CAB and press the Enter key 6 0 ND Warm reset the mobile device by selecting Run from the Start menu type WARMBOOT in the Open edit control panel and press the Enter key MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Utilities 143 Using the Utility If multiple Profiles are configured on the mobile device LXE Login Utility changes the username for the active profile Important The profile must be changed before suspending the unit if the active profile username is to be changed when returning from Suspend Select the desired active profile by double tapping on the Odyssey Client icon on the Desktop Select the active profile by changing the selection in the drop down combo box below the Connect to checkbox am Eie Sesion Dslr 5 My Device My Documents ea LXE Login Utility Enter Login name LLNMGUTILO14 SIT1 LLNMGUTILO14 SIT1 Li Internet LXE RFTerm Explorer Pd LXE Login ET 1 53 Pm A E Figure 3 42 LXE Login Utility User Prompt The Login prompt is displayed at system boot and when resuming from suspend In the second example of the screen shown above RFTerm has been locked using AppLock and the prompt is displayed on top of the administrator locked RFTerm Note Focus remains on the login prompt until it is dismissed Nothing else can be done on the MXT until the user responds to the prompt The currently configured u
230. nd or corrective action Level Alt Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Application handle search failure The application being locked did not complete LOG ERROR initialization Application handle search OK The application initialized itself successfully LOG ERROR Application load failure The application could not be launched by AppLock the LOG ERROR application could not be found or is corrupted Backdoor message received The backdoor keys have been pressed The backdoor hotkeys provide a method for customer service to get a user back into their system without editing the registry or reloading the device LOG PROCESSING Cannot find kbdhook dll The load of the keyboard filter failed This occurs when LOG ERROR the dll is missing or is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting AppLock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Converted Pwd Converted password from wide to mbs LOG EX Could not create event The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator LOG ERROR EVT HOTKEYCHG Control panel The event could not be created Could not hook keyboard If the keyboard cannot be controlled AppLock cannot LOG ERROR process the hotkey This failure prevents a mode switch into user mode Could not start thread HotKeyMon The keyboard filter must watch
231. nd the host computer ActiveSync can be performed over serial USB or radio RF Using Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher you can synchronize information on your PC with the MX7 and vice versa Synchronization compares the data on the MX7 with the PC and updates both with the most recent data For example you can e Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your mobile device and PC Your files are automatically converted to the correct format e Back up and restore your mobile device data e Copy rather than synchronize files between your mobile device and PC e g the MX7 LXEbook the user s guide in CE compatible format e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode For example you can synchronize continually while connected to your PC or only when you choose the synchronize command e Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized Note By default ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information Use ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize The synchronization process makes the data in the information types you select identical on both your PC and your mobile device If an information type is selected that does not exist on the MX7 the data appears to transfer but it is ignored by the MX7 and not loaded When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your PC the ActiveS
232. nect Cable Multipurpose USB and Power MX7A052MULTICBLUSB Cable Multipurpose RS 232 and Power MX7A055MULTICBLDA9F Note USB will start automatically when the cable is connected From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC click on the Explore button which allows you to explore the MX7 from the PC side with some limitations You can copy files to or from the MX7 using drag and drop You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the Windows directory on the MX7 Technically the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as system files in the original build of the Windows OS image This however includes most of the files in the Windows directory For example you can drag the LXEbook MX7 User s Guide from your desktop computer to the My Documents folder on the MX7 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 132 Disconnect ActiveSync Get Connected Process Serial Connection e Disconnect the cable from the MX7 e Put the MX7 into suspend by tapping the red Power button e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the PC s status bar Then click the Disconnect button USB Connection e Disconnect the cable from the MX7 e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the PC s status bar Then click the Disconnect button IMPORTANT Do not put the MX7 into suspend while connected via USB The MX7 will be unable to connect to the h
233. ng cable into an AC wall outlet AC power is now being supplied to the power adapter Press the power cable connector pin from the power adapter into the connector on the USB Power or RS 232 Power cable attached to the base of the MX7 AC power is now being supplied to the MX7 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Hardware Setup 15 Connecting the Multipurpose USB Power Cable To MX7 To Power Cable lt _ To Desktop Laptop USB A Figure 1 13 Connect the USB Power Cable to the MX7 Port Connector A Squeeze the clips on the connector cable to open the catches in the connector assembly Firmly press Connector A into the connector at the base of the MX7 Release the clips in the connector cable Test the connection for stability before connecting the B or C connector Connector B Firmly push the power cable connector pin into connector B until you hear a slight click Plug the 3 prong cable into an AC wall outlet Connector C Insert the USB Type A plug into an appropriate USB port on a desktop laptop computer for ActiveSync communication Connecting the Multipurpose RS 232 Power Cable To MX7 To Power Cable B m To Desktop Laptop RS 232 Figure 1 14 Connect the RS 232 Power Cable to the MX7 Port Connector A Squeeze the clips on the connector cable to open the catches in the connector assembly Firmly press Connector A into the connector at the base of the MX7 Release the clips in the connector cable Test the conne
234. ng profiles LXE recommends using the defaults set by the manufacturer Odyssey Client Used for configuring Funk Odyssey client for radio security settings Note that only one radio client can be used at a time If Odyssey Client is present Summit Client is not present Summit Client Used for configuring Summit client for radio security settings Note that only one radio client can be used at a time If Summit Client is present Odyssey Client is not present My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications Start 4 Access programs select from the Favorites listing documents last worked on change view settings for the control panel or taskbar on line help run programs or place the unit into Suspend mode MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Desktop My Device Folders T Folder Description Preserved upon Reboot Application Data Data saved by running applications No My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications No Network Mounted network drive No Program Files Applications No System Internal SD Flash Card Yes Temp Location for temporary files No Windows Operating System in Secure Storage No E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 78 Start Menu Program Options Start Menu Program Options The following options represent the factory default program installation Your system may be different based on the software and hardware options p
235. nge input panel state Options Keys Small keys Use gestures Disabled Input Panel Properties Ea OK E Input Panel Current input method Allow applications to change the input panel state To quickly switch input methods tap the Input Panel arrow and then tap the desired method from the menu that appears DENM gor 2 90 m IL Figure 3 13 Input Panel Use this screen to make the Input Panel or the physical keypad primarily available when entering data Tap the Options button to set the size of the keys displayed on screen and whether gestures are enabled or disabled Tap the OK button to save any changes and exit or tap the X button to exit without saving any changes Tap the button for Help Note Check with your LXE representative for language packs as they become available E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 98 Settings Control Panel Options Internet Options Access Av Settings Control Panel Internet Options Set options for internet connectivity Internet Options General Connection Security pri A amp utodial name USB cien z Local Trusted site Search Page Network intranet gt tto www google com rn Access the Internet using a proxy server 1 User Agent requires browser restart E 4 Internet Default Windows CE v Port 80 This zone contains all Web sites you Cache Size in KB 512 haven t placed in other zones oO Bypass prox
236. nications Inc Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Java and Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S or other countries and are used under license RAM and RAM Mount are both trademarks of National Products Inc 1205 S Orr Street Seattle WA 98108 All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations When this document is in PDF format Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 2006 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Applies Important This symbol is placed on the product to remind users to dispose of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE appropriately per Directive 2002 96 EC In most areas this product can be recycled reclaimed and re used when properly discarded Do not discard labeled units with trash For information about proper disposal contact LXE through your local sales representative or visit www Ixe com Initial Release December 2005 Second Release August 2006 Revision Notice Notices Added WEEE statement Added trademarked statement for Summit Data Communications and Odyssey Client Entire Manual Noted the replacement of SE824 scanner wit
237. ns PC Connection Proper ia OK sc PC Connection Enable direct connections to the desktop computer When enabled connect to the desktop computer using USB Client Change Connection Warning Changing the connection may disable communications with your desktop computer Gre co 3 240 rm FA Figure 3 22 PC Connection Please refer to the Backup MX7 Files section later in this chapter for parameter setting recommendations E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 108 Settings Control Panel Options Power Access AY Settings Control Panel Power Please refer to Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout section titled Power Modes Factory Default Settings Battery Turbo Enabled Schemes AC Power User Idle 2 minutes AC Power System Idle 2 minutes AC Power Suspend 5 minutes Battery Power User Idle 3 seconds Battery Power System Idle 15 seconds Battery Power Suspend 5 minutes The mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired When the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes even when the device is idle Because of the cumulative effect and using the Battery Power Scheme Defaults
238. ns Exit Immediately exits the Odyssey client utility Changes are saved when the panel closes The Odyssey 1con remains in the toolbar Commands Odyssey Client Settings KAJUUEUCEJ Tools Help v Conne Scan APNort Reauthenticate Reconnect Status Status open Forget Temporary Trust Forget Password Network SSID APNorth Access point 00 A0 E8 45 42 C9 Packets in out 28 24 Details Reconnect Pol Figure 5 18 Odyssey Client Screens Commands Scan Displays a list of all wireless networks that are currently reachable Reauthenticate Selecting this option causes the Odyssey Client to reauthenticate your radio over the existing connection without starting a new connection If dynamic encryption keys are in use they are refreshed Reconnect The existing AP connection is disconnected and a new connection process to the selected wireless network is started Forget Temporary Trust Use this command to immediately discard the list of temporarily trusted servers Forget Password Use this command to immediately discard any typed passwords This will remove them from memory MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 193 Tools Odyssey Client Settings Commands WEHE Help A Connect to Import User Certificate Certificate Enroller lt APNorth gt SIM Card Manager Status suus Figure 5 19 Odyssey Client
239. ntrol Panel Mappable Keys Icon Use this option to assign key sequences to Diamond keys Factory Default Settings S5 Key Keypad Diamond 1 No sticky key Field Exit Shift Diamond 1 No key Orange Diamond 1 No key Blue Diamond 1 No key 32 Key Keypad Diamond 1 No sticky key Field Exit Shift Diamond 1 No key Orange Diamond 1 id Fixed setting not mappable Blue Diamond 1 No key Diamond 2 No sticky key No key Shift Diamond 2 No key Orange Diamond 2 Fixed setting not mappable Blue Diamond 2 Fixed setting not mappable Diamond 3 No sticky key No key Shift Diamond 3 No key Orange Diamond 3 Fixed setting not mappable Blue Diamond 3 Fixed setting not mappable Key 1 FIELD EXIT Shift feno key gt Shift feno key gt Shift feno key gt Blue fenokey gt m Blue smoke A Orange Jenokey gt m ie m Mappa o 3 56 aM DA e e Mappa B s sos D ay e Mappa Sr s 05 au DA 0 55 Key Diamond 1 32 Key Diamond 1 32 Key Diamond 2 Diamond 3 Figure 3 16 Mappable Keys Assign key sequence settings by selecting keys from the drop down boxes Tap the OK box to save the changes Tap the X box to ignore changes Tap the box for Help The changes take effect immediately E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 102 Settings Control Panel Options Mixer Access A Settings Control Panel Mixer Icon Adjust the volume record gain
240. ntrol Panel Options 87 Settings Control Panel Options Access A Settings Control Panel or My Device Control Panel link Getting Help Please tap the box to get Help when changing Settings options Option Function About Software hardware versions and network IP No user intervention allowed Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard audio display or mouse functions Administration LXE AppLock Administration utility See Chapter 4 for details Battery View voltage and status of the main and backup batteries Battery charge and discharge is performed using this option Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Date Time Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Display Set background graphic and scheme Set backlight properties and timers Input Panel Select the current key data input method Internet Options Set General Connection Security Privacy Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity Keyboard Select a Key Map or font Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate Mappable Keys Assign key presses to Diamond keys Mixer Adjust the input and output parameters volume sidetone and record gain for headphone software and microphone Mouse Set the double tap sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen Network an
241. nvalid ACTION code s The key scan code is specified as ACTION code but the ACTION code parsed is not recognized The following values are valid SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 POWER or BACKLIGHT Invalid keycode s The keycode parsed is not recognized The following values are valid e VK code from the VK code table below e x where x is an ASCII code e g A or e OPEN for unused entries will not do anything when pressed Invalid MAP value s The MAP value parsed is not one the following list MAP NORMAL MAP 2ND MAP SHIFT MAP 2NDSHF MAP 2NDSHIFT MAP VOLUM MAP VOLUME MAP CONTR MAP CONTRAST MAP BRITE or MAP BRIGHT Invalid MAPCNT 1 d valid The specified MAPCNT exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler Invalid MAPCOLS 1 d valid The specified MAPCOLS exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler Invalid MAPROWS 1 d valid The specified MAPROWS exceeds the limits of the KEYCOMP compiler MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 259 Invalid ROWCOL format A COLxROWX was expected but the format was not correct The only valid formats are COLxROWx COLxxROWx COLxROWXxx or COLxxROWXxx where xx are decimal numeric digits 0 9 Invalid scan code The scan code parsed is not recognized The scan code can take one of the following formats VK code x SHIFT VK code SHIFT x ACTION code CHANGE mapname OPEN Invalid section name s The section name parsed is invalid The
242. o the text field e To create a combination of numbers and letters before pressing Enter remember to tap the Alph key to toggle between Alpha and Numeric mode e When using a sequence of keys that do not include the Alph key but does include a sticky key press the sticky key first then the rest of the key sequence The keymaps keypress sequences are located in Appendix A Key Maps MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B The Keypads 49 Mappable Diamond Keys The Diamond keys can be programmed to perform specific functions For example using this Settings applet you could set the Diamond 1 key to function as an ESC key enabling you to use one keypress instead of two when you wanted to use the ESC function Setting the Diamond 1 key to function as an ESC key does not disable the function of the standard ESC key sequence Blue Alt forf x JOKE x foj x Mappable Keys Mappable Keys Key1 Key2 Key3 Mappable Keys Key 1 FIELD EXIT Key 1 Y Key 2 Shift eno key gt Shift eno key gt z Shift Bue lt nokey gt Rl Bue nokeys A Orange soke e no keys Fi e Mappa or 3 56 Au A i e Mappa o 5 05 u DA T Fl e Mappa Bo 2 05 au A Ci 55 Key Diamond 1 32 Key Diamond 1 32 Key Diamond 2 Diamond 3 Figure 2 8 Mappable Diamond Keys The Diamond 1 key always defaults to Field Exit on all keypads The Diamond 1 key defaults to Field Exit on both keypads All other
243. o thirds the width of the beam Figure 1 25 Scan Status LED The Scan Status LED oval shaped LED below keypad turns red when the laser beam is on Following a barcode scan and read the Scan Status LED turns green for two seconds and the MX7 beeps or vibrates indicating a successful scan If the scan was unsuccessful the Scan Status LED turns off and a different beep sequence is heard The laser engine and Scan Status LED automatically turn off after a successful or unsuccessful read The scanner is ready to scan again after the Scan key or trigger on the handle if installed is released or after the Scan Status LED turns off following a successful scan Voice Data Data is entered into the MX7 by speaking into the headset s microphone when prompted Please contact your System Administrator if assistance is needed with the voice software Tethered Scanners Tethered scanners are not supported on the MX7 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Saving Changes to the Registry 31 Saving Changes to the Registry The MX7 saves the registry when you e Tapthe a Run then type Warmboot Tap OK e Perform a Suspend Resume function by pressing the Pwr key and then pressing it again e Install Restart in the Start menu by a Run then type CTL RESTART and tap the OK button Tap Dd Restart The registry save process takes 0 3 seconds If nothing has been changed nothing is saved e g 0 seconds The registry is aut
244. obal Settings tab SUPT 3 emere ecce eerte nes 182 rra 32 Crab Lime tility s eere tete 140 H Handle TIustallati ni exotic iu Hee 11 Handling B atteties cero 58 Handstrap or Trigger Handle 8 Handstrap Install 3 emis 13 Hardware Config utati R c cate thei e be re teen 35 Help iiem eatur olia tabes 32 HKEY LOCAL MACHINE e 89 Hotkey AppLO6k 5 iii rete eiii 155 Single User AppLock sesessesss 161 Hotswapping allowed for Main Battery sess 57 hotswapping not allowed flashicards sigo IUE esses noieas 43 zip EP 37 SCAMMELS a essere apo te ERE er HERR EREE EES 40 HyperTerminal ACHVES YG s aieo nt itid ene leere ped ues 134 I Icons Desktop iiie ne ince 76 Idle l ime ett erret erts 96 IEC IPSA EEEE 281 IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN Configuration NOUN EY soa etc da 238 Imager Aperture clear eiie ence 6 Inbox Outl 6k un tetro 81 MX7 Reference Guide 290 Input panel virtual keyboard che 28 Input Panel properties senes 97 Install Mounting Brackets Vehicle 61 Install ActiveSync on Desktop or Laptop 128 Install MX7 LXEboo0k 5 egeo cene 23 Integrated barcode scanner port 40 Internal modems not supported by LXE een 94 Internal SD flas
245. ocessed independent of the overall keymap Currently these are only modifier keys The only recognized names are KEYSHIFT KEYALT KEY2ND and KEYCONTROL and these specify the row and column of these 4 specific modifier keys in COLXROWx format Note the row and column for these keys can be outside the keymap limits specified in the GENERAL section since these are not loaded as part of the keymap proper Map MAP MAP_NORMAL COLOROWO VK ESCAPE COLOROW1 VK_F1 There will be several 4 to 7 MAP sections each defining the keymap for a given combination of modifier keys The keyboard driver requires keymaps for normal no modifiers SHIFT only 2ND only and 2ND SHIFT combined The CTRL modifier and ALT modifier do not have individual keymaps the keystrokes are passed to the operating system which is allowed to parse these keys according to Microsoft specifications for example ALT keys are defined to only pulldown menus with no other function The only recognized value names are MAP and COLxROWx defining a key code The only valid values for MAP are MAP NORMAL no modifier keys MAP 2ND 2nd modifier only MAP SHIFT shift modifier only MAP 2NDSHIFT 2nd and shift modifiers together MAP NORMAL32 MX7 only no modifiers 32 key map MAP ORANGE32 MX7 only orange modifier 32 key map MAP BLUE32 MX7 only blue modifier 32 key map MAP SHIFT32 MX7 only shift modifier 32 key map
246. omatically during each reboot e finstalled with an Odyssey Client LXE Login Utility runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Start Menu Program Options 79 Communication ActiveSync Connect Access AY Programs Communication Note Some communication menu options require an external modem connection to the MXT Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE After a relationship partnership has been established with the MX7 and a desktop computer ActiveSync can synchronize using the radio link serial port or USB port on the MX7 Refer to ActiveSync Get Connected Process later in this chapter for more information and instruction To initiate synchronization or radio link from the mobile device that already has a relationship with the desktop computer tap Dd Programs Communication ActiveSync to begin the process For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host and to create the initial partnership for synchronizing over the radio The default connect setup is USB direct connect After a Connect setup is selected d Programs Communication Connect will start to connect to a host See Also Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 80 Start Menu Program Options Star
247. omatically saved every 20 minutes It is also saved every tenth time the registry settings are changed Registry settings are changed when control panel applet e g Date Time parameters are changed by the user and a warm boot was not performed afterward When you tap the a Run then type Coldboot and tap the OK button factory default registry settings are loaded during coldboot All changes and settings are lost E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 32 Getting Help Getting Help All LXE user guides are now available on one CD and they can also be viewed downloaded from the LXE ServicePass website Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE Manuals CD You can also get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals CD in the file titled Contacting LXE This information is also available on the LXE website Explanations of terms and acronyms used in this guide are located in the file titled LXE Technical Glossary on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website Manuals MX7 User s Guide English MX7 User s Guide German MX7 Multi Charger Analyzer User s Guide LXEbook MX7 User s Guide download to mobile device RFTerm Reference Guide CE API Programmers Guide Integrated Scanner Programmers Guide Accessories Note Items with a Green letter R in the second column are ROHS compliant Please contact your LXE representative when ordering ROHS compliant items as the pa
248. on function did not find the application LOG PROCESSING Exit DecryptPwd Exiting password decryption processing LOG PROCESSING Exit EncryptPwd Exiting password encryption processing LOG PROCESSING Exit FullScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen to full LOG PROCESSING screen Exit GetAppInfo Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the LOG PROCESSING application information from the registry Exit password dialog Exiting password prompt processing LOG PROCESSING Exit password dialog cancel Exiting password prompt w cancel LOG PROCESSING Exit password dialog OK Exiting password prompt successfully LOG PROCESSING Exit password timeout Exiting password timeout processing LOG PROCESSING Exit restart app timer Processing is at the end of the timer function LOG PROCESSING Exit TaskbarScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back to normal operation for the administrator LOG PROCESSING E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 168 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Exit ToAdmin Exiting the function that handles the mode switch into LOG PROCESSING admin mode Exit ToUser Exiting the user mode switch function LOG PROCESSING Exit ToUser Registry read failure The AppName value does not exist in the registry so user mode cannot be entered LOG PROCESSIN
249. on the screen and tap the OK box to save the changes The double tap changes take effect immediately Calibration Stylus Properties fof x Carefully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the target Double Tap Calibration Repeat as the target moves If your device isn t around the screen responding properly to your Press the Esc key to cancel taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate Recalibrate Stylus D o gt 2 51 mu A E Figure 3 35 Stylus Calibrate Press and hold the stylus on the center of the target as it moves around the screen Press Enter to keep the new calibration settings or Esc to cancel E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 122 Settings Control Panel Options System Access AY Settings Control Panel System Icon Review System and mobile device data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Factory Default Settings General N A Memory 1 3 storage 2 3 program memory Device Name MX7001 Device Description LXE MX7 General System Properties ki OK xc General Memory Device Name diie System Microsoft Windows CE Version 5 00 Build 1400 Copyright 2004 Microsoft Corp All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright law Computer Processor
250. ons E EQ MX7RG B 99 Factory Default Settings Proxy Server Disabled Bypass Proxy Disabled Security Allow cookies Enabled Allow TLS 1 0 security Disabled Allow SSL 2 0 security Enabled Allow SSL 3 0 security Enabled Warn when switching Enabled Privacy First party cookies Accept Third party cookies Prompt Session cookies Always allow Advanced Stylesheets Enable Theming Support Enable Multimedia All options enabled Security All options enabled Popups Block popups Disabled Display notification Enabled Use same window Disabled MX7 Reference Guide 100 Settings Control Panel Options Keyboard Access AY Settings Control Panel Keyboard Icon Set keypad key map and keypad key repeat delay and key repeat rate Factory Default Settings Keyboard Properties E3 OK x Repeat Enable Repeat Delay Short Key map peaa Rate Slow Key map Default V Enable character repeat Repeat delay Long E Short 3 3 0 01002 0 800 Sa E s yO slow Repeat rate Est Ca uu Tap here and hold down a key to test D o 2 40 pm A a Figure 3 15 Keyboard Select a key map using the drop down list Adjust the character repeat settings and tap the OK box to save the changes Tap the X box to ignore changes Tap the box for Help The changes take effect immediately
251. ontents of the Documents menu Factory Default Settings General Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled Advanced Expand Control Panel Disabled There are a few changes in the CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options When the taskbar is auto hidden press the Ctrl key then the Esc key sequence Blue Alt to make the Start button appear Taskbar and Start Menu OK x General Advanced Suto hide M Show Clock Figure 3 3 Taskbar General Tab E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 86 Start Menu Program Options Advanced Tab Expand Control Panel Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings Control Panel menu option When it is unchecked the Control Panel Properties screen is displayed Taskbar and Start Menu OK Ei uj Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Documents Bluetooth Config T Certificates Date Time ie Dialing A Display C3 Input Panel Internet Options a Keyboard xu Mappable Keys Ed PLE DA amp The Result of Expand Control Panel One Result of Expand Control Panel checkbox enabled checkbox disabled Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Recently Opened Document folder MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Co
252. op This will run the REGLOAD utility to put it into the registry and save the registry to non volatile flash The keymap is now a permanent part of the mobile device and the REG file is no longer needed unless it is necessary to perform a cold boot as cold booting returns the registry to factory defaults and it will be necessary to double tap the REG file again Once the keymap has been added to the registry it should appear in the Keyboard control panel as the name given in the MAPNAME field in the key file To activate the keymap select the keymap from the popup menu and close the control panel with the OK button To return to the default keymap select Default from the keymap popup and tap OK The compiler has three functional stages e First the input file is read and parsed for any syntax errors The data read is stored in internal tables e Second the data parsed from the input file is validated to see that all of the items required by the keyboard driver for normal operation are present e Third and finally the KEYCOMP REG file is written out in the format required by the REGLOAD utility on the Windows CE device MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 255 Keymap Source Format The source file DEFAULT KEY is supplied with the keymap compiler This is the commented source for the default keymap Default The comments in this file should make the majority of this document redundant There is a copy of t
253. open COL4ROW3 open COL4ROW4 open COL4ROW5 open COL4ROW6 2 COL4ROW7 open LP A A E COL5ROWO 6 COL5ROW1 open COL5ROW2 open COL5ROW3 open COL5ROW4 open COL5ROW5 open COL5ROW6 open COL5ROW7 open LP PE E I 2 COL6ROWO open COL6ROW1 open COL6ROW2 open COL6ROW3 open COL6ROW4 open COL6ROW5 open COL6ROW6 2 5 COL6ROW7 open LP E P M M E E COL7ROWO open COL7ROW1 open COL7ROW2 SHIFT VK_PAUSE COL7ROW3 VK_SCROLL COL7ROW4 VK_SNAPSHOT COL7ROW5 7 COL7ROW6 open COL7ROW7 open he name of this key doesn t matter he important part is the MAP value odes are defined in docs his is the map for keys with only SHIFT ct Q ch ct Map MAP MAP_SHIFT PEIEE E 2 EE COLOROWO SHIFT VK ESCAPE COLOROW1 SHIFT VK_F1 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 SHIFT VK_F2 COLOROW4 SHIFT VK_F5 COLOROWS SHIFT VK_F7 COLOROW6 SHIFT 8 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 266 Creating Custom Key Maps COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN1 COL1ROWO SHIFT Q COL1ROW1 SHIFT 9 COLIROW2 ACTION SCAN3 COLIROW3 SHIFT T COLIROWA SHIFT U COLIROW5 SHIFT 4 COLIROW6 SHIFT O COLIROW7 ACTION SCAN2 COL2ROWO SHIFT A COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 SHIFT D COL2ROW3 SHIFT G COL2ROW4 SHIFT J COL2ROW5 SHIFT 1 COL2ROW6 SHIFT L COL2ROW7 SHIFT 3 COL3ROWO SHIFT COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 SHIFT X COL3ROW3 SHIFT V COL3ROW4 SHIFT N COL3ROW5 SHIFT 0 COL3ROW6 SH FI VK_ LEFT COL3ROW7 SH FTI VK_TAB
254. or map MAP 2NDSHIFT There is no 2nd SHIFT keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for map MAP NORMAL There is no Normal keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for map MAP SHIFT There is no SHIFT keymap defined The keyboard driver requires this keymap to be defined This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead key2nd No 2ND modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyalt No ALT modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keycontrol No CTRL modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keydnarrow No down arrow definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of
255. ore pressing the desired key Shft Shift key D A Shift keypress ends a sticky key function The Shft key enables the shifted functions of the keypad This function is similar to a regular keyboard s Shift key Note that the Shift key only stays active for one keystroke Each time you need to use a Shifted function you need to press the Shft key before pressing the desired key When the Shft key is pressed the next key is determined by the major key legends i e the alpha keys display lower case letters when CAPS is On alpha characters are capitalized For example when CAPS is On and the Shft key and the G key are pressed a lower case g is displayed MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B The Keypads 53 Orange and Blue Keys Field Exit e e The Orange and Blue keys are sticky keys that when tapped activate the second functions of the keypad Printed above many keys are small characters in either orange on the left side of the key or blue on the right side of the key that represent the second function of that key Using the sticky key activates the second key function Note that the blue and orange sticky keys only stay active for one keystroke Each time you need to activate a second function you must press the Orange or Blue key To cancel a sticky key function before pressing another key press the same sticky key again Orange Key Tap the Orange key to enter orange mode Tap it again to cancel orange mode
256. ored on this device Figure 2 3 Flash Card Location Note As there is no card management software loaded on the MX7 LXE recommends purchasing preformatted Flash cards from LXE as the cards have been tested and qualified for use by the MX7 see Accessories LXE does not support other types of Flash cards at this time Contact your LXE representative for the latest information about the availability of LXE qualified flash cards for the MXT The MX7 has one internal SD Flash card port The radio drivers are stored on the card in the SD slot under the main battery pack During the boot process the bootloader loads the operating system the radio driver and any saved parameters MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Flash Cards 43 Flash Card Installation Removal Equipment required None e LXE recommends that installation removal of cards be performed on a clean well lit surface e Anti static protection is required when installing removing cards Not supplied by LXE e If you anticipate keeping a card out of the MX7 for a long period of time place it in a static free storage container Store in an area that is protected from dirt moisture and electrostatic contact Installation Place the MX7 into Suspend Mode Disconnect the AC adapter from the MX7 Loosen then remove the main battery pack Lift the rubber barrier and hold it aside Do not remove it from the battery well Slide the flash card into the recessed sl
257. ories for the LXE SDK Kit part number Note Please contact your LXE representative to get access to CAB files as they are released by LXE MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Installed Software 73 Software Applications The following applications are included WordPad was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE Pocket Inbox Viewer Word Viewer Excel Viewer PDF Viewer Image Scanner Wedge LXE developed Media Player ActiveSync Internet Explorer Note that the Viewer applications allow viewing documents but not editing them Software Backup Application programs and data that are normally RAM resident are backed up via ActiveSync as well as being stored on the internal SD card The operating system is on internal SD card and does not need backup Registry configuration is backed up to internal SD card automatically using the hive registry setup from CE 5 0 Registry backup occurs on every Suspend WARMBOOT EXE Restart or reboot operation Version Control Version numbers are applied to the boot loader and the OS image independently The version information stored consists of the LXE build number plus the date and time of compile in lieu of a build number These version numbers are stored in non volatile storage where the user cannot inadvertently modify them A control panel and API is provided so the user can reference the version numbers for support purposes The MX7 has a unique 128 bit ID code as
258. ost PC when it resumes operation Radio Connection e Put the MX7 into Suspend Mode by tapping the red Power button e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the PC s status bar Then click the Disconnect button Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a mobile device and a PC A partnership is defined by two objects a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is first created An ActiveSync partnership for a unique client can be established to two hosts If the MX7 is cold booted the random number is deleted and the partnership with the last one of the two hosts is also deleted The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all devices having a partnership with it Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if they have the same name ay Settings Control Panel System Device Name If the cold booted MX7 tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC a new random number is generated for the MX7 and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the MX7 be changed If the MX7 is associated with a second host changing the name will destroy that partnership as well This can cause some confusion when re establishing partnerships with hosts MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B UU ActiveSync Get Connected Process 133 ActiveSync Troubleshooting ActiveSync on the host returns to the Get Connecte
259. ot label side uppermost until it clicks into place Replace the rubber barrier and the main battery pack and perform a warm reset Always perform a warm reset when exchanging one Flash card for another RIS Removal Place the MX7 into Suspend Mode Disconnect the AC adapter from the MX7 Loosen then remove the main battery pack Lift the rubber barrier and hold it aside Do not remove it from the battery well Carefully slide the flash card out and away from the recessed slot Bea E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 44 Power Modes E Power Modes 1 On 2 Tap Power key or Suspend timer has timed out 3 Power key any key trigger press or touchscreen tap Suspend 5 Backup battery and main battery depleted 6 Off 7 Power Restored and On key pressed 6 4 0 606 090 S Figure 2 4 Power Modes On Suspend and Off On Mode The Display When the display is On e the keyboard touchscreen and all peripherals function normally e the display backlight is on until the Backlight timer expires The MX7 After a new MX7 has been received a charged main battery inserted and the Power key tapped the MX7 is always On until both batteries are drained completely of power When the main battery and backup battery are drained completely the unit is in the Off mode The unit transitions from the Off mode to the On mode when a charged main battery is inserted or external power is applied and the Power key is pre
260. ot correct authentication will fail Installing User Certificate Navigate to Start Settings Control Panel Certificates Choose My Certificates in the drop down list Tap the Import button File View 7 Certificates Ei oK x 2 Stores About Accessibility My Certificates sw Certificates 3 Lists vour personal digital certificates Bluetooth Config Ee E d P0 iew b Dialing Display Figure 5 53 Install User Certificate MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 215 CEBIT Select a Cer ale 2 lok x Select a Cer B System Ex System Documents and Settings O Favorites js RFEngCA cer Name user2 cer Type Certificates x mm EAE Figure 5 54 Install Private Key for Certificate Tap OK to import from file Navigate to the location where the certificate file was copied Choose the certificate then navigate to the same place and choose to install the private key for the certificate Enter the password for the private key Private Key Password OK x a Figure 5 55 Enter Password for Private Key E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 216 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration To verify the user certificate navigate to Start Settings Control Panel Certificates My Certificates Tap the certificate and choose View Tap Private Key and look in the details pane to make sure the ke
261. p Battery Discharging The MX7 has a backup battery that is designed to provide limited duration electrical power in the event of main battery failure The backup battery is a 50 mAh Nickel Cadmium NiCd battery that 1s factory installed in the unit The energy needed to maintain the backup battery near full charge at all times comes from the MX7 main battery It takes several hours of operation before the backup battery is capable of supporting the operation of the mobile device The duration of backup battery life is dependent upon operation of the MX7 its features and any operating applications The backup battery has a minimum service life of two years The backup battery is replaced by LXE The backup battery can be discharged recharged and conditioned using a CE Control Panel applet Tap Dd Settings Control Panel Battery then tap the Discharge button E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 58 Power Supply Handling Batteries Safely Never dispose of a battery in a fire This may cause an explosion Do not replace individual cells in a battery pack Do not attempt to pry open the battery pack shell Be careful when handling any battery If a battery is broken or shows signs of leakage do not attempt to charge it Dispose of it using proper procedures Caution Nickel based cells contain a chemical solution which burns skin eyes etc Leakage from A cells is the only possible way for such exposure to occur In this ev
262. p Separator is translated to GS Strip Leading is set to 2 In this case the Group Separator is translated to GS and then the GS is stripped by the Strip Leading setting rather than the Group Separator and A being stripped 3 If Translate All is enabled and replacements are assigned the assigned replacements take precedence over the default one to one translation enabled by Translate all For example if Translate All is enabled and Carriage Return is replaced by J the value OxOd in the barcode prefix and suffix are replaced with CTRL Shift J instead of CTRL Shift M keystrokes in Key Message mode 4 Since the assigned replacements are applied before the Translate All is performed if a control character is set to Ignore drop by the assigned replacements it is discarded MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 115 before the Translate All processing is performed and is therefore not translated 5 Since the assigned replacements are applied before the Translate All is performed if a control character is set to text by the assigned replacements the text is substituted for the control character In this case the control character would not be in the data processed by the Translate All feature 6 If the application that is accessing the Barcode Wedge in Block mode supports Hat encoded characters like M hat encoded characters can be assigned in the defined action and th
263. parator VK_CONTROL 0x11 down VK_SHIFT 0x10 down WM_CHAR 0x36 down WM CHAR 0x36 up VK SHIFT up VK CONTROL up RS le d Record Separator VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK SHIFT 0x10 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down US If 2 Unit Separator WM CHAR 0x1f VK PACKET 0xe7 up VK SHIFT 0x10 up VK CONTROL 0x11 up E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 286 ASCII Control Codes E MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B 32 key keypad oen 46 55 key 5250 keypad sssssssssss 46 55 key k yp d e ace e rtc 46 A About software hardware version network IP 89 AC External Power Supply How to 14 AC Power Adapter Assembly esatto mai ties 14 Accessibility settings 0 ceeecseeccsseereeneceeeeeeneees 90 ANCCeSSOFES s oet ip Ete e try 32 Electrostatic Discharge eese 9 Installiig ictor tetti certe deeds e cesses 9 Activation Key cete i reis 154 Activation Key APPLOCK iato ed bt Pe Eee 10 ActiveSync Backup Data Files nere 130 Cables ien crt eei s 129 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection 132 Connect cables sss 131 Connection serial or USB 128 Disconnect How to steer ete eevee 132 Explot e ii eee RE rH 131 le oll ee A ete er eeer preset rrr ener rere 127 Initial installation e
264. pear in the Version window The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 90 Settings Control Panel Options Accessibility Access AY Settings Control Panel Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard sound display mouse automatic reset and notification sounds function There are a few changes from general desktop Accessibility options Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Use StickyKevs if vou want to use Shift Ctrl or Alt key by pressing one key at a time Use ToggleKeys if you Cat want to hear tones when 5 pressing CapsLock NumLock and ScrollLock Use Togglekeys rca s Figure 3 5 System Accessibility The following exceptions are due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system e Ifthe ToggleKeys option is selected please note that the ScrollLock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do e Ifthe SoundSentry option is selection please note that ScrollLock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do Administration For AppLock Access AY Settings Control Panel Administration Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated single or multiple application devices In other words only the application or feature specified in the AppLock
265. planation and or corrective action Processing is at the beginning of the function that retrieves the application information from the registry Level LOG PROCESSING 167 Enter password dialog Entering the password dialog processing LOG PROCESSING Enter password timeout Entering the password timeout processing LOG PROCESSING Enter restart app timer Some application shut down before AppLock can stop it In these cases AppLock gets notification of the exit When the notification is received AppLock starts a timer to restart the application This message logs that the timer has expired and the processing is at the beginning of the timer function LOG PROCESSING Enter TaskbarScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen to non full screen mode and enable the taskbar LOG PROCESSING Enter ToAdmin Entering the function that handles a mode switch into LOG PROCESSING admin mode Enter ToUser Entering the function that handles the mode switch to LOG PROCESSING user mode Enter verify password Entering the password verification processing LOG PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindows Found There are two exit paths from the enumeration function This message denotes the enumeration function found the application LOG PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindows Not found There are two exit paths from the enumeration function This message denotes the enumerati
266. play until a valid password is entered End User Internet Explorer AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer such as HTML pages and JAVA applications The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer s address bar To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode End user Internet Explorer EUIE The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re enable the address bar The administrator specifies the EUIE by simply checking the Internet checkbox in the Control tab of the Administrator applet The internet application should then be entered in the Application text box If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the device is desired it should be treated like any other application This means that IEXPLORER EXE should be specified in the Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line In this case do not check the Internet checkbox Security Panel Administrator Control Control Security Status Hot Key Ctri Shift A Password Confirm Password a Figure 4 8 Security
267. plications The end user can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes Each application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute any other applications Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined Windows CE key combinations such as close X icon File Exit File Close Alt F4 Alt Tab etc are disabled The Windows CE desktop icons menu bars task bar and system trays are not visible or accessible Task Manager is not available If the end user selects File Exit or Close from the applications menu bar the menu is cleared and nothing else happens the application remains active Nothing happens when the end user taps on the Close icon on the application s title bar and the application remains active Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker Windows accelerator keys such as Alt F4 are disabled E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 152 Passwords Passwords A password mus
268. puter and the MX7 successfully connect the initial ActiveSync process is complete Change Connection Parameters Tap the A Settings Control Panel PC Connection Tap the Change Connection button From the popup list choose Option Description USB Default This will set up the MX7 to use the USB port direct COMI 57600 This will set up the MX7 to use COM 1 direct at 57600 baud e Tap OK and ensure the check box for Enable direct connections to the desktop computer is checked e Tap OK to return to Settings e Select Scanner and ensure the integrated scanner is set to a port that is different than the Connect port COM 1 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 130 ActiveSync Get Connected Process Backup MXT7 Files Use the following to backup data files from the MX7 to a desktop or laptop PC using the appropriate cables and Microsoft s ActiveSync Prerequisites Initial ActiveSync partnership between the MX7 and the target PC has been completed After the partnership has been established with the mobile device and the host computer ActiveSync can be performed over Serial USB or radio RF Connection Settings Click Get Connected to connect your mobile device to this B computer Status Waiting for device to connect Get Connected I Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port COM1 E Status COM port is available IV Allow USB connection with this desktop comput
269. r You can replace the main battery by first placing the device in Suspend Mode then removing the discharged main battery and installing a charged main battery within a five minute time limit or before the backup battery depletes When the main battery is removed the device enters Critical Suspend state the MX7 remains in Suspend mode the display is turned off and the backup battery continues to power the unit for at least five minutes Though data is retained the MX7 cannot be used until a charged main battery pack is installed After installing the new battery press the Power key Full operational recovery from Suspend can take several seconds while the radio if installed is reestablishing an RF link If the backup battery depletes before a fully charged main battery can be inserted the MX7 will turn Off Low Battery Warning It is recommended that the main battery pack be removed and replaced when its energy depletes When the main battery Low Battery Warning appears the Status LED remains a steady red perform an orderly shut down minimizing the operation of any installed devices and insuring any information is saved that should be saved Note Once you receive the main battery Low Battery Warning you have approximately 5 minutes to perform an orderly shutdown and replace the main battery pack before the device powers off The Low Battery Warning will transition the mobile device to Suspend before the device powers off Backu
270. r CE 283 List of Valid VK Codes for CE This is the list of codes parsed by KEYCOMP compiler Refer to Microsoft Windows documentation for further clarification of the meaning of these key codes Any VK keys not defined here are not valid for use under Windows CE VK ADD VK F3 VK NUMPADO VK APOSTROPHE VK F4 VK OEM CLEAR VK APPS VK F5 VK OFF VK ATTN VK F6 VK PA1 VK BACK VK F7 VK PAUSE VK BACKQUOTE VK F8 VK PERIOD VK BACKSLASH VK F9 VK PLAY VK BROWSER BACK VK FINAL VK PRINT VK BROWSER FAVORITES VK HANGUL VK PRIOR VK BROWSER FORWARD VK HANJA VK RBRACKET VK BROWSER HOME VK HELP VK RBUTTON VK BROWSER REFRESH VK HOME VK RCONTROL VK BROWSER SEARCH VK HYPHEN VK RETURN VK BROWSER STOP VK INSERT VK RIGHT VK CANCEL VK JUNJA VK RMENU VK
271. r Certificate for PEAP GTU 5 siecle EP rre Pk ere FR Eb Ea Reda 211 BAPE AP Method iino ta d SEO Eg ERR WERE DN STU EE SERE 212 Create Username atid Password Method redes eri vetere b rar bci E ci bebida 212 Enter Password for EA PoL EAP siete tee EP HAIR ETUR UR pCUIE on ure PECORE 213 Install User Certificate 35 nsn e nt edv ne dae inre td m ain Re HERE ds 214 Install Priyate Key for C erbe deua iu eec Ope rot erbe RESENA e AE GEER soins exp EEEN ESERE Ea RERO 215 Enter Password for Private Keys wsireatevecs escribir net ulpa 215 Veriky User Cert eae acierto nt p Den ocv n oa er die itn 216 Authenticate a LISebo eene OH GRE HERR Delete ned NH IRSE MM ID HPHUEHP RR US 217 Completed Network Config ration iiec cr I EVO ECHO REEL ONERE ERE ARE 217 Choose ihe New PFODIG 6 ded der he PH r e DEREN Abe Y avis seaedeaauctvareebariaces 218 Status is open And authenticated iiss cece anite RHOD ation men pae det ben 218 settings Detailed Status Menu Optblon e pad voe et aso e E 219 Detailed Status is Displayed Signal Authentication Encryption eene 219 Euablethe Validate server certilicate Checkbox eode m a ida ERR ER 220 Enter NaMe or NebWOLE ui rv e e rere beri bee bob EP T orig ties ROE 221 E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure 5 70 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 5 74 Figure 5 75 Figure 5 76 Figure 5 77 Figure 5 7
272. r Locations cis ke oi HERE UO EURO EUREN URBE E ANEH PURI EIN CR NERA 22 Figure 1 20 Volume amp Sounds Proper es isi Here espere o o RE EH eier FE brE OE HEEL UP OE MER rp aE IE EE RiR 22 EipurcL 21 OE e SIOPES Ia Ie Deis ipio var Eris DO Hir CH Ee RENE E A E sants ee RE o FRE pr E FR XS ERE RETO LESER 26 Eiented 22 View Certificate Details iise eiie tatit PER bd 27 Figure 1 23 Input Panel Vart al Keyboard cs oii e eee EHE Ek Ii ense iro Pudet tase aea ee emanate 28 Lieume 1 24 Scan Deamgiasnd ct un cott o M EO RICETTE rte EE 30 Lieure 1 25 Scan Status LED 55d eo tien PORE RO ERR P Eo ee nir be EISE 30 Figure 23 Sy ster Haid Wane a isis inde eb Ae EEEE EAE Ub DRAN D ie ANE AEAEE NE AEEA AE DRE PRECES PERI ER FERRI ERER 35 Fieue2 2 COMI BOftzcciotonmmenc emnt tx maintenir ien es ate Gr ovre aser eee 38 Figure 2 3 Flash Card LE68001 csser irronneen euu e epe cack vin Reb Er ese acd soni eR OE VEE Re RES Re SERE VER TPES OET 42 Figure 2 4 Power Modes Ori Suspend arid OTf iiie peteret trees woes eps E XEESE cog aeaa Y RE osa VER eR RUE Onset 44 Figure 2 5 The 32 key and 55 key Keypads eere e nea IR EEEE 46 Eivure2 6 The ANSI Batch Keypad nnee ea unis x RR ORE Perd AA RENE Da HAE CUR eva esr ERREUR ODE EN 47 Eier 2 7 Ie32 R6y Keypad eaoin ipie Eae ERE UE De Ro eren ERA SR ELO ING p C Dee pelos rt ped ea EA 48 Figure 2 5 Mappable Diamond K6y8 sooo era nO me PEE EE e E p En cU Bae 49 Fignte2 9 TouchScteet xi neeaaea vas cs O ONE eto HU
273. r eer terre 76 Suspend mode ror pee 45 Suspend mode and ActiveSync 41 Switch applications Multi AppL ock iin rap nett 10 System Configuration sse 71 System Hardware Configuration 35 System Memory 5 sep dre n ORE Dk ee ora 36 System Status LED enitn 51 T Taskbar defaults iere Re eripe 85 Technical specifications bootloddgE ottiene 74 versiori Control sisirin eme eth 73 Technical Specifications sess 279 Terminal Emulation parameters 24 Tethered Scanners octets 30 Three keypads sis sa 2o ntoieere tients 46 a oi E cutus ur 95 96 Mime Zone eoe a EEEE 93 Timer battery power timet eo oec oes 21 cumulative effect i iiobis 21 external power timer sese 21 Touchscreens e portet p be tert 55 adjustment conr edere te 20 aiid data entry cnet desist 29 Keypad Shortcuts oe ee cma ches 19 Touchscreen stylus tap sess 19 E EQ MX7RG B Transcribet oi ere cista 84 Translate Al th temet 115 Translate control codes ssessssss 115 Transmissive Display sees 55 AG BOF m 8 Troubleshooting ActlVeSyne an ocasion i OR Fe canes 133 ADpLOCk sinn tet te EE Re iniisa 10 AppLock Passwotd aee tren 152 Coldb96t s rer edi n trs 141 Lo pith utility eoe crece eher meet tea 10 Multi Application AppLock
274. ration of the MX7 and some of its optional features Note LXE recommends frequently charging the MX7 using an external power source to ensure continuous charging of the backup battery Windows CE 5 0 For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE ERIS 5 0 user s guides or the Windows CE on line Help application installed with the MX7 This chapter s contents assumes the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows XP or 2000 desktop computers Therefore the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the MX7 and its Windows CE environment Note The MX7 reloads the operating system upon every warm boot or cold boot Anything not saved or preserved to the registry is lost In warm boot the OS and the CAB files are reloaded from the internal SD card and the preserved registry is also reloaded During cold boot the system behavior is identical to warm boot with the addition that the registry is erased forcing the MX7 to reboot with factory defaults The registry is recreated when 20 minutes of uptime elapses or upon the first save or suspend function E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 72 Installed Software Installed Software Note Some standard Windows options require an external modem connection Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE When you order an M
275. rcode and Advanced panels are not available if there is no integrated scanner or a non Symbol scan engine installed in the MX7 No Code ID Default All symbology IDs are transmitted This means that by default all good scan barcodes are sent to the application just as they are received from the scanner regardless of any possible symbology ID attached The Strip Code ID radio button is unavailable when No Code ID is enabled AIM Code ID Enabling the Strip Code ID checkbox ensures the 3 character AIM Code ID symbology is stripped off by the WEDGE before the barcode is made available to the application Disable Data inludes Symbol Code ID if the AIM Code ID parameter is enabled When Strip Code ID is disabled unchecked the Code ID is included in the barcode data being matched Symbol Code ID Enabling Strip Code ID ensures the 1 character Symbol Code ID symbology is stripped off by the WEDGE before the barcode is made available to the application Disable Data includes AIM Code ID if the Symbol Code ID parameter is enabled When Strip Code ID is disabled unchecked the Code ID is included in the barcode data being matched MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 119 Strip Code ID Enabling this parameter removes the number of characters specified by AIM Code ID or Symbol Code ID radio button setting before the barcode is sent to the application Scanner Control Main comi Barcode Data include
276. rd Previous Next nen I 1 gt ley db oays Lo 10 36 au A 2 Figure 5 51 Create Username and Password Method Enter a Username For the username Password tap the radio button for either Prompt for password or Use the following password Tap the OK button then Finish MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 213 Odyssey Client Please enter your password Odyssey Client 1 Settings Commands Tools Fk Connect to unmask Authentication information Login name user2 Network wpaLEAP Status open and authenticated Network SSID wpaLEAP Access point 00 0F 34 D7 0C 90 Packets in out 3 4 9 ewe Figure 5 52 Enter Password for EAP LEAP When prompted for the password enter the valid password to authenticate Once authenticated the Status shows as open and authenticated E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 214 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration EAP TLS Authentication Configuration To authenticate using the EAP TLS protocol you will need a user certificate file and a private key file Once you have the user certificate files run the certificate installer from the Microsoft control panel as described in the section titled Root Certificates Note It is important that all dates are correct on the CE devices when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is n
277. required by the CE 5 0 specification This ID number is generated by the boot loader This ID code is available in the control panel and via a Win32 standard API In addition an API is provided to return a standard LXE copyright string so that applications may reference this to be sure they are running on an LXE mobile device for licensing purposes See Accessories for the LXE MX7 SDK Kit part number E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 74 Installed Software Boot Loader The MX7 supports a proprietary boot loader It is the responsibility of the boot loader to Initialize all system hardware Load code into internal FPGA device s Load the OS image from SD card to DRAM Initiate OS startup Handle wakeup from system suspend loading saved state Handle copying a new boot loader from SD card to internal flash The MX7 reloads the OS every time during warm boot or cold boot In Warm Boot i e the user executes a Warm Boot the OS and the CAB files are reloaded from the internal SD card and the preserved registry is also reloaded Anything else user data which was not preserved in the registry is lost During Cold Boot i e user executes a Cold Boot utility the system behavior is identical to Warm Boot with the addition that the registry is reloaded with factory defaults The SD card holds user applications and CAB files The SD card is mapped to the System folder in the Windows CE file system JAVA Option Installed by LX
278. rfengca cer Name Type Certificates m FIO ceniti er 2 21 rma Figure 5 88 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap OK The certificate is now shown in the list Certificates Ea OK ES Lists your personal digital certificates Import View Remove ISO en iore ma pn Figure 5 89 Certificate Listing Highlight the certificate you just imported and tap the View button E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 236 User Certificates Certificate Details Friendly Name Field Not Present Figure 5 90 Private Key Not Present From the Field pull down menu select Private Key e Ifthe private key is present the process is complete e Ifthe private key is not present import the private key To import the private key tap OK to return to the Certificates screen Tap import Figure 5 91 Browsing to Private Key Location Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the private key file change the Type pull down list to Private Keys select the certificate desired and tap OK Enter the password for the certificate 1f appropriate MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B User Certificates 237 Tap View to see the certificate details again present RY Oo cenit QF amp gt 2 41 mu DA a Figure 5 92 P
279. rivate Key Present The private key should now say Present If it does not there is a problem Possible items to check e Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file as shown earlier in this section If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file generate a new certificate and follow the import process again e Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name for example mx 7user cer for the certificate and mx7user pvk for the private key file If the file names are not the same rename the private key file and import it again E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 238 IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN Configuration Utility IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN Configuration Utility Access WiFi toolbar icon or Start Programs Radio Config Utility Kr WiFi icon in Toolbar The Radio Config Utility can be used to set the radio power management antenna diversity and roaming profiles Currently LXE recommends using the default values The WiFi utility is installed upon each cold reset and warm reset and the icon is minimized to the toolbar IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN U OK IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN U fi BJIEEE 902 119 Wireless LAN u OK CCX Support RSSI Contrc CCX Support RSSI Control confi gt CCX Support Options Roaming Support Options These CCX options are only used when connected to a Cisco CCX compatib
280. rk Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions Please see your System Administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements Note lt is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail Default profile LXE recommends editing the Default profile instead of creating new profiles Important Perform a Warm Reset or Suspend Resume after changing parameters to save the changed parameters in the registry Switching profiles Successfully connecting after switching from one profile to another may take up to 30 seconds from the moment the Is not authenticated message is displayed Adding changing or LXE recommends performing a Warm Reset function or renaming profiles Suspend Resume after tapping the Commit button Start the Summit Utility by tapping the Summit Client icon Tap the Admin Login button on the Main panel Enter the Administrator password and tap OK Tap the Config tab Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to Summit Client Util ok x this profile Main Config status Diags Glob _ Config a x SDC Set Auth Type to Open Set EAP Type to None Set Encryption to None You must click on 3 OAE Re Th Tap the Commit l button to save the new Config s settings prof
281. rs establishes the name of the Config or Profile Options are Default or ThirdPartyConfig SSID Blank A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters Establishes the Service Set Identifier SSID of the WLAN to which the radio connects Client Name Blank A string of up to 16 characters The client name is assigned to the radio and the device using the radio The client name may be passed to networking radio devices e g Access Points PowerSave CAM Power save mode is Off The radio is in Contantly Awake Mode CAM Tx Power Maximum Maximum setting regulates Tx power to the Max power setting for the current regulatory domain Options are Maximum 50mW 30mW 10mW or 1mW Bit Rate Auto Setting the rate to Auto will allow the Access Point to automatically negotiate the bit rate with the compact flash radio Options are Auto 1 Mbit 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 or 54 Mbit E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 180 Summit Client Configuration Parameter Default Explanation Radio Mode B G rates Specify 802 11g and or 802 11b when communicating with the Access Point Options are B rates only or B G rates Auth Type Open 802 11 authentication type used when associating with the Access Point Options are Open LEAP or Shared key EAP Type None Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP type used for 802 1x authentication to the Access Point Options are None LE
282. rt number may have changed Items without the letter R may have received ROHS compliance after this guide was published MX7 Main Battery Lithium Ion R MX7A380BATT 5 Unit Main Battery Charger US power cord Includes analyzing FA R MX7A385CHGRSUS capabilities 5 Unit Main Battery Charger no power cord Includes analyzing poi R MX7A386CHGRSWW capabilities MX7 Passive vehicle cradle Does not support charging or ae MX7A007VMCRADLE communication U Bracket included R RAM mount kit for MX7 Vehicle Bracket This kit does NOT include the Cradle Attaches to U Bracket Beo DOSAGE Replacement MX7 Hand Strap R MX7A401HANDSTRAP Carry case for MX7 with no handle includes shoulder strap R MX7A402CASENHDL Carry case for MX7 with handle includes shoulder strap R MX7A403CASEHDL MX7 Voice Application case with belt R MX7A404CASEVRNHDL Holster for MX7 with handle belt NOT included R MX7A405HOLSTERHDL MX7 Padded handle with rubber overmold and two finger trigger R MX7A406HANDLE includes wrist strap MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Getting Help 33 Holster for MX7 with no handle belt not included MX7A407HOLSTERNHDL Black rubber protective boot MX7A488PROTBOOT Yellow rubber protective boot MX7A489PROTBOOTYEL Carry case for MX7 with Gearkeeper retractor MX7A408RETRACTORCASE Non handle hols
283. rted or detected by host Or Incorrect or broken data lines in cable E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 134 ActiveSync Get Connected Process ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray The host doesn t know you are trying to connect May mean a bad cable with no control lines connected or an incompatible baud rate Try the connection again with a known good cable Testing connection with a terminal emulator program or a serial port monitor You can use HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulator program to do a rough test of ActiveSync Set the terminal emulator to 8 bits no parity 1 stop bits and the same baud rate as the connection on the CE device After selecting Start Programs Communication Connect on the CE device the word CLIENT appears on the CE display in ASCII format When using a serial port monitor you see the host echo CLIENT followed by SERVER After this point the data stream becomes straight binary PPP Drop down list is blank in the ActiveSync dialog box The radio link is broken Make sure that the radio has a valid IP address MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Utilities Utilities 135 These utilities are pre loaded by LXE LAUNCH EXE All applications to be installed into memory are normally in the form of Windows CE CAB files The CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image and need to be copied to the mobile device using an internal Flash card or
284. ry LOW aee eerie eet deze 57 Low Warning timing eee 56 Mali aeneo ei D ED irs 56 Main Battery Pack details 56 PubliGatiOni dieron e erp ees 58 Safety CC 58 SATUS e 56 Status LED cis rttete eei pe 12 Battery Auto Turn Off entes 96 Battery Power Scheme ocio ee 21 Battery voltage and status display 91 Baud R t sies nia aeree 110 Boot loader responsibility sss 74 C CAB files t eie rne RE 136 CAB Files on the Flash Card 126 Cable Adapter A dio ee retos 7 Multipurpose RS 232 and Power 7 Multipurpose USB and Power 7 RS232 PC port to DO male sssess 7 Calibrate touchscreen 20 Calibration 2 rn mettait detto 121 CapsLock Conflguring a ii odit e pe e P e Ge ancien 140 CapsLock mode function sssss 54 COX SUDDOFU attt te o RR UHR 238 Certificates siu seu detur uta eR 92 ROOUG Annie ret Gn v eR ER enge 225 USE 229 Change the Time and Date n esscesese 9 Change the volume setting 22 Character Recognition To chsoreeti 2 eterne bnc 84 Charger battery sien cvete enim nre etn 59 Charging Battery Time Required 2 o ee teet 37 Check battery status eet ete 56 Clean display and aperture
285. s 231 Microsoft Certifica Advanced Certificate Request Certificate Template User el Key Options Create new key set Use existing key set CSP Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1 0 E Key Usage Exchange Key Size 1024 MIN 04 common key sizes 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16394 Automatic key container name User specified key container name v Mark keys as exportable v Export keys to file Full path name userlkey pvk C Enable strong private key protection Store certificate in the local computer certificate store Stores the certificate in the loca computer store instead of in the user s certificate store Does not install the root CA s certificate You must be an administrator to generate or use a key in the local machine store Additional Options Request Format CMC OPKCS10 Hash Algorithm SHA 1 Only used to sign request Save request to a file Attributes X ki Friendly Name Figure 5 81 Advanced Certificate Details For the Certificate Template select User Check the Mark keys as exportable and the Export keys to file checkboxes Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied Also specify the private key filename Be sure to note the name used for the private key file for example MX7USER PVK The certificate f
286. s battery life CAL ef Figure 1 19 Speaker Location The speaker is located on the front of the device above the MX7 logo The audio volume can be adjusted to a comfortable level for the listener The volume is increased or decreased one step each time the volume key sequence is pressed The device has an internal speaker and a Jack for an external headset Operational beeps are emitted from the speaker Using the Keypad Note Volume amp Sounds in Control Panel must be enabled before the following key sequences will adjust the volume To adjust speaker volume e Tap the Orange key then the Scan key to enter Volume change mode e Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to adjust volume until the speaker volume is satisfactory e Press the Enter key to exit this mode Using the Touchscreen Tap the Dd Settings Control Panel Volume amp Sounds Volume tab Volume amp Sounds Pro Ed ok E Volume sounds Soft Enable sounds for M Events warnings system events M Applications Notifications alarms reminders Key clicks Soft Loud Screen taps 9 Soft oO Loud BY Jovem Lo 4 17 PM DA Figure 1 20 Volume amp Sounds Properties Change the volume setting and tap OK to save the change You can also select deselect sounds for key clicks and screen taps and whether each is loud or soft As the volume scrollbar is moved between Loud and Soft the computer will e
287. s no Code ID Data includes no Code ID Data includes AIM Code ID Data includes AIM Code ID Data includes Symbol Code ID Data includes Symbol Code ID Mi Stri M ID Prefix Suffix Lis 1 C Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Advanced Processing wy Seam Qf 9 39 uA Rs Fi wy Seam Qf 9 40 AM JJ CR i vay Sean LI 9 50 em AS Figure 3 32 Barcode Advanced Processing Strip Code ID This checkbox is unavailable when Data includes no Code ID radio button is enabled Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes When Strip Code ID is disabled unchecked the AIM Code or Symbol Code ID is included in the barcode data being matched Scanned barcodes are not matched against the following parameters unless they are EAN128 barcodes If the scan engine does not support EAN128 barcodes or EAN128 barcodes have been disabled the Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes function is not available Data includes no Code ID Data includes no Code ID 8 Data includes AIM Code ID Data includes AIM Code ID Data includes Symbol Code ID 8 Data includes Symbol Code ID C Strip Code 1D Li D Vis les M Strip Identifiers from EAN128 Barcodes Prefix Suffix Ctrl Char Mapping Scancode Enable Advanced Processing 4 Seam GF 9 39 uA amp Pd ay Sean LI 9 40 AM A f Pd A Sean LI 9 51 a a Figure 3 33
288. s until all CAB files and applications are loaded and installed Radio setup screens may appear and disappear while files are loading After all files are loaded and the Microsoft Windows CE Desktop is displayed adjust audio volume and other parameters if desired icd pia be zm ay L My Documents r J My Device Remote Desktop i cU Recycle Bin Summit Client Utility Ay Windows C z Microsoft MX em SCE 4 p i4 7 Li Internet My Explorer Documents tl Internet E Explorer TURRIS MX7 with Odyssey Client MX7 with Summit Client Figure 1 7 MX7 Desktop If needed change the Time and Date from its default value by tapping the Dd Settings Control Panel Date Time icon Related Manuals Instructions for setting up the integrated SE824 SE955 or SE1524 scanner barcode reading parameters are contained in Chapter 2 in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide on the LXE Manuals CD or the LXE ServicePass website Note The SE 955 scanner replaced the SE 624 scanner on all MX7 s manufactured after July 2006 For instructions on setting up the Intermec EV15 linear imager please refer to Chapter 3 in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 10 Troubleshooting Quick Start Can t calibrate the touch screen change the date time or adjust the volume AppLock is installed and running on the mobile device AppLock restricts User access to runnin
289. s will checkbox if needed Tap Next to continue Status shows as open Authentication is not in use Encryption is not in use E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 196 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration WEP Encryption Edit Network Wizard Association Made taN Encryption Method WEP Authenticate using 802 1X o Keys will be generated automatically for data privacy Pre shared key WPA or WPA2 Passphrase C unmask ILLI Ae Figure 5 24 Set Encryption Mode to WEP Set the Association Mode to Open Set the Encryption Method to WEP Disable the Authenticate using 802 1X checkbox Disable the Keys will checkbox if needed Tap Next to continue MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 197 Edit Network Wizard Enter one or more static WEP keys Key 1 Key 2 oj Key 3 es Key 4 Alphanumeric Hexadecimal v II PI Figure 5 25 Setting Static WEP Keys Enter a 40 bit or 128 bit WEP key The default is blank for all keys and radio buttons If the WEP key is in alphanumeric format enable the Alphanumeric radio button e 40 bit up to 5 characters e 128 bit upto 13 characters If the WEP key is in hexadecimal format enable the Hexadecimal radio button e 40 bit up to 10 characters e 128 bit up to 26 characters Enter the WEP key and tap Next to continue Previous to return to the previous screen or Cancel to ignor
290. screen responds to an actuation force touch of 4 oz of pressure or greater The color display is optimized for indoor lighting The display is black when the device is in suspend mode or when both batteries have expired and the unit is Off Display Backlight Timer When the Backlight timer expires the display backlight is turned off The default value for the battery power timer is 3 seconds The default value for the external power timer is never and the checkbox is blank The backlight timer dims the backlight on the touchscreen at the end of the specified time When the display wakes up the Backlight timer begins the countdown again See the section titled Set the Display Backlight Timer in Chapter 1 Introduction section titled Quick Start Cleaning the Display Scanner Aperture If there is a static screen protector installed remove the screen protector before cleaning the display panel Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the scan aperture and display If the scanner aperture or display become soiled or smudged clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex R without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol Do not use paper towels or harsh chemical based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the surface Use a clean damp lint free cloth Do not scrub optical surfaces If possible clean only those areas which are soiled Lint particulates can be removed with clean filtered cann
291. ser mode End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re enable the address bar The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of the Administrator applet The internet application should then be entered in the Application text box When the Internet checkbox is enabled the Menu and Status check boxes are available Enabling the Menu checkbox displays the EUIE menu which contains navigation functions like Back Forward Home Refresh etc functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users When the Menu checkbox is blank the EUIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are unavailable When the Status checkbox is enabled the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the end user when they are navigating the Internet If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired it should be treated like any other application This means that IEXPLORER EXE should be specified in the MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Multi Application Configuration 155 Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line In this case do not check the Internet checkbox Security Panel Applicabon Hot Key Ctrl Shift A Password Confirm
292. sername is displayed and highlighted in the edit control If the displayed username is desired press Enter or tap the OK button on the screen If the username needs to be changed start typing the new user name and press Enter or tap the OK button on the screen E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 144 Utilities If the LXE Login Utility prompt is closed by pressing Esc or tapping the Cancel button on the screen the username change is ignored and the previously configured username is used A ir td r rar 2 My Device My Documents E LXE Login Utility My Device My Documents Lj LXE Login Utility Internet LXE RFTerm Internet LXE RFTerm Explorer Explorer Eroe uo aam AB O dote rao a m A User Name Typed User Name Cleared Figure 3 43 Enter Select Login Name If the username is cleared the OK button is disabled This prevents the user from accidentally clearing the username before continuing After leaving this prompt by pressing either Enter or Esc or tapping the OK or Cancel buttons the Odyssey Client is displayed Odyssey Client OK Settings Commands Tools k Access point Packets infout EZE o gf ome alga E Figure 3 44 Odyssey Client Screen Press the Spe key or check the Connect to box The Status changes from disconnected to searching for access point After the access point is found the password prompt is displayed The lt user gt shown in the password pro
293. sh United States Number 123 456 789 00 123 456 789 00 neg Currency 123 456 789 00 pos 123 456 789 00 neg Time h mm ss tt tt AM or PM Date M d yy short dddd MMMM dd yyyy long Language User Interface English United States Input Language English United States US Installed English United States US Region Language Input Your User Interface Language Default Input Language States Select the input language to use The option will determine the when you start your device language used for the menus dialogs and alerts nalis Appearance samples i Installed Input Languages Time 2 48 20 PM English United States Short rate 7 21 2005 me input languages you plan to Long date Thursday July 21 2005 v English United States US Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Negative numbers 123 456 789 00 Positive currency 123 456 789 00 Negative currency 123 456 789 00 B S z ea DA E 279 Region 3 gt 2 48 Pm DA Figure 3 24 Regional Settings Tap the Customize button to assign a different format for dates times numbers and currency Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes Changes are saved across tabs Tap the X box to discard any changes Tap the for Help The changes take effect immediately Remove Programs Access A Settings Control Panel Remove Programs Note Programs listed in this location ar
294. sing Send Key Messages WEDGE Enable Internal Scanner Sound Enable Good Scan Vibration Data Bits Short Medium Long e 8 Enable Bad Scan Vibration O 1 Short Medium Long u Scan o 9 01 AM z a a a Seam DHF ss A Figure 3 25 Scanner Control Panels If Send Key Messages is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window When this box is not checked the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using Wedge Disable Enable Internal Scanner Sound when you want an application not the scan engine or the CE operating system to control scanner audible notifications Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 111 Main Tab Access A Settings Control Panel Scanner Main tab Factory Default Settings Main Port 1 Internal Port 2 Disabled Port 3 Disabled Send key messages WEDGE Enabled Enable Internal Scanner Sound Enabled j IO Internal Internal Good Scan Vibration Disabled Long Output C output C output Bad Scan Vibration Disabled Long V Send Key Messages WEDGE MV Enable Internal Scanner Sound Enable Good Scan Vibration Short
295. ssed MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Power Modes 45 Suspend Mode The MX7 The Suspend mode is entered when the unit is inactive for a predetermined period of time or the user taps the Power key MX7 Suspend timers are set using Did Settings Control Panel Power Schemes tab A Power key tap wakes the unit and resets the display backlight timers Any key press a trigger press or a touchscreen tap will also wake the unit and reset the display backlight timers Connecting the MX7 to AC power wakes the unit and resets the display backlight timers When the unit wakes up the Display Backlight and the Power Off timers begin the countdown again When any one of the above events occurs prior to the Power Off timer expiring the timer starts the countdown again The MX7 should be placed in Suspend mode before hotswapping the main battery Off Mode The unit is in Off Mode when the main battery and the backup battery are depleted Insert a fully charged main battery and press the Power key to turn the MX7 On E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 46 The Keypads E The Keypads The keypad is installed and configured by LXE to your specifications 32 key Keypad 55 key ANSI CE Keypad 55 key IBM 5250 Keypad Figure 2 5 The 32 key and 55 key Keypads See also Appendix A Key Maps MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B The Keypads 47 E Using the 55 Key ANSI CE Keypad 1 System Status LED 2 Audio Adjust Icon 3
296. sses 128 IASHUCH ON ate coire eor Abeer 127 IR port transmission eee 79 partnership prerequisite eee 130 Setup Wizard iiieseeie eem 127 128 Troubleshooting 5 eon e eret 133 Acttyesync Help aucun ett eerte erp 79 Add a certificate to the Root Store 228 Admin Hotkey AppLock e tieu 151 153 160 Administration APpPLOCK qe cohce oct 90 Align touchscreen oa pce paca E IO ape 20 Allow PC Connections eri 107 Alpha Mode LED erre canti 51 Alphanumeric 32 key keypad 48 Alt key Tut CH OD sees o err eres 52 ANSI Keypad tite Doe itebese esee figeiocoae 47 Antenna DIVeISIU eiae ee HERE t 239 API all tort RE sade 147 E EQ MX7RG B Index API Roltines cie eee rasens en 72 Appearance options eeseeereeeeeeennen 96 Application Panel d rrt ee 153 AppLock End user mode eniro 151 BUTE citi E it 154 Passwords enint eee 152 se 149 AppLock Administrator sees 75 AppLock Registry settings eeeeeee 173 ASCII Control Codes in hex 284 Asian POMS uc oce o br HEURE UR 100 Assemble AC Power Adapter scope ce s 14 Headset and microphone ussss 16 Printer CONNECH ON a ueniet 16 RS232 connection 15 USDB COHBIECLUOI iier rrt tps 15 assign key sequences to Diamond keys
297. supports data exchange via ActiveSync but does not automatically start ActiveSync when connected The Cable Multipurpose RS 232 and Power and Adapter RS 232 terminal port to D9 male accessories can be used with the RS 232 serial port External AC power is available when the multipurpose RS 232 Power cable is connected External AC power is not available for the Adapter RS 232 terminal port to D9 male option Power is drawn from the main battery pack when this adapter is connected USB Client Port The MX7 has one USB Client port for ActiveSync applications An accessory USB cable Cable Multipurpose USB and Power is available to connect the MX7 to a USB Type A plug on a PC for ActiveSync functions External AC power is available when the multipurpose USB Client Power cable is connected Audio Connection An audio headset interface is available using the Adapter Audio accessory with the I O port The connection cable connects the MX7 to a Voxware quick disconnect 4 pin interface This cable adapts to specific styles of headsets for voice input stereo or mono output The MX7 with a Summit Client supports mono only A 3 wire connector with at a minimum connections for ground microphone and 1 speaker Connecting the headset to the MX7 COM port turns off audio output to the MX7 speaker on the front of the mobile device All sounds previously directed to the speaker are redirected to the headphone including beeps Bias
298. sword Blank Certs Path System Figure 5 6 Summit Client Utility Global Settings tab Global Parameters Parameter Default Function RX Diversity On start on Main How to handle antenna diversity when receiving packets from the Access Point Options are Main Only use the main antenna only Aux Only use the auxiliary antenna only On start on Main on startup use the main antenna or On start on Aux on startup use the auxiliary antenna TX Diversity On How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to the Access Point Options are Main only use the main antenna only Aux only use the auxiliary antenna only or On use diversity or both antennas Preamble Auto The type of radio header or preamble for packets Options are Auto Short or Long G Shortslot Auto 802 1x short slot timing mode Options are Auto On or Off MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Summit Client Configuration 183 Parameter Default Function Roam Trigger 65 dBm If signal strength is less than this trigger value the radio looks for a different Access Point with a stronger signal Options are 50 dBm 55 60 65 70 or 75 dBm Roam Delta 10 dBm The amount by which a different Access Point signal strength must exceed the current Access Point signal strength before roaming to the different Access Point is attempted Options are 5 dBm 10 15 20 25
299. t MAPNAME 00000409 MAPCNT 13 MAPCOLS 8 MAPROWS 8 ALGOR MX3X yee Still true for MX3X not for MX7 jj but the old MX3X maps are included in the MX7 L4 map in case we ever merge 77 Special keys are accessed outside the map this specifies the row and column these should not need to change but Special KEYSHIFT COL8ROWO KEYALT COL9ROWO KEY2ND COL10ROWO KEYCONTROL COL11ROWO 77 the name of this key doesn t matter the important part is the MAP value codes are defined in docs this is the map for keys with no modifier Map MAP MAP NORMAL LP E E M E E E COLOROWO VK ESCAPE COLOROW1 VK F1 COLOROW2 ACTION POWER COLOROW3 VK_F2 COLOROW4 VK_F5 COLOROW5 VK_F7 COLOROW6 8 COLOROW7 ACTION SCAN1 LP P E E M E E COLIROWO Q COL1ROW1 9 COL1ROW2 ACTION SCAN3 COLIROW3 T COL1ROW4 U COLIROW5 4 COLIROW6 O COL1ROW7 ACTION SCAN2 LP E E M E E E COL2ROWO A COL2ROW1 open COL2ROW2 D COL2ROW3 G COL2ROW4 J COL2ROW5 2 1 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 263 COL2ROW6 L COL2ROW7 3 LP E A M P E E COL3ROWO COL3ROW1 open COL3ROW2 X COL3ROW3 2 V COL3ROW4 N COL3ROW5 0 COL3ROW6 VK_LEFT COL3ROW7 VK_TAB LP E E M P E E COLAROWO VK F9 COL4ROW1 S COL4ROW2 VK_RIGHT COL4ROW3 F COL4ROW4 H COL4ROW5 K COLAROW6 2 COL4ROW7 VK UP LP E E M E E COL5ROWO 6 COL5ROW1 Z COLSROW2 VK_BACK COL5ROW3 C COL5ROW
300. t Stop FTP Server Access AY Programs Communication Start FTP Server or Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server The server defaults to Off for security unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu Command Prompt Access a Programs Command Prompt x Pocket CMD v 5 0 gt t WB comm resi au AS Figure 3 1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File Close MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Start Menu Program Options 81 Inbox Access AY Programs Inbox This option requires a connection to a mail server There are a few changes in the CE version of Inbox as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Outlook Inbox options Tap the button to access Inbox Help ActiveSync can be used to transfer messages between the MX7 inbox and a PC s desktop inbox Refer to ActiveSync Processes in this guide Internet Explorer Access Av Programs Internet Explorer The default start page is www lxe com and the default search page is www google com See section titled Internet Options later in this chapter for Internet Explorer settings Internet Explorer requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider to access the Internet There are a few changes in the CE version of Internet Explorer as it r
301. t Tap the keyboard icon at the bottom of the screen to put the virtual keyboard on the display Using the stylus e Tap the Shift key to type one capital letter e Tap the CAPS key to type all capital letters e Tap the au key to access symbols Input Panel esc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 rab d wje r t vjuji o p E ICAP a s d f JU h j JK T 7 shift z x c v b njm CET L n PEC Figure 1 23 Input Panel Virtual Keyboard Some applications do not automatically display the Input Panel In this case do the following to use the Input Panel 1 Tap the Input Panel Virtual Keyboard icon in the taskbar 2 Select Keyboard from the menu 3 Tap the data entry area on the display when you want to enter data using the Input Panel MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Entering Data 29 Using the Stylus Note This section is directed to the MX7 daily user The assumption is that the mobile device has been configured and the touch panel calibrated by the System Administrator prior to releasing the MX7 for daily use The touchscreen should be calibrated before initial use The stylus performs the same function as the mouse that is used to point to and click elements on a desktop computer The stylus is used in the same manner as a mouse single tap or double tap to select menu options drag the stylus across text to select hold the stylus down to activate slider bars etcetera Hold the stylus as if it wer
302. t until the application has initialized itself before proceeding The application did not start successfully and AppLock has timed out LOG ERROR ToUser after admin not at boot The user mode switch is attempted when the device boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press LOG EX ToUser after admin app still open The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey press and the administrator has left the application open and has not made any changes in the configuration LOG EX ToUser after admin no app or cmd line change If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press the administrator may have left the configured application open If so AppLock does not launch the application again unless a new application or command line has been specified otherwise it just locks it LOG EX Unable to move desktop The desktop is moved when switching into user mode This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues LOG ERROR Unable to move taskbar The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues LOG ERROR E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide
303. t Utility icon on the desktop You can also start the Summit Client utility by tapping Start Programs Summit SCU Wireless Zero Config e The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled at this time and the MX7 is not connected to a network LXE does not recommend use of the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility for configuring the radio as it cannot be used to configure all supported security protocols e You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network See Wireless Zero Config Utility at the end of this chapter when using Wireless Zero Config Important Perform a Warm Reset after adding a new profile or changing parameters of an existing profile to save the changed parameters in the registry Summit Client Utility Summit Client Util Main config Status Diags Glob The Main tab provides information admin login and active config profile selection Profile specific parameters are found on the Config tab The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile The Status tab contains information on the current connection The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio Global parameters are found on the Global Settings tab The values for these parameters apply to all profiles MX7
304. t WEP WPA no authentication and all authentications listed below The Odyssey Client radio is an 802 11b g radio capable of both 802 11b and 802 11g data rates The Summit Client radio is an 802 11g radio capable of both 802 11b and 802 11g data rates This chapter is separated into two sections Funk Odyssey Client Configuration and Summit Client Configuration Please refer to the table below for the security options supported by each client Security Options Radio Supported Summit Client Odyssey Client WEP Yes Yes LEAP Yes Yes WPA PSK Yes Yes WPA LEAP Yes Yes PEAP MSCHAP Yes Yes PEAP GTC No Yes EAP TLS No Yes Prerequisites e Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point e WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys e The Summit profile settings for Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security option chosen La Please refer to the LXE Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for MX7 communication AJ Date Time It 1s important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 176 Summit Client Configuration Summit Client Configuration cul Summit Client Utility Icon Start the Summit Client configuration by tapping the Summit Clien
305. t be configured If the password is not configured a new device switches into Administration mode without prompting for a password In addition to the hotkey press a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is missing in the configuration There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured If the configured hotkey 1s pressed the password prompt is displayed In this case the user has 30 seconds to enter a password If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end user mode All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt this is because the other situations result in invalid end user operation These conditions include 1 If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator i e an application is specified that does not exist 2 If the application name which is mandatory for end user mode is missing in the configuration 3 Invalid installation of AppLock e g missing DLLs 4 Corrupted registry settings To summarize if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode the password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered Troubleshooting Can t locate the password that has been set by the administrator Enter this LXE back door key sequence Ctri L Ctr
306. talled in the MX7 for the first time or when the backup battery is completely depleted the Time and Date reverts to its default values Tap Dd Settings Control Panel Date Time tab Note Power drain increases substantially in Turbo mode ae Settings Control Panel Power When to Use This Guide As the reference for LXE s MX7 computer this guide provides detailed information on its features and functionality Use this reference guide as you would any other source book reading portions to learn about the MX7 and then referring to it when you need more information about a particular subject This guide takes you through all aspects of installation and configuration for the LXE MX7 Operation and safety instructions for the general user are contained in the MX7 User s Guide This chapter Introduction describes this reference guide s structure contains initial setup instruction briefly describes data entry processes and explains how to get help Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout describes the function and layout of the MX7 components controls and connectors Also describes the external power supplies and vehicle mounting options for the MX7 Chapter 3 System Configuration takes you through the CE 5 0 operating system setup and the MX7 file structure Also describes and explains initial ActiveSync processes MX7 specific utilities and the LXE Login Utility Chapter 4 AppLock
307. tely E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 124 Settings Control Panel Options Device Name System Properties OK s General Memory Device Name d gt Your device uses this information to identify itself to other computers Device name without spaces Device description LXE MX7 Figure 3 38 System Device Name The device name and description can be changed Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Copyrights Portions of this software are based on NCSA Mosaic NCSA Mosaic was developed by the National Center for Supercomputing Applications at the University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign Distributed a syste B 2 202 em AB Figure 3 39 System Copyrights This screen is presented for information only The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 125 Volume and Sounds Access A Settings Control Panel Volume amp Sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to CE events Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Disabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Disabled Screen tap Disabled Sounds Scheme LOUD Volume amp Sounds Pro ka oK x Volume amp Sounds Pro ES O
308. teps 1 Tap the Summit Client Utility icon on the desktop or tap Start Programs Summit SCU 2 Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Config drop down box 3 A message appears that a Power Cycle is required to make settings activate properly Tap OK to close the message window 4 Tap the Power button to place the MX7 in Suspend then tap the Power button to wake the MX7 from Suspend mode The Wireless Zero Config utility begins E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 84 Start Menu Program Options Transcriber Access Did Programs Transcriber Select Transcriber on the Start Programs menu or tap the icon on the Desktop To make changes to the Transcriber application enable or disable the current Transcriber session etc tap the hand with a pen icon in the toolbar When the hand with a pen is active all touchscreen activity is captured read by the transcriber program Tap the button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help Windows Explorer Access Av Programs Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options Tap the button to access Windows Explorer Help MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Start Menu Program Options 85 Taskbar Access A Settings Taskbar The Taskbar can be used to determine how the taskbar appears on the display Use the Advanced tab to clear the c
309. ter that fits MX7 with boot MX7A409HOLSTERWBOOT Holster belt 9200L67 MX7 Charge Comm Interface Cable USB Client for ActiveSync MX7A052MULTICBLUSB MX7 Charge Comm Interface Cable RS 232 Serial ActiveSync D9 MX7A055MULTICBLDA9F Female AC DC power supply with US power cord for use with MX7 9000A319PSACUS Charge Comm cables AC DC power supply without power cord for use with MX7 9000A302PSACWW Charge Comm cables RS 232 Serial Adapter cable 6in for use with printers that provide their MX7A058ADPTCBLPER own source of power MX7 Headset coiled adapter cable includes quick disconnect headset MX7A060ADPTCBLVOICE connector A headset is still required MX7 Replacement Stylus 10 pack MX7A584STYLUS Large tethered stylus which fit the MX7 carry cases 5 pack 9000A507STYLUS CD with CE 5 0 API s and LXE API s with documentation for custom MX7A504CESOSDK application development Touch screen anti glare anti reflective protective film 10 pack MX7A584PROTFILM VoxBrowser English amp Americas VOXBROWSER ENG VoxBrowser Rest of the World VOXBROWSER ROW Single ear single headband headset with noise canceling microphone HX1A501SNGBHEADSET includes 5 replacement windscreens Single ear dual headband headset with noise canceling microphone HX1AS02DUALBHEADSET includes 5 replacement windscreens Dual ear behind the head headset with noise canceling microphone HX1ASO3BTHHEADSET includes 5 replacement windscreens Replacement foam block for 502 d
310. tery is trickle charged by the main battery Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX7 to conserve the main battery and charge the backup battery The Status LED indicates battery condition It is steady red when the main battery is Low When the battery has sufficient energy the Status LED is unlit The Battery control panel displays main and backup battery charging and power status Start Settings Control Panel Battery About Lithium Ion Batteries Li Ion batteries like all batteries gradually lose their capacity over time in a linear fashion and never just stop working This is important to remember the MX7 is always on even when in the Suspend state and draws power from the batteries at all times Tap the Dd Settings Control Panel Power tab to check the battery status and power reading The following chart is an approximation Actual battery capacity varies based on usage ambient temperature and peripherals drawing power from the MX7 100 capacity 2200 mAh minimum 80 capacity 1760 mAh minimum Deciding when to put a fully charged main battery pack in the MX7 is difficult to quantify because it is very application specific 1800 mAh may be the cutoff for one customer who uses the mobile device frequently while 1000 mAh may be perfectly fine for a customer who occasionally uses the mobile device You need to determine the point at which battery life becomes unacceptable for your business practices and
311. tes The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a desktop PC to navigate to the CA Certificate Authority To request the root CA certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with any valid username and password C Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name X m Password Remember my password OK Cancel Figure 5 70 Logon to Certificate Authority Microsoft Certificate s johndoe Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL Figure 5 71 Certificate Services Welcome Screen Tap the Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL task link E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 226 Root Certificates Make sure the correct root CA certif
312. the backup battery is provided to allow the user to condition the battery in order to recover full battery capacity The backup battery must be replaced by qualified service personnel The battery has a minimum 2 year service life Note An uninterrupted external power source wall AC adapters transfers power to the computer s internal charging circuitry which in turn recharges the main battery and backup battery Frequent connection to an external power source if feasible is recommended to maintain backup battery charge status as the backup battery cannot be recharged by a dead or missing main battery Radio Ports Three ports are available on the MX7 802 11b g The MX7 supports an LXE 802 11b g radio The LXE radio supports diversity with two internal antennas The CPU board does not allow hot swapping the radio Adjusting power management on the radio is set to static dynamic control WEP WPA and LEAP are supported E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 38 Hardware Configuration COM Port The MX7 has one mini D 20 pin serial port a multifunction I O port that can be configured by the user IC 2L Figure 2 2 COM 1 Port RS 232 Serial Port Configured as COMI Bi directional full duplex and supports data rates up to 115 Kb s The port does not have RI or CD signals nor does it support 5V switchable power on pin 9 for tethered scanners The serial port driver supports full duplex communications over the serial port It
313. the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keypower No power key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Creating Custom Key Maps 261 No definition for MapHead keyscan1 No Scan Key 1 definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyscan2 No Scan Key 2 definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyscan3 No Trigger Button definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyshift No SHIFT modifier key definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be defined somewhere in one of the keymaps This message comes from the post parse validation so no line is specified No definition for MapHead keyuparrow No up arrow definition was found The keyboard driver requires this key to be de
314. then Finish Odyssey Client Please enter your password V Connect to unmask LEAP Authentication information Login name user2 Network LEAP Figure 5 31 Enter Password for LEAP When prompted for the password enter the valid password to authenticate Once authenticated the Status shows as open and authenticated MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 201 Set WPA Odyssey Client Sia Commands Tools Help Configure Detailed Status Security Settings EAP FAST Settings Trusted Servers Disable Odyssey Exit Access point 00 A0 E8 45 42 C9 Packets in out 28 24 Details Reconnect Figure 5 32 Funk Odyssey Client Settings Menu Tap Settings Configure Odyssey Client E vays f 1 56 PM Figure 5 33 Tap Add to Configure a Profile Tap the Add button to configure a profile The Add Network Wizard screen is displayed E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 202 Funk Odyssey Client Configuration Add Network Wizard Enter an optional description m Is this an infrastructure network use access points or an ad hoc network peer to peer Infrastructure Cance fi d oays GEZ 1 58 PM J k Figure 5 34 Add Network Wizard Screen On the Add Network Wizard screen enter the SSID of the wireless network If the SSID is being broadcast by the AP
315. this message is logged is the application information It the Administration key cannot be opened or if the AppName value is missing or empty this error is logged The other application information is not required If the AppName value is not available AppLock cannot switch into user mode LOG ERROR Reset system work area failure The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to cover the taskbar area The system work area has to be adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration mode AppLock was unable to adjust this area LOG ERROR Shift pressed The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing LOG EX Shift Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG EX Show taskbar The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin backdoor The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The switch occurred because of the backdoor key presses were entered by the administrator LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin hotkey press The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator LOG PROCESSING Switching to admin kbdhook dll not found The keyboard hook load failed so AppLock switches to admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered LO
316. tings may only be edited after entering the Admin Login password The password is case sensitive Once logged in the button label changes to Admin Logout To logout either tap the Admin Logout button or exit the SCU without tapping the Admin Logout button E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 178 Summit Client Configuration Administrator Mode To login to Admin mode tap the Admin Login button Admin Password Entry ES Enter Admin Password Figure 5 2 Main tab Enter Admin Password Enter the Admin password the default password is SUMMIT and is case sensitive and tap OK If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed The Admin default password can be changed on the Global Settings tab Config Note Tap the Commit button to save changes If the panel is exited before tapping the Commit button changes are not saved Summit Client Util oq x Factory Default Settings Config Panel fi Main Config status Diags Glob gt T Defaui cono See SSID Blank Client Name Blank Rename Delete New Commit Power Save CAM Tx Power Maximum Bit Rate Auto You must click pA Radio Mode B G rates Commit to save tl gt Config s settings Auth Type Open EAP type None See Encryption None None v Credentials WEP PSK Keys i Summit OF amp 10 19 a A E Figure 5 3 Summit Client Utility Config tab When logge
317. tion MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Single Application Configuration 163 to reduce the amount of registry space used For this reason the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged as well as clear the status information View Error Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked Process Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program Extended Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging All All messages are displayed Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another The filtered records are displayed all others are not displayed Levels Note If a level higher than Error is selected the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely The system default is None however to reduce registry use the administrator may want to select None after verifying the configuration Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry None Error Processing Extended All Save As When the Save
318. tons Tap OK to end the configuration process MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 207 PEAP GTC Authentication Configuration The Funk Odyssey supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP GTC protocol Use the delete and add buttons to choose PEAP GTC authentication Uncheck the Validate server certificate for now Tap Next Odyssey Client OK Add Network Wizard ok Select the method s that you would Select and order the EAP methods that you would like to use like to add EAP TTLS EAP TLS EAP MD5 Challenge EAP GenericTokenCard EAP PEAP validate server certificate Ok Cancel v Previous Next Cancel 4 gt et dots doo 10 31 ru A E e 6 Odys Lf 10 33 A4 A 5 Figure 5 42 PEAP GTC Authentication Configuration Tap Next to continue Previous to return to the previous screen or Cancel to ignore changes made to this screen Add Network Wizard You can enter an anonymous name tC a keep your login name private with most EAP protocols Enter an anonymous name that will be used for the outer visible authentication It may contain realm names that route your request e g anonymous or anonymoustmyisp com user Next Cancel v Hcc v de odys oo 10 34 a A Figure 5 43 User Name for Outer Authentication A screen appears asking for an anonymous sign on n
319. trol Panel Date Time Icon Set Date Time Time Zone and assign a Daylight Savings location after a warm boot or a cold boot or at anytime Factory Default Settings Current Time Midnight Time Zone GMT 05 00 Daylight Savings Enabled Date Time Properties Ea OK x Date Time ead July 2005 ia S MTWHT FS 26 27 28 20 30 1 2 3456789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 i7 18 19 20 E 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 db o c cw c6 2 30 42 PM Time Zone GmT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp C Automatically adjust Mi clack for davlinht avina Apply BYP omer gt 2 30 P D Figure 3 8 Date Time Properties There is very little functional change from general desktop PC Date Time Properties options Adjust the settings and tap the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes the Date Time Properties screen to appear E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 94 Settings Control Panel Options Dialing Access A Settings Control Panel Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Factory Default Settings Location Work Area Code 425 Tone Dialing Enabled Country Region 1 Disable Call Waiting Disabled Dialing Properties Ea oK F Location New Remove Local settings are Area code 200 Tone dialing Country Regio
320. ts parity and stop bits remain at 8 none and 1 respectively 7 Under the Call Options tab be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone since a direct connection will not have a dial tone Set the timeout parameter default is 5 seconds Tap OK 8 TCP IP Settings should not need to change from defaults Tap the Finish button to create the new connection 9 Close the Remote Networking window 10 To activate the new connection select 4 Settings Control Panel PC Connection and tap the Change Connection button 11 Select the new connection Tap OK twice MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Options 105 12 Close the Control Panel window 13 Connect the desktop PC to the mobile device with the appropriate cable 14 Click the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection You can activate the connection by double tapping on the specific connection icon in the Remote Networking window but this will only start an RAS Remote Access Services session and does not start ActiveSync properly Owner Access A Settings Control Panel Owner Icon Set the mobile device owner details Factory Default Settings Identification Name Company Address Telephones Blank Display at power on Disabled Notes Notes Blank Display at power on Disabled Network ID User Name Blank Password Blank Domain Blank Owner Properties 27 OK s
321. ual band headsets qty 1 HX1A504AHSBLOCKFOAM E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 34 Getting Help Replacement head yoke for dual band 502 headset qty 1 HX1A505DUALYOKE Replacement head yoke for single band 501 headset qty 1 HX1A506SINGLEYOKE Replacement windscreen for all headset microphones 10 Pack HX1A508WINDSCREEN10 Replacement windscreen for all headset microphones 50 Pack HX1A509WINDSCREENSO Replacement foam ear piece cover for 501 and 502 headsets 10 pack HX1A510FOAMEARI0 Replacement foam ear piece cover for 501 and 502 headsets 50 pack HX1A511FOAMEARSO MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Hardware Configuration System Hardware The MX7 hardware configuration is shown in the following figure Figure 2 1 System Hardware Central Processing Unit The LXE MX7 CPU is a 400MHz Intel Xscale PXA255 CPU The operating system is Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 The OS image is stored on an internal SD flash card and is loaded into DRAM for execution The Xscale turbo mode switching is supported and turned on by default Core Logic The MX7 supports the following I O components of the core logic e One SD card slot under the main battery pack e One serial port e One Digitizer Input port Touchscreen E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 36 Hardware Configuration System Memory The 400MHz CPU configuration supports 128MB SDRAM 128MB SD
322. uired for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key However when the hotkey is pressed to switch modes the normal key must be entered from the keypad it cannot be entered from the SIP Password Move the cursor to the Password text box The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match Passwords are case sensitive When the user exits the Administrator Control panel the two passwords are compared to verify that they match If they do not match a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error After the user closes the dialog box the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again If the passwords match the password is encrypted and saved See Also Passwords Status Panel Administrator Control OK View Level None Refresh Log A Level Eror mdr Clear Status a Figure 4 9 Status Panel Note If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above you may have the Multi Application version Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operation and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation As the status information is stored in the registry and accumulates during AppLock configuration and operation it is very important that the administrator periodically clear the status informa
323. umeric Alpha Keypad ccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeees 249 Creating Custom Key Maps cdc 254 Introductio esensina e Rr RIS EM MN DINE E SIMA MM M ME 254 Keymap Soutce FORMAL usc nr pet oh totes agr Fe e eb ER Poo ete i R Reb i ete e bate ee des 255 obolis dui UT 255 ers EET 255 SPECIAL eI EE 256 MAP SECU oriri iet tend en di eas tees PERDU RC neve e Pere acon een ere 256 Keyeomp BIror Messages see D be xn dian AN RAA M D mE EIS I I ed XD CERE 258 Sample Input PGs sea LIE 262 Sample Output FIC essiant a EE A R E Ae 277 APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 279 Physical Specifications see 279 Display Specificati nS MET 280 Environmental Specifications sssssseseenuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn MEER 281 MX sed E ERS 281 AC Wal Adap P c 281 Radio Specifications saene a E aii 282 Odyssey SIUE 282 sinis E T o ATE ETE A 282 List of Valid VK Codes for GE aucuns nb Hoa FREE HRp ERE ERE RR ERR ERR ER P RR erreerrre rrerererrs 283 ASCI Comrol CodeS 284 MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Table of Contents 1X INDEX 287 Illustrations Eienre d 1 Fron 00 WANs oc ace acces sate yates eo ihe ODE DERE ES ET e par A 5 r We Bake cM ED E A E E E E E E E S 6 Figurel 3 Scanner ANDOPtulesu iiie eee ic d E a EGO RD REO OPER O 6 Fieured 4 6 Portabd G3ble 25b eneos irat Hex
324. uration and security Odyssey Summit Optional LXE 802 11 b g Radio Summit Client Utility X No LXE 802 11 b g Radio Odyssey Client Utility X No 400MHz X X No 128MB RAM x x No 128MB Flash X X No SE955 Scanner X Yes EV 15 Scanner X X Yes SE824 Scanner X Yes CE 5 0 X X No Voice X Yes RFTerm X X Yes JAVA X X Yes AppLock X X Yes Multi AppLock X X Yes MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Overview 3 Important Battery Information Note The mobile device s backup battery maintains its charge by drawing power from the main battery pack Always store unused devices with a fully charged main battery pack installed LXE recommends an in use mobile device be frequently connected to an external power source to maintain optimum power levels in the main battery pack and the backup battery When the backup battery and main battery pack are dead the mobile device reverts to the last saved setup defaults when a fully charged main battery pack is installed and the device is powered On again Tap Dd Settings Control Panel Battery tab e Until the main battery and backup battery are completely depleted the MX7 is always drawing power from the batteries On e New batteries must be fully charged prior to use e Whenever possible use the AC power adapter with the MX7 to conserve the main battery and recharge the backup battery e When a new battery is ins
325. urchased Access AY Programs Communication ActiveSync Connect Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server Microsoft File Viewers Excel Viewer Image Viewer PDF Viewer Word Viewer Command Prompt Inbox Internet Explorer Java LXE RFTerm Media Player Microsoft WordPad Odyssey Client Radio Config Utility Summit Client Transcriber Windows Explorer Stores Network communication options Begin ActiveSync connection Run this command after setting up a connection Begin connection to FTP server Stop connection with FTP server View downloaded files see Note View Excel documents View BMP JPEG and PNG images View Adobe Acrobat documents View Word and RTF files The command line interface in a separate window Microsoft Outlook mail inbox Access web pages on the world wide internet Option Option Terminal emulation application RFTerm automatically opens as soon as a reboot is completed Music management program Opens an ASCII notepad RF client management program Radio management program WZC icon in toolbar RF client management program Handwriting recognition program using an integrated dictionary File management program Note The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected or encrypted e If installed RFTerm runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot e finstalled and enabled AppLock runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot e The RF client runs aut
326. ure that the battery can be inserted into the battery compartment before securing the pistol grip handle into place 5 Attach the pistol grip handle to the MX7 as shown above with the two screws provided 6 Torque the Pan Head Screws to 3 1 in Ib 34 11 N m 7 Test the handle s connection making sure the MX7 is securely connected to the handle Periodically check the pistol grip handle for wear and the connection for tightness If the handle gets worn or damaged it must be replaced If the pistol grip connection loosens it must be tightened before the MX7 is placed in service E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 12 Hardware Setup Inserting the Main Battery Press the Power key after the battery 1s inserted into the MX7 Note On first use the MX7 batteries should be charged with an external power source i e AC Adapter 3 5 hours for the main battery and 7 hours for the backup battery New main battery packs alone must be charged prior to first use this process takes up to four hours in an LXE Multi Charger Figure 1 9 Main Battery Pack The MX7 Battery Compartment is located at the bottom of the back of the computer Place the battery in the battery well making sure the tab on the bottom of the battery pack fits into the slot at the bottom end of the battery well Push the battery down into the battery well until the tab clicks into place and the battery pack is secure in the battery well The backup bat
327. ver Phillips for handstrap ese 13 SD card ThBterface ost t ena 36 SD Cards Tastall and f tove 3io i tete ot 43 SD flash card location ee 42 SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs 126 SE824 SE955 SEIS24 isse tienen ies 40 Second key function described 53 Security options supported sss 175 Security Panel AXDDLOCIO etre nite Notis tst eeates 155 Security Single User AppLock 161 Selecta TOME coe robo xv pe ient 100 Selecta key Map ite ecc ere 100 Send Key Messages and Wedge 110 Serial cables for serial port sss 7 Set Owner information cccceeceeseeteeseeneeenes 20 Set time ZONE c eA Uo Db HORE 20 Setup Applock retener iets des 149 Setup SoftWare etie eee 71 Shift key TutictiOb ite tenter 52 SHOW CLOCK scent t eal 85 Shutdown time limits c ietene 57 Single Application AppLock 150 Soft Keyboatd eise nies 97 Software and E68 t or het beoe 72 APP li CatiOms sa iio o e TO De pne 73 Folders copied at startup sssssss 753 Mn M 72 supported by the MX7 ssssssssss 72 Sounds and Volume default values 125 oE ae PP E t tl ee teme Pe ec 39 Speaker location aci ote ess 22 Special functions ie reni 52 SSIDinusnsiecntuoeieiireiaio iieri 179 Stand
328. vice by selecting Run from the Start menu type WARMBOOT in the Open edit control panel and press the Enter key MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B API Calls 147 API Calls See Also LXE CE API Programming Guide E SW WINAPIPG The LXE CE API Programming Guide documents only the LXE specific API calls for the mobile device It is intended as an addition to the standard Microsoft Windows CE API documentation Details of many of the calls in the LXE guide may be found in Microsoft s documentation The APIs documented in the programming guide are included in LXEAPI ZIP which is in the standard Windows CE image on the mobile device For ease of software development the files LXEAPI H and LXEAPI LIB are available on the accessories CD which are the C C include files and the link library for the LXEAPI respectively Note that this DLL is installed in mobile device images with a version number of 1 2 or higher as displayed on the screen during bootup A full SDK on the accessories CD is now included for Microsoft Embedded Visual C 4 0 which is available free on the Microsoft website Clearing Registry Settings Cold reset puts all registry settings back to LXE factory defaults No other clearing is available or necessary E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 148 Reflash the Mobile Device Reflash the Mobile Device Preparation How To Note When reflashing LXE recommends using a SD Flash card that is greater than 6
329. vice will automatically reboot after flashing the bootloader Loading system from ATA is displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading all software upgrades are complete 5 The touchscreen will need to be re calibrated Once the bootloader is loaded and the files are copied onto the internal Flash drive you can reflash the bootloader at any time by rebooting the MX7 and holding down the lt A gt or lt Alph gt key on the keypad before the splash screen appears Wait until the splash screen displays Writing new bootloader and you can release the lt A gt or lt Alph gt key When reflashing is complete 3 5 seconds the MX7 will reboot and startup with the new bootloader again MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Introduction Chapter 4 AppLock LXE s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE based devices only LXE loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end user AppLock is password protected by the Administrator End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes The administrator specified application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up When the mobile device is reset to factory default values for example aft
330. vigating to Start Settings Control Panel Certificates Certificates Certificates Trusted Authorities Lists the certificates trusted by you rim al Import Class 3 Public Prim Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur View Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root civ Remove o AE l ooo Q ceniti sv 0 53 nm FA Figure 5 74 Certificate Stores Tap the Import button Import Certificate or Key OK E From a File eene nnne Nee Q From a Smart Card Reader Y Card Absent Figure 5 75 Import the Certificate Make sure From a File is selected and tap OK E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 228 Root Certificates Sele T O mE M OK X O System Name Type Certificates v 79 O ceniti IE 2 21 Pu A E Figure 5 76 Browse to the Certificate Location on the MX7 Using the Explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and tap OK When the text box appears asking if you want to ADD the following certificate to the Root Store tap Yes to import the certificate Once the certificate is installed return to the proper authentication section described later in this chapter MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B User Certificates 229 User Certificates 4 It is important that all dates are correct on CE and desktop laptop computers when eu using any type of certificate Certificates
331. voltage for an electric condenser microphone is available External AC power is not available for this option Power is drawn from the main battery pack MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Hardware Configuration 39 Audio Support Speaker The speaker supplies audible verification signals normally used by the Window s CE operating system The speaker is located on the front of the MX7 above the MX7 logo The mobile device emits a Sound Pressure Level loudness of at least 102 dB measured as follows e Frequency 2650 100 Hz e Distance 10 cm on axis in front of Speaker opening in front of unit e Duration Continuous 2650 Hz tone The default is 1 beep for a good scan and 2 beeps for a bad scan Volume Control Volume control is managed by Windows CE control panel applet an API and the Orange Scan up down arrow key key sequence Volume control is covered in greater detail later in this guide Voice All Microsoft supplied audio codecs are included in the OS image The hardware codecs the input and output analog voice circuitry and the system design are designed to support voice applications using a headset connected to the Adapter Audio accessory cable and the bottom end connector E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 40 Hardware Configuration Scanner Imager Port The MX7 has one integrated barcode scanner port Three internal scanner engines and one imager are available Only one scan engine is installed at a tim
332. y is Present Friendly Narne sera Lists your personal digital certificates Serial Number Details present Fe 2 41 mu A Figure 5 56 Verify User Certificate MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Funk Odyssey Client Configuration 217 Setting EAP TLS Parameters The Funk Odyssey supplicant authenticates a user with the EAP TLS protocol Add Network Wizard ok Add Network Wizard Select and order the EAP methods Username userz that you would like to use Password C Permit login using password Prompt for password Use the folowing password EAP TLS Validate server certificate Permit login using my certificate d C Permit logini using my SIM card Previous Next Cancel v Previous Next Cancel xccl aima has Dd Mv odys f 2 01 mu Ae Re vays 0f 2 03 om A Figure 5 57 Authenticate a User Use the delete and add buttons to choose EAP TLS authentication Uncheck the Validate server certificate for now Tap Next Enter the username on the user certificate to be used for authentication Tap Next Add Network Wizard The configuration of the new netwo is complete User certificate for EAP TLS authentication Press Finish to accept the configuration and add the new network fd 2 05 PM A Figure 5 58 Completed Network Configuration C
333. y server for local Clear Cache Clear History addresses Sites Settings Less Dimen BH Lor 2 97 mS n m oor rm d f n m I m AS Internet Options Connection Security i i i Advanced Poo JUL Privacy Advanced Cookies First party Third party Always expand ALT text for OF Accept Anchors navigate on access Block popups Bock Block Always send URLs as UTF 8 Exceptions O Prompt Prompt Display a notification about e d d Always allow session cookies V Enable stylesheets Advanced Enable page transitions v Theming support Disable automatic SIP M E Underline links 9 Popup Windows Display notification whe popup has been blocked r Open new pages in the current window DE O DACIE oe L L SEL Te LES Prem o 2 39 mu A m D rm AS CEE rm GA f Figure 3 14 Internet Options Select a tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes Changes are saved from tab to tab Tap the X box to ignore all changes The changes take effect immediately Tap the button for Help Factory Default Settings General Start Page http www lxe com Search Page http www google com Cache Size 512 Kb Connection Use LAN Disabled Autodial Name Blank MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Settings Control Panel Opti
334. ync Setup Wizard begins and starts the following processes e connect the mobile device to your PC e setup a partnership so you can synchronize information between your mobile device and your PC and e customize your synchronization settings For more information about using ActiveSync on your PC open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help E EQ MX7RG B MX7 Reference Guide 128 ActiveSync Get Connected Process Initial Install Initial installation relationship must be established using serial RS232 or USB cable connection between the MX7 and the desktop laptop PC Once a relationship has been established tap a Help ActiveSync for help Install ActiveSync on Desktop Laptop Go to the Microsoft Windows website ActiveSync Download Install file location www microsoft com downloads and type ActiveSync in the Keywords text box This process should locate the latest version of ActiveSync Install ActiveSync 3 7 or later on the PC before using ActiveSync to connect the PC to the mobile device Follow the instructions in the ActiveSync Wizard Check that 4 Programs Communication ActiveSync Tools Options has the correct connection selected Refer to Serial Connection or USB Connection When installation of ActiveSync 1s complete on your PC the ActiveSync Setup Wizard on the PC begins and it begins searching for a connected device Because ActiveSync is already installed on your mobile device
335. zer Flashing Red on all Battery analyzer fault or failure Failure stations LCD Messages Analyzing the Battery pack cycling through Charge Discharge Battery Charge CHARGE Battery pack charging DISCHARGE Battery pack discharging ANALYZE BAT FAULT Battery Fault Battery pack fault or failure Analysis Battery pack analyzed and ready for use with displayed Complete capacity Display Capacity Capacity measured during discharge cycle XX VDC Display volts nee volts measured during charge and discharge MX7 Reference Guide E EQ MX7RG B Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle 61 Passive Vehicle Mount Cradle A passive vehicle mount cradle is available for the MX7 The cradle restrains the MX7 The passive cradle does not have an external device connector e g power RS 232 cable Wireless client interaction is available as long as the mobile device has sufficient energy in the MX7 main battery pack and a clear signal path The cradle is lined with strips of hook and loop fabric to ensure a snug fit between the MX7 and the inside of the cradle The vehicle cradle should be mounted in an area in the vehicle where it e Does not obstruct the driver s vision or safe vehicle operation e Will be protected from rain or inclement weather e Will be protected from extremely high concentrations of dust or wind blown debris e Can be easily accessed by a user seated in the driver s seat There are two mounting options for the cr

LXE MX7 Scanner User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents